第二 《沙门果经》注释显示巴利原文
2. Sāmaññaphalasuttavaṇṇanā
王臣论述的注释显示巴利原文
Rājāmaccakathāvaṇṇanā
150 “如是我闻……在王舍城”等,即是《沙门果经》。以下是对前文未曾解释之词的注释——“在王舍城”:在那座以此命名的城中。因为该城曾被曼陀特王、大典尊等所执持,故称为“王舍城”。人们也以其他方式加以解释,但那些并无实义;那仅是此城的名称。此城在佛陀时代与转轮王时代是城市,其余时候则空旷无人,被夜叉占据,成为他们的住所而住立。“住”:通常泛指处于任何一种住——威仪住、天住、梵住、圣住等。在此处,则特指安住于行、住、坐、卧等威仪中的某一类。因此,世尊无论行走、站立、坐着还是躺着,都应知为“住”。因为世尊以另一种威仪中断前一种威仪所生的不适,使身体不致衰损而能持续运作,故称为“住”。显示巴利原文
150.Evaṃme sutaṃ…pe… rājagaheti sāmaññaphalasuttaṃ. Tatrāyaṃ apubbapadavaṇṇanā – rājagaheti evaṃnāmake nagare. Tañhi mandhātumahāgovindādīhi pariggahitattā rājagahanti vuccati. Aññepi ettha pakāre vaṇṇayanti, kiṃ tehi? Nāmamattametaṃ tassa nagarassa. Taṃ panetaṃ buddhakāle ca cakkavattikāle ca nagaraṃ hoti, sesakāle suññaṃ hoti yakkhapariggahitaṃ, tesaṃ vasanavanaṃ hutvā tiṭṭhati. Viharatīti avisesena iriyāpathadibbabrahmaariyavihāresu aññataravihārasamaṅgiparidīpanametaṃ. Idha pana ṭhānagamananisajjasayanappabhedesu iriyāpathesu aññatarairiyāpathasamāyogaparidīpanaṃ. Tena ṭhitopi gacchantopi nisinnopi sayānopi bhagavā viharati ceva veditabbo. So hi ekaṃ iriyāpathabādhanaṃ aññena iriyāpathena vicchinditvā aparipatantaṃ attabhāvaṃ harati pavatteti, tasmā viharatīti vuccati.
“在儿科医耆婆的芒果园”——这是为了指明世尊依某一行境村而住,并说明其附近的住所。因此,这里的意思应理解为:“住于王舍城,在儿科医耆婆的芒果园”,即住在王舍城附近的儿科医耆婆的芒果园中。此处用依格表示“附近”的含义。其中,“耆婆”因活下来而得名;“儿科医”因由王子抚养而得名。正如经中说:“‘咦,那是被乌鸦围住了吗?’‘王子,是个孩子。’‘他活着吗?’‘活着,王子。’‘那么,把那孩子带到后宫,交给乳母们抚养吧。’”因为活下来,便取名为“耆婆”;因为由王子抚养,便取名为“儿科医”。(《大品》328)这是此处的简要说明,详细内容见于《耆婆根本篇》。关于他的裁决解说,则载于律藏注《一切善见》的学处释义中。显示巴利原文
Jīvakassa komārabhaccassa ambavaneti idamassa yaṃ gocaragāmaṃ upanissāya viharati, tassa samīpanivāsanaṭṭhānaparidīpanaṃ. Tasmā – rājagahe viharati jīvakassa komārabhaccassa ambavaneti rājagahasamīpe jīvakassa komārabhaccassa ambavane viharatīti evamettha attho veditabbo. Samīpatthe hetaṃ bhummavacanaṃ. Tattha jīvatīti jīvako, kumārena bhatoti komārabhacco. Yathāha – ‘‘kiṃ bhaṇe, etaṃ kākehi samparikiṇṇanti? Dārako devāti. Jīvati bhaṇeti? Jīvati, devāti. Tena hi, bhaṇe taṃ dārakaṃ amhākaṃ antepuraṃ netvā dhātīnaṃ detha posetunti. Tassa jīvatīti jīvakoti nāmaṃ akaṃsu. Kumārena posāpitoti komārabhaccoti nāmaṃ akaṃsū’’ti (mahāva. 328) ayaṃ panettha saṅkhepo. Vitthārena pana jīvakavatthukhandhake āgatameva. Vinicchayakathāpissa samantapāsādikāya vinayaṭṭhakathāyaṃ vuttā.
再者,这位耆婆曾有一次,世尊体内体液偏盛,身体失调,他为世尊施以清泻后,供养了一件细布双衣。在衣供养后的随喜说法结束时,他安立于须陀洹果。他心想:“我一天要去侍奉佛陀两三次,而竹林精舍太远,我的芒果园园林则比较近,我何不在这里为世尊兴建住所呢?”于是,他就在那芒果园中,修建了夜居处、昼居处、山窟、小屋、殿堂等,又建造了与世尊相配的香室,并用高达十八肘、色泽如铜板的围墙将芒果园围了起来。然后,他以佛陀为上首的比丘僧团,供养衣食,令僧众饱足,行施水后,将这座精舍奉献了出来。正是因此事,而说“在儿科医耆婆的芒果园”。显示巴利原文
Ayaṃ pana jīvako ekasmiṃ samaye bhagavato dosābhisannaṃ kāyaṃ virecetvā siveyyakaṃ dussayugaṃ datvā vatthānumodanāpariyosāne sotāpattiphale patiṭṭhāya cintesi – ‘‘mayā divasassa dvattikkhattuṃ buddhupaṭṭhānaṃ gantabbaṃ, idañca veḷuvanaṃ atidūre, mayhaṃ pana ambavanaṃ uyyānaṃ āsannataraṃ, yaṃnūnāhaṃ ettha bhagavato vihāraṃ kāreyya’’nti. So tasmiṃ ambavane rattiṭṭhānadivāṭhānaleṇakuṭimaṇḍapādīni sampādetvā bhagavato anucchavikaṃ gandhakuṭiṃ kārāpetvā ambavanaṃ aṭṭhārasahatthubbedhena tambapaṭṭavaṇṇena pākārena parikkhipāpetvā buddhappamukhaṃ bhikkhusaṅghaṃ sacīvarabhattena santappetvā dakkhiṇodakaṃ pātetvā vihāraṃ niyyātesi. Taṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ – ‘‘jīvakassa komārabhaccassa ambavane’’ti.
“一千二百五十位比丘”:即差五十不足一千三百位比丘,也就是一千二百五十位比丘。“王”等词的解释如下:他凭依自在的威德,以四摄事令大众欢喜、增长,故称“王”。他是摩揭陀人的主宰,故称“摩揭陀王”。出生时,即被占相师预言“将成父王的仇敌”,因此名为“阿阇世”。显示巴利原文
Aḍḍhateḷasehi bhikkhusatehīti aḍḍhasatena ūnehi terasahi bhikkhusatehi. Rājātiādīsu rājati attano issariyasampattiyā catūhi saṅgahavatthūhi mahājanaṃ rañjeti vaḍḍhetīti rājā. Magadhānaṃ issaroti māgadho. Ajātoyeva rañño sattu bhavissatīti nemittakehi niddiṭṭhoti ajātasattu.
据说,当胎儿还在母腹中时,王后曾生起一种强烈的渴求:“啊,我真想喝国王右臂的血!”她想:“如此重大的渴求竟会生起,绝不能对任何人说。”因无法向人诉说,她变得消瘦苍白。国王问她:“贤妻啊,你身体的色泽不似往常,是何缘故?”“大王,请别问。”国王一再追问:“贤妻啊,你心中的想法不告诉我,又能告诉谁呢?”如此反复逼问,她终于说了出来。国王听后说:“愚人,你为何觉得此事如此沉重?”于是召来医师,用金刀割开手臂,以金碟盛血,掺水后让她喝下。占相师们听闻此事,预言道:“这个胎儿将成为国王的仇敌,国王将被他杀害。”王后听后心想:“据说从我腹中出生的孩子会杀害国王。”便想堕胎,于是前往花园,让人按压腹部,但胎儿并未堕下。她一次又一次前去,反复如此。国王思量她为何频繁前往花园,得知原因后说:“贤妻啊,你腹中的是男是女尚未可知,你竟这般对待自己将要出生的孩子。若在赡部洲,这会暴露出极大的无德之聚。你不要再这样做了。”于是制止了她,并派人守护。到了临产时,王后又生起“我要杀了他”的念头。守护的人当时便将婴儿移走。显示巴利原文
Tasmiṃ kira kucchigate deviyā evarūpo dohaḷo uppajji – ‘‘aho vatāhaṃ rañño dakkhiṇabāhulohitaṃ piveyya’’nti, sā ‘‘bhāriye ṭhāne dohaḷo uppanno, na sakkā kassaci ārocetu’’nti taṃ kathetuṃ asakkontī kisā dubbaṇṇā ahosi. Taṃ rājā pucchi – ‘‘bhadde, tuyhaṃ attabhāvo na pakativaṇṇo, kiṃ kāraṇa’’nti? ‘‘Mā puccha, mahārājāti’’. ‘‘Bhadde, tvaṃ attano ajjhāsayaṃ mayhaṃ akathentī kassa kathessasī’’ti tathā tathā nibandhitvā kathāpesi. Sutvā ca – ‘‘bāle, kiṃ ettha tuyhaṃ bhāriyasaññā ahosī’’ti vejjaṃ pakkosāpetvā suvaṇṇasatthakena bāhuṃ phālāpetvā suvaṇṇasarakena lohitaṃ gahetvā udakena sambhinditvā pāyesi. Nemittakā taṃ sutvā – ‘‘esa gabbho rañño sattu bhavissati, iminā rājā haññissatī’’ti byākariṃsu. Devī sutvā – ‘‘mayhaṃ kira kucchito nikkhanto rājānaṃ māressatī’’ti gabbhaṃ pātetukāmā uyyānaṃ gantvā kucchiṃ maddāpesi, gabbho na patati. Sā punappunaṃ gantvā tatheva kāresi. Rājā kimatthaṃ ayaṃ abhiṇhaṃ uyyānaṃ gacchatīti parivīmaṃsanto taṃ kāraṇaṃ sutvā – ‘‘bhadde, tava kucchiyaṃ puttoti vā dhītāti vā na paññāyati, attano nibbattadārakaṃ evamakāsīti mahā aguṇarāsipi no jambudīpatale āvibhavissati, mā tvaṃ evaṃ karohī’’ti nivāretvā ārakkhaṃ adāsi. Sā gabbhavuṭṭhānakāle ‘‘māressāmī’’ti cintesi. Tadāpi ārakkhamanussā dārakaṃ apanayiṃsu. Athāparena samayena vuḍḍhippattaṃ kumāraṃ deviyā dassesuṃ. Sā taṃ disvāva puttasinehaṃ uppādesi, tena naṃ māretuṃ nāsakkhi. Rājāpi anukkamena puttassa oparajjamadāsi.
后来,有一次,提婆达多独自静处思惟:“舍利弗有一批徒众,大目犍连有一批徒众,大迦叶有一批徒众,他们各自有各自的担纲,我也应当立一个担纲。”他想:“没有利养,便无法聚集徒众,来,让我获取利养吧。”于是,按照《犍度》中所载的方法,他以神通变化使阿阇世王子信服,王子对他生起信心,每日早晚各以五百辆车运来饮食供养,对他极为信赖。一天,提婆达多来到王子面前,这样说道:“王子,过去的人寿命长,现在的人寿命短。所以,王子,你杀掉父亲成为国王;我杀掉世尊成为佛陀。”就这样,他鼓动王子去行弑父之事。显示巴利原文
Athekasmiṃ samaye devadatto rahogato cintesi – ‘‘sāriputtassa parisā mahāmoggallānassa parisā mahākassapassa parisāti, evamime visuṃ visuṃ dhurā, ahampi ekaṃ dhuraṃ nīharāmī’’ti. So ‘‘na sakkā vinā lābhena parisaṃ uppādetuṃ, handāhaṃ lābhaṃ nibbattemī’’ti cintetvā khandhake āgatanayena ajātasattuṃ kumāraṃ iddhipāṭihāriyena pasādetvā sāyaṃ pātaṃ pañcahi rathasatehi upaṭṭhānaṃ āgacchantaṃ ativissatthaṃ ñatvā ekadivasaṃ upasaṅkamitvā etadavoca – ‘‘pubbe kho, kumāra, manussā dīghāyukā, etarahi appāyukā, tena hi tvaṃ kumāra, pitaraṃ hantvā rājā hohi, ahaṃ bhagavantaṃ hantvā buddho bhavissāmī’’ti kumāraṃ pituvadhe uyyojeti.
那位王子心想:“圣尊提婆达多有大神通,没有他不知道的事。”于是他把匕首绑在大腿上,白天里便心怀惶恐、畏惧、疑虑与恐惧,进入后宫,做出了如前所述的那种残忍之事。随后,大臣们将他捉住,审问之后商议道:“王子当杀,提婆达多当杀,所有比丘也都该杀。”他们想依照国王的命令行事,便将此事禀告了国王。显示巴利原文
So – ‘‘ayyo devadatto mahānubhāvo, etassa aviditaṃ nāma natthī’’ti ūruyā potthaniyaṃ bandhitvā divā divassa bhīto ubbiggo ussaṅkī utrasto antepuraṃ pavisitvā vuttappakāraṃ vippakāraṃ akāsi. Atha naṃ amaccā gahetvā anuyuñjitvā – ‘‘kumāro ca hantabbo, devadatto ca, sabbe ca bhikkhū hantabbā’’ti sammantayitvā rañño āṇāvasena karissāmāti rañño ārocesuṃ.
国王夺去了那些曾想杀害他的大臣的职位,将那些不想杀害他的人安置在高位,然后问王子:“王子,你为何想要杀我?”“大王,我是为了王位。”国王便将王位给了他。显示巴利原文
Rājā ye amaccā māretukāmā ahesuṃ, tesaṃ ṭhānantarāni acchinditvā, ye na māretukāmā, te uccesu ṭhānesu ṭhapetvā kumāraṃ pucchi – ‘‘kissa pana tvaṃ, kumāra, maṃ māretukāmosī’’ti? ‘‘Rajjenamhi, deva, atthiko’’ti. Rājā tassa rajjaṃ adāsi.
他心想:“我的心愿达成了。”便去告诉提婆达多。提婆达多便对他说:“你以为把豺藏在里面,自己就像那裹在鼓里的人一样万无一失吗?再过几天,你的父王便会想起你对他的这些凌辱,自己重新做回国王。”他便问:“尊者,那我该怎么办?”“从根斩断,杀了他。”“尊者,我的父王乃是佛陀的声闻弟子,怎能杀他?”“用断绝饮食的办法让他死。”于是,他便下令将父亲关进炙热房。所谓的“炙热房”,就是为了执行刑罚而建造的熏烟房。他还下令:“除了我的母亲,不许任何人前去探视。”王后把食物盛在金碗里,藏在怀中带进去。国王吃了食物,得以维持生命。他又问:“我父王是怎么活下来的?”听说此事后,便命令:“不准我母亲把食物藏在怀里带进去。”此后,王后便把食物藏在发髻里带进去。他听说后,又下令:“不准盘着发髻进去。”于是,王后把食物放在金鞋里,盖好之后,穿着鞋进去。国王靠此维持生命。他再问:“又是怎么活下来的?”得知此事后,又说:“也不准穿着鞋进去。”从此以后,王后便用香水沐浴,在身上涂上四种甘味,再披上衣服进去。国王舔舐她的身体来维显示巴利原文
So mayhaṃ manoratho nipphannoti devadattassa ārocesi. Tato naṃ so āha – ‘‘tvaṃ siṅgālaṃ antokatvā bheripariyonaddhapuriso viya sukiccakārimhīti maññasi, katipāheneva te pitā tayā kataṃ avamānaṃ cintetvā sayameva rājā bhavissatī’’ti. Atha, bhante, kiṃ karomīti? Mūlaghaccaṃ ghātehīti. Nanu, bhante, mayhaṃ pitā na satthavajjhoti? Āhārupacchedena naṃ mārehīti. So pitaraṃ tāpanagehe pakkhipāpesi, tāpanagehaṃ nāma kammakaraṇatthāya kataṃ dhūmagharaṃ. ‘‘Mama mātaraṃ ṭhapetvā aññassa daṭṭhuṃ mā dethā’’ti āha. Devī suvaṇṇasarake bhattaṃ pakkhipitvā ucchaṅgenādāya pavisati. Rājā taṃ bhuñjitvā yāpeti. So – ‘‘mayhaṃ pitā kathaṃ yāpetī’’ti pucchitvā taṃ pavattiṃ sutvā – ‘‘mayhaṃ mātu ucchaṅgaṃ katvā pavisituṃ mā dethā’’ti āha. Tato paṭṭhāya devī moḷiyaṃ pakkhipitvā pavisati. Tampi sutvā ‘‘moḷiṃ bandhitvā pavisituṃ mā dethā’’ti. Tato suvaṇṇapādukāsu bhattaṃ ṭhapetvā pidahitvā pādukā āruyha pavisati. Rājā tena yāpeti. Puna ‘‘kathaṃ yāpetī’’ti pucchitvā tamatthaṃ sutvā ‘‘pādukā āruyha pavisitumpi mā dethā’’ti āha. Tato paṭṭhāya devī gandhodakena nhāyitvā sarīraṃ catumadhurena makkhetvā pārupitvā pavisati. Rājā tassā sarīraṃ lehitvā yāpeti. Puna pucchitvā taṃ pavattiṃ sutvā ‘‘ito paṭṭhāya mayhaṃ mātu pavesanaṃ nivārethā’’ti āha. Devī dvāramūle ṭhatvā ‘‘sāmi, bimbisāra, etaṃ daharakāle māretuṃ na adāsi, attano sattuṃ attanāva posesi, idaṃ pana dāni te pacchimadassanaṃ, nāhaṃ ito paṭṭhāya tumhe passituṃ labhāmi, sace mayhaṃ doso atthi, khamatha devā’’ti roditvā kanditvā nivatti.
从那以后,国王便再也没有饮食了。他靠着道果的安乐和经行来维持生命,身体也显得极为光洁。他又问:“喂,我父王是怎么维生的?”听说“大王,他是靠经行维生的,身体还变得极为光洁”之后,他便心想:现在我要断了他的经行。于是,他派了理发师,传令说:“把我父王的脚掌用剃刀割开,再涂上盐和油,用烧得通红的相思木炭去炙烤。”国王见到这些人时,心想:“一定是我儿子受了什么人的教唆,这些人是来为我刮须理发的。”他们走近后,顶礼国王,站在一旁。当被问到“你们为什么来”时,他们便将那道命令如实禀报。国王说:“那就去执行你们国王的命令吧。”他们说:“请安坐,大王。”然后顶礼国王,说道:“大王,我们是在执行国王的命令,请不要对我们生起嗔怒,这样的事实在与您这样的法王不相称。”说完,他们便用左手握住国王的脚踝,右手拿起剃刀,割开脚底,涂上盐和油,再用烧得通红的相思木炭去炙烤。据说,这是因为国王过去曾穿着鞋走进塔庙的庭院,又用未洗的脚去踩踏专为就座铺设的华贵椅台,正是那行为的果报。国王生起了剧烈的苦受。他一面忆念着:“啊,佛陀!啊,法!啊,僧显示巴利原文
Tato paṭṭhāya rañño āhāro natthi. Rājā maggaphalasukhena caṅkamena yāpeti. Ativiya assa attabhāvo virocati. So – ‘‘kathaṃ, me bhaṇe, pitā yāpetī’’ti pucchitvā ‘‘caṅkamena, deva, yāpeti; ativiya cassa attabhāvo virocatī’’ti sutvā ‘caṅkamaṃ dānissa hāressāmī’ti cintetvā – ‘‘mayhaṃ pitu pāde khurena phāletvā loṇatelena makkhetvā khadiraṅgārehi vītaccitehi pacathā’’ti nhāpite pesesi. Rājā te disvā – ‘‘nūna mayhaṃ putto kenaci saññatto bhavissati, ime mama massukaraṇatthāyāgatā’’ti cintesi. Te gantvā vanditvā aṭṭhaṃsu. ‘Kasmā āgatatthā’ti ca puṭṭhā taṃ sāsanaṃ ārocesuṃ. ‘‘Tumhākaṃ rañño manaṃ karothā’’ti ca vuttā ‘nisīda, devā’ti vatvā ca rājānaṃ vanditvā – ‘‘deva, mayaṃ rañño āṇaṃ karoma, mā amhākaṃ kujjhittha, nayidaṃ tumhādisānaṃ dhammarājūnaṃ anucchavika’’nti vatvā vāmahatthena gopphake gahetvā dakkhiṇahatthena khuraṃ gahetvā pādatalāni phāletvā loṇatelena makkhetvā khadiraṅgārehi vītaccitehi paciṃsu. Rājā kira pubbe cetiyaṅgaṇe saupāhano agamāsi, nisajjanatthāya paññattakaṭasārakañca adhotehi pādehi akkami, tassāyaṃ nissandoti vadanti. Rañño balavavedanā uppannā. So – ‘‘aho buddho, aho dhammo, aho saṅgho’’ti anussarantoyeva cetiyaṅgaṇe khittamālā viya milāyitvā cātumahārājikadevaloke vessavaṇassa paricārako janavasabho nāma yakkho hutvā nibbatti.
就在那一天,阿阇世的儿子也出生了。报告儿子出生和父王去世的两封信,在同一时刻送达。大臣们心想:“我们应当先禀报王子出生的事。”于是将那封信呈到国王手中。就在那一瞬间,国王心中生起了对儿子的深切怜爱,这爱遍满全身,激荡心潮,直透骨髓。也就在那一刻,他忆起了父王的深恩:“我出生时,父王对我一定也生起了同样的爱。”他便说:“快去,释放我的父王!”大臣们问:“释放什么,大王?”说着,将另一封信呈到他手中。显示巴利原文
Taṃ divasameva ajātasattussa putto jāto, puttassa jātabhāvañca pitumatabhāvañca nivedetuṃ dve lekhā ekakkhaṇeyeva āgatā. Amaccā – ‘‘paṭhamaṃ puttassa jātabhāvaṃ ārocessāmā’’ti taṃ lekhaṃ rañño hatthe ṭhapesuṃ. Rañño taṅkhaṇeyeva puttasineho uppajjitvā sakalasarīraṃ khobhetvā aṭṭhimiñjaṃ āhacca aṭṭhāsi. Tasmiṃ khaṇe pituguṇamaññāsi – ‘‘mayi jātepi mayhaṃ pitu evameva sineho uppanno’’ti. So – ‘‘gacchatha, bhaṇe, mayhaṃ pitaraṃ vissajjethā’’ti āha. ‘‘Kiṃ vissajjāpetha, devā’’ti itaraṃ lekhaṃ hatthe ṭhapayiṃsu.
他听闻这消息后,哭着来到母亲面前,问道:“母亲,我出生时,父王对我有过这样的爱吗?”母亲回答:“傻孩子,你说什么?你很小的时候,手指上长了一个疮。那时你啼哭不止,众人怎么哄也哄不住,便抱着你来到正坐在判决堂的父王面前。父王将你的手指放入自己口中,那个疮便在口中破裂了。那时,父王因为对你的爱,没有把脓血吐出来,而是直接咽了下去。父王对你的爱就是如此。”他悲泣哀叹之后,为父王办理了后事。显示巴利原文
So taṃ pavattiṃ sutvā rodamāno mātusamīpaṃ gantvā – ‘‘ahosi nu, kho, amma, mayhaṃ pitu mayi jāte sineho’’ti? Sā āha – ‘‘bālaputta, kiṃ vadesi, tava daharakāle aṅguliyā pīḷakā uṭṭhahi. Atha taṃ rodamānaṃ saññāpetuṃ asakkontā taṃ gahetvā vinicchayaṭṭhāne nisinnassa tava pitu santikaṃ agamaṃsu. Pitā te aṅguliṃ mukhe ṭhapesi. Pīḷakā mukheyeva bhijji. Atha kho pitā tava sinehena taṃ lohitamissakaṃ pubbaṃ aniṭṭhubhitvāva ajjhohari. Evarūpo te pitu sineho’’ti. So roditvā paridevitvā pitu sarīrakiccaṃ akāsi.
提婆达多也来到阿阇世面前,说:“大王,请下令派人去,夺取沙门乔达摩的性命。”阿阇世派出人手之后,提婆达多自己登上灵鹫山,用机关推下石头,又放出那罗祇梨大象,但用尽种种方法,都无法杀害世尊。他耗尽了所有的利养与恭敬,去索求五事,却得不到允许,心中便想:“我要用这几项要求来误导大众。”于是他便破僧了。待舍利弗和目犍连领着随众离开后,提婆达多口中吐出热血,卧病在床九个月,心生悔恨。他问:“导师现在住在哪里?”被告知“在祇园”后,他说:“用床抬着我去见导师。”在抬往祇园的路上,由于他没有能见到世尊的业,就在祇园精舍的莲花池旁,大地裂开,他直堕其中,落入大地狱。此处仅作简述,详细事缘记载于《犍度》中,因已有详细记载,此处不再细说。因此,王子尚未出生时,占相师便预言他将成为国王的怨敌,故称“阿阇世”,即未生怨。显示巴利原文
Devadattopi ajātasattuṃ upasaṅkamitvā – ‘‘purise, mahārāja, āṇāpehi, ye samaṇaṃ gotamaṃ jīvitā voropessantī’’ti vatvā tena dinne purise pesetvā sayaṃ gijjhakūṭaṃ āruyha yantena silaṃ pavijjhitvā nāḷāgirihatthiṃ muñcāpetvāpi kenaci upāyena bhagavantaṃ māretuṃ asakkonto parihīnalābhasakkāro pañca vatthūni yācitvā tāni alabhamāno tehi janaṃ saññāpessāmīti saṅghabhedaṃ katvā sāriputtamoggallānesu parisaṃ ādāya pakkantesu uṇhalohitaṃ mukhena chaḍḍetvā navamāse gilānamañce nipajjitvā vippaṭisārajāto – ‘‘kuhiṃ etarahi satthā vasatī’’ti pucchitvā ‘‘jetavane’’ti vutte mañcakena maṃ āharitvā satthāraṃ dassethāti vatvā āhariyamāno bhagavato dassanārahassa kammassa akatattā jetavane pokkharaṇīsamīpeyeva dvedhā bhinnaṃ pathaviṃ pavisitvā mahāniraye patiṭṭhitoti. Ayamettha saṅkhepo. Vitthārakathānayo khandhake āgato. Āgatattā pana sabbaṃ na vuttanti. Evaṃ ajātoyeva rañño sattu bhavissatīti nemittakehi niddiṭṭhoti ajātasattu.
「韦提希子」:指的是憍萨罗国国王女儿的儿子,而非毗提诃国王的儿子。不过,“韦提希”一词,实为“智者”的同义语。正如经典中所说:“韦提希女居士”、“尊者阿难,韦提希牟尼”。此处词义解释如下:能由此而了知,故称「吠陀」,这是“智慧”的同义语。依智慧而行、精勤努力的人,便称为「韦提希」。韦提希的儿子,即是「韦提希子」。显示巴利原文
Vedehiputtoti ayaṃ kosalarañño dhītāya putto, na videharañño. Vedehīti pana paṇḍitādhivacanametaṃ. Yathāha – ‘‘vedehikā gahapatānī (ma. ni. 1.226), ayyo ānando vedehamunī’’ti (saṃ. ni. 2.154). Tatrāyaṃ vacanattho – vidanti etenāti vedo, ñāṇassetaṃ adhivacanaṃ. Vedena īhati ghaṭati vāyamatīti vedehī. Vedehiyā putto vedehiputto.
「其日」:意即在那天、那个日子。「布萨」:指“在此近住”,即“近住者”——依靠戒或禁食而受持后安住。此处更归纳其义:“贤友劫宾那,我们去布萨吧”等语中,布萨指诵巴帝摩卡。“毗舍佉,如此具足八支的布萨,即是已受持的布萨”等语中,指戒。“清净者始终春和,清净者始终布萨”等语中,指禁食斋戒。“名为布萨的龙王”等语中,是施设的名称。“比丘们,不应于布萨日住处……”等语中,指应行布萨之日。在此,取最后一种含义。然此布萨日又分为初八、十四与十五三种。为排除前两种,故说“十五”。因此亦说:“在此近住,故称布萨”。显示巴利原文
Tadahūti tasmiṃ ahu, tasmiṃ divaseti attho. Upavasanti etthāti uposatho, upavasantīti sīlena vā anasanena vā upetā hutvā vasantīti attho. Ayaṃ panettha atthuddhāro – ‘‘āyāmāvuso, kappina, uposathaṃ gamissāmā’’tiādīsu pātimokkhuddeso uposatho. ‘‘Evaṃ aṭṭhaṅgasamannāgato kho, visākhe, uposatho upavuttho’’tiādīsu (a. ni. 8.43) sīlaṃ. ‘‘Suddhassa ve sadā phaggu, suddhassuposatho sadā’’tiādīsu (ma. ni. 1.79) upavāso. ‘‘Uposatho nāma nāgarājā’’tiādīsu (dī. ni. 2.246) paññatti . ‘‘Na, bhikkhave, tadahuposathe sabhikkhukā āvāsā’’tiādīsu (mahāva. 181) upavasitabbadivaso. Idhāpi soyeva adhippeto. So panesa aṭṭhamī cātuddasī pannarasībhedena tividho. Tasmā sesadvayanivāraṇatthaṃ pannaraseti vuttaṃ. Teneva vuttaṃ – ‘‘upavasanti etthāti uposatho’’ti.
「拘牟地」:意为白莲盛开的时节。据说那时白莲盛开,因此处有这些花,故名拘牟地。「四月满月」:即四个月终结时的满月,因是四个月的终点,故称四月满月。此处即直称四月满月日。月圆满、季圆满、年圆满,如此圆圆满满,故称「满」。月亮称为‘摩’,因在此时圆满,故称「满月」。是故‘在圆满、在满月’二词,应依此义理解。显示巴利原文
Komudiyāti kumudavatiyā. Tadā kira kumudāni supupphitāni honti, tāni ettha santīti komudī. Cātumāsiniyāti cātumāsiyā, sā hi catunnaṃ māsānaṃ pariyosānabhūtāti cātumāsī. Idha pana cātumāsinīti vuccati. Māsapuṇṇatāya utupuṇṇatāya saṃvaccharapuṇṇatāya puṇṇā sampuṇṇāti puṇṇā. Mā iti cando vuccati, so ettha puṇṇoti puṇṇamā. Evaṃ puṇṇāya puṇṇamāyāti imasmiṃ padadvaye ca attho veditabbo.
“被群臣围绕”:在这个夜晚,四方如同被银壶中流出的奶汁冲洗过一般,又好像铺满从银殿散落的珍珠串、素馨花环、白衣与白莲,更因脱离了四种垢染的满月之光而煜煜辉映。国王就在这样的夜晚被大臣们簇拥着。“登上最胜高楼”:他登上了那座殿堂的上层,坐在撑起白色伞盖的珍贵金座上。为何这样坐着?为了驱散睡意。自从对父王下手那天起,这国王只要一闭眼想要入睡,就会像被数百支矛刺中一样,悚然惊醒、哭喊着醒来。别人问他出了什么事,他什么也不说。因此他不喜欢睡觉,为了消解睡意才这样坐着。而且,当天正值星宿节庆。整座城市洒扫洁净,遍地撒了细沙,家家户户门前都用五色鲜花、炒米、满水罐装饰起来,到处高悬幢幡彩旗,灿烂的灯串把每个角落都映照得通明。大街小巷里挤满了欢度星宿节日的百姓。因此也有人说,他是为了节日才坐着的。不过,注疏对此下了定论:“王家虽可说日日都犹如节庆,但他其实只是为了驱散睡意才坐在那里。”显示巴利原文
Rājāmaccaparivutoti evarūpāya rajataghaṭaviniggatāhi khīradhārāhi dhoviyamānadisābhāgāya viya, rajatavimānaviccutehi muttāvaḷisumanakusumadāmasetadukūlakumudavisarehi samparikiṇṇāya viya ca, caturupakkilesavimuttapuṇṇacandappabhāsamudayobhāsitāya rattiyā rājāmaccehi parivutoti attho. Uparipāsādavaragatoti pāsādavarassa uparigato. Mahārahe samussitasetacchatte kañcanāsane nisinno hoti. Kasmā nisinno? Niddāvinodanatthaṃ. Ayañhi rājā pitari upakkantadivasato paṭṭhāya – ‘‘niddaṃ okkamissāmī’’ti nimīlitamattesuyeva akkhīsu sattisataabbhāhato viya kandamānoyeva pabujjhi. Kimetanti ca vutte, na kiñcīti vadati. Tenassa amanāpā niddā, iti niddāvinodanatthaṃ nisinno. Api ca tasmiṃ divase nakkhattaṃ saṅghuṭṭhaṃ hoti. Sabbaṃ nagaraṃ sittasammaṭṭhaṃ vippakiṇṇavālukaṃ pañcavaṇṇakusumalājapuṇṇaghaṭapaṭimaṇḍitagharadvāraṃ samussitadhajapaṭākavicitrasamujjalitadīpamālālaṅkatasabbadisābhāgaṃ vīthisabhāgena racchāsabhāgena nakkhattakīḷaṃ anubhavamānena mahājanena samākiṇṇaṃ hoti. Iti nakkhattadivasatāyapi nisinnoti vadanti. Evaṃ pana vatvāpi – ‘‘rājakulassa nāma sadāpi nakkhattameva, niddāvinodanatthaṃyeva panesa nisinno’’ti sanniṭṭhānaṃ kataṃ.
“发出感兴语”:指他说出了感慨之语。正如油多得容器盛不住了,便会溢流而出,这称为“溢出”;水多得湖池容受不下了,便会漫衍而流,这称为“暴流”;同样地,当喜悦之语多得内心容受不住,在内部无法安住,必须从外迸发出来时,便叫作“感兴语”。此处即指他说出了这种由喜悦所成的话语。显示巴利原文
Udānaṃudānesīti udāhāraṃ udāhari, yathā hi yaṃ telaṃ mānaṃ gahetuṃ na sakkoti, vissanditvā gacchati, taṃ avasekoti vuccati. Yañca jalaṃ taḷākaṃ gahetuṃ na sakkoti, ajjhottharitvā gacchati, taṃ oghoti vuccati; evameva yaṃ pītivacanaṃ hadayaṃ gahetuṃ na sakkoti, adhikaṃ hutvā anto asaṇṭhahitvā bahinikkhamati, taṃ udānanti vuccati. Evarūpaṃ pītimayaṃ vacanaṃ nicchāresīti attho.
“明净”:即远离了过失,是说远离了云、雾、烟、尘、罗睺这五种垢染。因此,“令人愉悦”等是五个称叹之语。那夜晚之所以“令人愉悦”,是因它令大众心生欢喜。之所以“极为庄严”,是因它被去除了上述诸垢的月光所照耀,故极其美丽。之所以“值得观赏”,是因它适宜被观看。之所以“令人净信”,是因它能令心清净、生起信心。之所以“具相”,是因它适于作为白昼等时段的特征。显示巴利原文
Dosināti dosāpagatā, abbhā, mahikā, dhūmo, rajo, rāhūti imehi pañcahi upakkilesehi virahitāti vuttaṃ hoti. Tasmā ramaṇīyātiādīni pañca thomanavacanāni. Sā hi mahājanassa manaṃ ramayatīti ramaṇīyā. Vuttadosavimuttāya candappabhāya obhāsitattā ativiya surūpāti abhirūpā. Dassituṃ yuttāti dassanīyā. Cittaṃ pasādetīti pāsādikā. Divasamāsādīnaṃ lakkhaṇaṃ bhavituṃ yuttāti lakkhaññā.
“今天到底哪位”:即“今天究竟哪位”的意思。“沙门或婆罗门”:因其平息了罪恶,故称沙门;因其摒弃了罪恶,故称婆罗门。“我们亲近他后”:这是对句子的说明,意思是:我们亲近他、向他请问,听了那甘美之法后,心能生起净信。如此,国王以这整句话作出了暗示性的邀请。对谁而作呢?对耆婆。为了何种目的?为了得见世尊。难道国王不能亲自去拜见世尊吗?确实不能。为何?因为他犯有大过。显示巴利原文
Kaṃ nu khvajjāti kaṃ nu kho ajja. Samaṇaṃ vā brāhmaṇaṃ vāti samitapāpatāya samaṇaṃ. Bāhitapāpatāya brāhmaṇaṃ. Yaṃ no payirupāsatoti vacanabyattayo esa, yaṃ amhākaṃ pañhapucchanavasena payirupāsantānaṃ madhuraṃ dhammaṃ sutvā cittaṃ pasīdeyyāti attho. Iti rājā iminā sabbenapi vacanena obhāsanimittakammaṃ akāsi. Kassa akāsīti? Jīvakassa. Kimatthaṃ? Bhagavato dassanatthaṃ. Kiṃ bhagavantaṃ sayaṃ dassanāya upagantuṃ na sakkotīti? Āma, na sakkoti. Kasmā? Mahāparādhatāya.
“因此”的意思是:世尊的侍者是位圣弟子,而国王自己的父亲却被杀害了;提婆达多又依仗于此,对世尊做了许多无义之事。这便是大过。正因为此大过,他无法亲自前往。然而,耆婆是世尊的侍者,国王心想:“我要借着紧随耆婆身后的机会去见世尊。”于是作出了这个暗示的邀请。那么,耆婆知不知道“这是对我所作的暗示”呢?知道。那他为何沉默不语?为了制止旁人插话打乱。显示巴利原文
Tena hi bhagavato upaṭṭhāko ariyasāvako attano pitā mārito, devadatto ca tameva nissāya bhagavato bahuṃ anatthamakāsi, iti mahāparādho esa, tāya mahāparādhatāya sayaṃ gantuṃ na sakkoti. Jīvako pana bhagavato upaṭṭhāko, tassa piṭṭhichāyāya bhagavantaṃ passissāmīti obhāsanimittakammaṃ akāsi. Kiṃ jīvako pana – ‘‘mayhaṃ idaṃ obhāsanimittakamma’’nti jānātīti? Āma jānāti. Atha kasmā tuṇhī ahosīti? Vikkhepapacchedanatthaṃ.
因为在那集会中,聚集了许多六师外道的侍者。他们因亲近那些未经善训之人,自身亦未得善训。若我开始讲述世尊的功德,他们便会不时起身,各自宣扬己师的功德。如此一来,我对世尊功德的讲述便无法进行到底。而国王若去亲近这些外道师的家庭资助者,一旦了知实情,便会对他们所讲的那些功德心生不悦,反过来问我。那时,我便能无有障碍地讲述导师的功德,进而引导国王到导师跟前去。耆婆正因为心中清楚这些原委,为了制止旁人插话打乱,才保持沉默的。显示巴利原文
Tassañhi parisati channaṃ satthārānaṃ upaṭṭhākā bahū sannipatitā, te asikkhitānaṃ payirupāsanena sayampi asikkhitāva. Te mayi bhagavato guṇakathaṃ āraddhe antarantarā uṭṭhāyuṭṭhāya attano satthārānaṃ guṇaṃ kathessanti, evaṃ me satthu guṇakathā pariyosānaṃ na gamissati. Rājā pana imesaṃ kulūpake upasaṅkamitvā gahitāsāratāya tesaṃ guṇakathāya anattamano hutvā maṃ paṭipucchissati, athāhaṃ nibbikkhepaṃ satthu guṇaṃ kathetvā rājānaṃ satthu santikaṃ gahetvā gamissāmīti jānantova vikkhepapacchedanatthaṃ tuṇhī ahosīti.
那些大臣们也这样想:“今晚国王以五首偈颂赞美夜色,定是想要亲近某位沙门或婆罗门,提出问题、听闻法义。听法之后,他若生起净信,便会向那人作大供养。因此,谁若有族亲沙门成为王室的依止,那对他而言实在是好。”显示巴利原文
Tepi amaccā evaṃ cintesuṃ – ‘‘ajja rājā pañcahi padehi rattiṃ thometi, addhā kiñci samaṇaṃ vā brāhmaṇaṃ vā upasaṅkamitvā pañhaṃ pucchitvā dhammaṃ sotukāmo, yassa cesa dhammaṃ sutvā pasīdissati, tassa ca mahantaṃ sakkāraṃ karissati, yassa pana kulūpako samaṇo rājakulūpako hoti, bhaddaṃ tassā’’ti.
151-152 他们这样想后,便各自开始赞叹自己的族亲沙门,一个说:“我将赞叹族亲沙门的功德,然后带国王去”,另一个说:“我将去”等等。因此说“某位国王的大臣”等。其中,“富楼那”是一位自称导师者的名字,“迦叶”是他的姓。据说,他出生时,恰好补足了一户人家所缺、使之满百的奴隶数,因此人们给他取名为“富楼那”(充数)。由于他自称是吉祥者,对他而言,既没有“这是恶作罪”的指责,也没有未做而自称已做的事。他心想:“我在这里做什么?”便逃跑了。那时,强盗们抢走了他的衣服,他不会用树叶或草来遮身,便以裸体进入一个村庄。人们看见他,心想:“这位沙门是阿拉汉,是少欲者,无人能及”,便拿着午前食等去亲近他。他想:“我因为没有外衣,才得到这些供养”,从此以后,即使获得了外衣也不穿,便依此状态受持了出家。在他座下,另有五百人也相继出家了。显示巴利原文
151-152. Te evaṃ cintetvā – ‘‘ahaṃ attano kulūpakasamaṇassa vaṇṇaṃ vatvā rājānaṃ gahetvā gamissāmi, ahaṃ gamissāmī’’ti attano attano kulūpakānaṃ vaṇṇaṃ kathetuṃ āraddhā. Tenāha – ‘‘evaṃ vutte aññataro rājāmacco’’tiādi. Tattha pūraṇoti tassa satthupaṭiññassa nāmaṃ. Kassapoti gottaṃ. So kira aññatarassa kulassa ekūnadāsasataṃ pūrayamāno jāto, tenassa pūraṇoti nāmaṃ akaṃsu. Maṅgaladāsattā cassa ‘‘dukkaṭa’’nti vattā natthi, akataṃ vā na katanti. So ‘‘kimahaṃ ettha vasāmī’’ti palāyi. Athassa corā vatthāni acchindiṃsu, so paṇṇena vā tiṇena vā paṭicchādetumpi ajānanto jātarūpeneva ekaṃ gāmaṃ pāvisi. Manussā taṃ disvā ‘‘ayaṃ samaṇo arahā appiccho, natthi iminā sadiso’’ti pūvabhattādīni gahetvā upasaṅkamanti. So – ‘‘mayhaṃ sāṭakaṃ anivatthabhāvena idaṃ uppanna’’nti tato paṭṭhāya sāṭakaṃ labhitvāpi na nivāsesi, tadeva pabbajjaṃ aggahesi, tassa santike aññepi aññepīti pañcasatamanussā pabbajiṃsu. Taṃ sandhāyāha – ‘‘pūraṇo kassapo’’ti.
有僧伽者:指拥有僧伽——即出家众团体——故称有僧伽者。有众者:指拥有那个团体,故称有众者。众导师:因教导威仪学处而成为那个团体的导师,故称众导师。知名者:即著名的、广为人知。有名声者:指拥有“少欲、知足。由于少欲,连衣服也不穿”这样传扬开来的名声,故称有名声者。创教者:即创立宗派的人。被公认善好者:指被大众公认“这位是善好者、美妙者、善士”,故称被公认善好者。对于大众:即对于未听闻的、愚痴的凡夫。知夜者:指出家以来知道已度过许多夜晚,故称知夜者。久出家者:指久处出家状态者,故称久出家者;因为刚出家不久的人,其言不可信受,故说久出家者。经历长时间者:指经历了长久时间的人。显示巴利原文
Pabbajitasamūhasaṅkhāto saṅgho assa atthīti saṅghī. Sveva gaṇo assa atthīti gaṇī. Ācārasikkhāpanavasena tassa gaṇassa ācariyoti gaṇācariyo. Ñātoti paññāto pākaṭo. ‘‘Appiccho santuṭṭho. Appicchatāya vatthampi na nivāsetī’’ti evaṃ samuggato yaso assa atthīti yasassī. Titthakaroti laddhikaro. Sādhusammatoti ayaṃ sādhu, sundaro, sappurisoti evaṃ sammato. Bahujanassāti assutavato andhabālaputhujjanassa. Pabbajitato paṭṭhāya atikkantā bahū rattiyo jānātīti rattaññū. Ciraṃ pabbajitassa assāti cirapabbajito, acirapabbajitassa hi kathā okappanīyā na hoti, tenāha ‘‘cirapabbajito’’ti. Addhagatoti addhānaṃ gato, dve tayo rājaparivaṭṭe atītoti adhippāyo. Vayoanuppattoti pacchimavayaṃ anuppatto. Idaṃ ubhayampi – ‘‘daharassa kathā okappanīyā na hotī’’ti etaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ.
“Tuṇhī ahosi”(他默然而坐)——如同有人本想品尝色泽金黄、甘甜如熟芒果的果实,却见到手中放着的是一枚焦苦难咽的果子,登时兴味索然。国王也是如此:他原本渴望听闻那与禅那、神通等功德相应、足以击破无常、苦、无我三相的甘露法音,然而先前一见富楼那便已心生不悦,此刻又听到赞叹其功德,愈发不乐,于是默然无语。虽然心中不快,转念却又思忖:“若我呵斥他,揪住他的脖颈撵出去,旁人便会恐惧地想:‘无论谁说话,国王都会如此处置’,从此再无人敢言语了。”因此虽不欢喜,也只得容忍那番话,一直保持沉默。继而另一位大臣心想:“我来称颂自家亲族的沙门功德”,便接着说了起来。由此说到“Aññataropi kho”(又有一位)等。此后所有内容,都可依此方式理解。显示巴利原文
Tuṇhīahosīti suvaṇṇavaṇṇaṃ madhurarasaṃ ambapakkaṃ khāditukāmo puriso āharitvā hatthe ṭhapitaṃ kājarapakkaṃ disvā viya jhānābhiññādiguṇayuttaṃ tilakkhaṇabbhāhataṃ madhuraṃ dhammakathaṃ sotukāmo pubbe pūraṇassa dassanenāpi anattamano idāni guṇakathāya suṭṭhutaraṃ anattamano hutvā tuṇhī ahosi. Anattamano samānopi pana ‘‘sacāhaṃ etaṃ tajjetvā gīvāyaṃ gahetvā nīharāpessāmi, ‘yo yo kathesi, taṃ taṃ rājā evaṃ karotī’ti bhīto aññopi koci kiñci na kathessatī’’ti amanāpampi taṃ kathaṃ adhivāsetvā tuṇhī eva ahosi. Athañño – ‘‘ahaṃ attano kulūpakassa vaṇṇaṃ kathessāmī’’ti cintetvā vattuṃ ārabhi. Tena vuttaṃ – aññataropi khotiādi. Taṃ sabbaṃ vuttanayeneva veditabbaṃ.
此处,「Makkhalī」(末伽梨)是其名。因出生于牛棚,故又以「Gosāla」(牛棚生)为别名。据说,他曾在泥泞的地上托着油罐行走,主人叮嘱说:“孩子,别滑倒(mā khalī)!”他却因放逸滑倒在地,因惧怕主人而拔腿便逃。主人追上去揪住了他的衣角,他便弃下外衣,裸形而逃,成了一名裸行外道。其余情形与富楼那相似。显示巴利原文
Ettha pana makkhalīti tassa nāmaṃ. Gosālāya jātattā gosāloti dutiyaṃ nāmaṃ. Taṃ kira sakaddamāya bhūmiyā telaghaṭaṃ gahetvā gacchantaṃ – ‘‘tāta, mā khalī’’ti sāmiko āha. So pamādena khalitvā patitvā sāmikassa bhayena palāyituṃ āraddho. Sāmiko upadhāvitvā dussakaṇṇe aggahesi. So sāṭakaṃ chaḍḍetvā acelako hutvā palāyi. Sesaṃ pūraṇasadisameva.
153 「Ajito」(阿耆多)是其名,因身披人发织毯,故称「Kesakambalo」(披发毯者)。将此名号合在一处,便称为「阿耆多·翅舍甘巴喇(Ajito Kesakambalo)」。此处所说的“发毯”,即是以人的头发编织而成的毯子。世间再无比这更下劣的衣物了。正如经中所说:“诸比丘,譬如一切编织之衣中,发毯最为低劣。诸比丘,发毯于寒时冰冷,于暑时灼热,色泽丑陋,气味恶臭,触之令人苦痛。”(《增支部》3.138)显示巴利原文
153.Ajitoti tassa nāmaṃ. Kesakambalaṃ dhāretīti kesakambalo. Iti nāmadvayaṃ saṃsanditvā ajito kesakambaloti vuccati . Tattha kesakambalo nāma manussakesehi katakambalo. Tato paṭikiṭṭhataraṃ vatthaṃ nāma natthi. Yathāha – ‘‘seyyathāpi, bhikkhave, yāni kānici tantāvutānaṃ vatthānaṃ, kesakambalo tesaṃ paṭikiṭṭho akkhāyati. Kesakambalo, bhikkhave, sīte sīto, uṇhe uṇho, dubbaṇṇo duggandho dukkhasamphasso’’ti (a. ni. 3.138).
154 “Pakudho”是他的名,“Kaccāyano”是他的姓,如此名姓合称,即为“帕古陀·迦旃延”。此人禁止使用冷水,即便便后也不用水净身,除非找到温水或米汤才会净身。若需渡过河流或路上的积水,他便堆起一个沙堆,认定“我戒已破”,重新受持戒律后,方才继续前行。他就是这样一位没有少许瑞相的修行者。显示巴利原文
154.Pakudhoti tassa nāmaṃ. Kaccāyanoti gottaṃ. Iti nāmagottaṃ saṃsanditvā pakudho kaccāyanoti vuccati. Sītudakapaṭikkhittako esa, vaccaṃ katvāpi udakakiccaṃ na karoti, uṇhodakaṃ vā kañjiyaṃ vā labhitvā karoti, nadiṃ vā maggodakaṃ vā atikkamma – ‘‘sīlaṃ me bhinna’’nti vālikathūpaṃ katvā sīlaṃ adhiṭṭhāya gacchati. Evarūpo nissirīkaladdhiko esa.
155 “Sañcayo”是他的名,他是贝拉塔的儿子,故称“贝拉塔之子”。显示巴利原文
155.Sañcayoti tassa nāmaṃ. Belaṭṭhassa puttoti belaṭṭhaputto.
156 “尼乾陀”一名,源于他们如此宣称:“我们没有结缚的烦恼,没有缠缚的烦恼,我们是舍离烦恼结缚的人。”由此得名。他是那塔的儿子,故称为“那塔子”。显示巴利原文
156. Amhākaṃ gaṇṭhanakileso palibandhanakileso natthi, kilesagaṇṭharahitā mayanti evaṃvāditāya laddhanāmavasena nigaṇṭho. Nāṭassa putto nāṭaputto.
儿科医耆婆事迹的注释显示巴利原文
Komārabhaccajīvakakathāvaṇṇanā
157 “那时,国王……”:据说,国王听了他们的话后心想:‘我不想听他说话的人,偏一个个抢着说;而我想听他说话的那位,却像饮了龙毒呆立着的金翅鸟一样,沉默不语。这对我来说真不是好事。’接着他又想:‘耆婆是已寂静的佛陀世尊的侍者,自己极为寂静,因此就像一位具足威仪的比丘,只是默然坐着。如果我不先开口,他是不会说话的。然而,当大象踩踏时,能抓住的只有大象自己的脚呀。’于是,他便主动与耆婆交谈,因此说了‘那时,国王……’这一句。此处的‘为何沉默?’是在问:‘因为什么缘故而沉默?’意思是:‘这些大臣们各自称赞自己的家僧,讲得滔滔不绝。难道你是因为不像他们那样有自己的家僧,所以无言以对吗?难道我父王没有赐给你富贵和自在?还是说你是一位没有信心的人呢?’他这样问道。显示巴利原文
157.Athakho rājāti rājā kira tesaṃ vacanaṃ sutvā cintesi – ‘‘ahaṃ yassa yassa vacanaṃ na sotukāmo, so so eva kathesi. Yassa panamhi vacanaṃ sotukāmo, esa nāgavasaṃ pivitvā ṭhito supaṇṇo viya tuṇhībhūto, anattho vata me’’ti. Athassa etadahosi – ‘‘jīvako upasantassa buddhassa bhagavato upaṭṭhāko, sayampi upasanto, tasmā vattasampanno bhikkhu viya tuṇhībhūtova nisinno, na esa mayi akathente kathessati, hatthimhi kho pana maddante hatthisseva pādo gahetabbo’’ti tena saddhiṃ sayaṃ mantetumāraddho. Tena vuttaṃ – ‘‘atha kho rājā’’ti. Tattha kiṃ tuṇhīti kena kāraṇena tuṇhī. Imesaṃ amaccānaṃ attano attano kulūpakasamaṇassa vaṇṇaṃ kathentānaṃ mukhaṃ nappahoti . Kiṃ yathā etesaṃ, evaṃ tava kulūpakasamaṇo natthi, kiṃ tvaṃ daliddo, na te mama pitarā issariyaṃ dinnaṃ, udāhu assaddhoti pucchati.
于是,耆婆这样想:‘这位国王是想让我称说我家僧的功德,现在可不是我保持沉默的时候了。可是,这些大臣都是在礼敬国王之后,坐着称赞各自家僧的功德。对我来说,用这种方式来宣说导师的功德,是不合适的。’于是,他从座位上起身,面向世尊精舍的方向,以五体投地之礼恭敬礼拜后,将十指合拢,闪耀光辉的合掌举至头顶,说道:‘大王,请您不要这样想:“这人是随便去亲近某个沙门的那种人。”我的导师,在入母胎时、从母胎出生时、伟大的出家时、成就正觉时,以及初转法轮时,这一万世界都曾震动;他如此这般地展现了双神变,如此这般地自天宫下降。大王,我将宣说导师的功德,请您一心专注谛听。’说完,他便开始宣说:‘大王,这位世尊是阿拉汉、正自觉者……’等等。此处的‘彼世尊’,是依‘如此这般地讲述’的意义而使用的受格,意思是‘关于彼世尊’。‘善妙’指具足善妙的功德,也就是最上的意思。‘称誉之声’指称誉本身,或者指赞叹的声誉。‘已高扬’指已经遍满含天神的世间而高扬。如何遍满的呢?即通过‘彼世尊是阿拉汉、正自觉者……乃至……世尊’。显示巴利原文
Tato jīvakassa etadahosi – ‘‘ayaṃ rājā maṃ kulūpakasamaṇassa guṇaṃ kathāpeti, na dāni me tuṇhībhāvassa kālo, yathā kho panime rājānaṃ vanditvā nisinnāva attano kulūpakasamaṇānaṃ guṇaṃ kathayiṃsu, na mayhaṃ evaṃ satthuguṇe kathetuṃ yutta’’nti uṭṭhāyāsanā bhagavato vihārābhimukho pañcapatiṭṭhitena vanditvā dasanakhasamodhānasamujjalaṃ añjaliṃ sirasi paggahetvā – ‘‘mahārāja, mā maṃ evaṃ cintayittha, ‘ayaṃ yaṃ vā taṃ vā samaṇaṃ upasaṅkamatī’ti, mama satthuno hi mātukucchiokkamane, mātukucchito nikkhamane, mahābhinikkhamane, sambodhiyaṃ, dhammacakkappavattane ca, dasasahassilokadhātu kampittha, evaṃ yamakapāṭihāriyaṃ akāsi, evaṃ devorohaṇaṃ, ahaṃ satthuno guṇe kathayissāmi, ekaggacitto suṇa, mahārājā’’ti vatvā – ‘‘ayaṃ deva, bhagavā arahaṃ sammāsambuddho’’tiādimāha. Tattha taṃ kho pana bhagavantanti itthambhūtākhyānatthe upayogavacanaṃ, tassa kho pana bhagavatoti attho. Kalyāṇoti kalyāṇaguṇasamannāgato, seṭṭhoti vuttaṃ hoti. Kittisaddoti kittiyeva. Thutighoso vā. Abbhuggatoti sadevakaṃ lokaṃ ajjhottharitvā uggato. Kinti? ‘‘Itipi so bhagavā arahaṃ sammāsambuddho…pe… bhagavā’’ti.
这里的句子连接是:彼世尊,因为这样的原因称为阿拉汉,因为这样的原因称为正自觉者……乃至……因为这样的原因称为世尊。意思是说,是由于这些原因。其中,因为远离了一切烦恼敌、因为摧破了一切烦恼辐、因为值得领受资具等供养、因为在造作恶行中没有任何隐匿,基于这些原因,依这些理由,彼世尊应被了知为阿拉汉。如此,先列举出论母,所有这些词句的详细解释,在《清净道论》的佛随念解说中已有详尽说明,它们的详细内容应当从那里去了解。显示巴利原文
Tatrāyaṃ padasambandho – so bhagavā itipi arahaṃ itipi sammāsambuddho…pe… itipi bhagavāti. Iminā ca iminā ca kāraṇenāti vuttaṃ hoti. Tattha ārakattā arīnaṃ, arānañca hatattā, paccayādīnaṃ arahattā, pāpakaraṇe rahābhāvāti, imehi tāva kāraṇehi so bhagavā arahanti veditabbotiādinā nayena mātikaṃ nikkhipitvā sabbāneva cetāni padāni visuddhimagge buddhānussatiniddese vitthāritānīti tato nesaṃ vitthāro gahetabbo.
耆婆逐一解释每个词语的含义后,便说:‘大王,我的导师正是这样的阿拉汉,正是这样的正自觉者……乃至……正是这样的世尊。’随后他说道:‘大王,请前去亲近世尊吧。或许,当大王亲近世尊时,您的心会变得明净。’此处,当他说‘请大王前去亲近他’时,也表达了这层意思:‘大王,即使像您这样由百人、千人乃至十万人围绕请问,我的导师也能把握所有人的心并为之说法。请大王放心前去亲近、提问吧。’显示巴利原文
Jīvako pana ekamekassa padassa atthaṃ niṭṭhāpetvā – ‘‘evaṃ, mahārāja, arahaṃ mayhaṃ satthā, evaṃ sammāsambuddho…pe… evaṃ bhagavā’’ti vatvā – ‘‘taṃ, devo, bhagavantaṃ payirupāsatu, appeva nāma devassa taṃ bhagavantaṃ payirupāsato cittaṃ pasīdeyyā’’ti āha. Ettha ca taṃ devo payirupāsatūti vadanto ‘‘mahārāja, tumhādisānañhi satenapi sahassenapi satasahassenapi puṭṭhassa mayhaṃ satthuno sabbesaṃ cittaṃ gahetvā kathetuṃ thāmo ca balañca atthi, vissattho upasaṅkamitvā puccheyyāsi mahārājā’’ti āha.
国王听闻世尊的功德叙述时,全身被五色喜持续遍满。他当即生起前往之心,心想:‘此刻我要前往十力尊处,除了耆婆,恐怕再没有谁能如此迅速地备好车乘了。’于是他说:‘那么,亲爱的耆婆,请备象车吧。’显示巴利原文
Raññopi bhagavato guṇakathaṃ suṇantassa sakalasarīraṃ pañcavaṇṇāya pītiyā nirantaraṃ phuṭaṃ ahosi. So taṅkhaṇaññeva gantukāmo hutvā – ‘‘imāya kho pana velāya mayhaṃ dasabalassa santikaṃ gacchato na añño koci khippaṃ yānāni yojetuṃ sakkhissati aññatra jīvakā’’ti cintetvā – ‘‘tena hi, samma jīvaka, hatthiyānāni kappāpehī’’ti āha.
158 这里的‘那么’是表达催促语气的不变词,意思是:‘去办吧,亲爱的耆婆。’‘象车’:虽然当时也有马、车等种种车乘,但象车最为上等。前往最上者之处,理应乘坐最上等车乘前往。再者,马、车等车乘会发出声响,远处便能听到,而坐象车一路随行的人则听不到那些声音。此外,他还考虑到,前往已彻底寂灭的世尊之处,也应当使用同样寂静无喧哗的车乘。如此思惟后,他说:‘象车’。显示巴利原文
158. Tattha tena hīti uyyojanatthe nipāto. Gaccha, samma jīvakāti vuttaṃ hoti. Hatthiyānānīti anekesu assarathādīsu yānesu vijjamānesupi hatthiyānaṃ uttamaṃ; uttamassa santikaṃ uttamayāneneva gantabbanti ca, assayānarathayānāni sasaddāni, dūratova tesaṃ saddo suyyati, hatthiyānassa padānupadaṃ gacchantāpi saddaṃ na suṇanti. Nibbutassa pana kho bhagavato santike nibbuteheva yānehi gantabbanti ca cintayitvā hatthiyānānīti āha.
“五百母象”是指五百头母象。“令备办”是说让人把适合骑乘的象备好。“堪乘之象”就是指适合骑乘、可以跨坐上去的象。那么,耆婆做的这件事是国王未曾吩咐的吗?确实,国王未曾吩咐。为什么呢?因为他很有智慧。据说他当时心里这样想:“国王说‘我现在就去’,但国王素来怨敌众多。万一途中发生意外,众人便会责备我:‘耆婆,你对国王说了些什么,在不恰当的时候就把国王带出去?’同样,他们也会责备世尊:‘沙门乔达摩,只因有人谈论自己,就不看时机是否合适而去说法。’所以,我要采取一种方法,既能让我和世尊免于受人责备,又能妥善地做好国王的守护。”显示巴利原文
Pañcamattāni hatthinikāsatānīti pañca kareṇusatāni. Kappāpetvāti ārohaṇasajjāni kāretvā. Ārohaṇīyanti ārohaṇayoggaṃ, opaguyhanti attho. Kiṃ panesa raññā vuttaṃ akāsi avuttanti? Avuttaṃ. Kasmā? Paṇḍitatāya. Evaṃ kirassa ahosi – rājā imāya velāya gacchāmīti vadati, rājāno ca nāma bahupaccatthikā. Sace antarāmagge koci antarāyo hoti, mampi garahissanti – ‘‘jīvako rājā me kathaṃ gaṇhātīti akālepi rājānaṃ gahetvā nikkhamatī’’ti. Bhagavantampi garahissanti ‘‘samaṇo gotamo, ‘mayhaṃ kathā vattatī’ti kālaṃ asallakkhetvāva dhammaṃ kathetī’’ti. Tasmā yathā neva mayhaṃ, na bhagavato, garahā uppajjati; rañño ca rakkhā susaṃvihitā hoti, tathā karissāmī’’ti.
于是,他想:“依靠女人,男子便没有恐惧,有这些女人围绕,我就能安稳地去了。”于是,他备齐了五百母象,又找来五百妇女,让她们换上男装,吩咐说:“你们手持刀剑与矛,围在国王身边护卫。”之后,他又进一步想:“这位国王在今生的这个五蕴身中,并没有证得道果的因缘,而诸佛一定要看到众生因缘具足才会说法。这样吧,我来召集大众,这样一来,导师一定会观察到其中某人的因缘而开示佛法,那就能利益大众了。”于是,他就派人到各处发布通告,并击鼓宣告:“今天国王将要前往世尊那里去,大众应各自随其能力,前来担任国王的随行守护。”显示巴利原文
Tato itthiyo nissāya purisānaṃ bhayaṃ nāma natthi, ‘sukhaṃ itthiparivuto gamissāmī’ti pañca hatthinikāsatāni kappāpetvā pañca itthisatāni purisavesaṃ gāhāpetvā – ‘‘asitomarahatthā rājānaṃ parivāreyyāthā’’ti vatvā puna cintesi – ‘‘imassa rañño imasmiṃ attabhāve maggaphalānaṃ upanissayo natthi, buddhā ca nāma upanissayaṃ disvāva dhammaṃ kathenti. Handāhaṃ, mahājanaṃ sannipātāpemi, evañhi sati satthā kassacideva upanissayena dhammaṃ desessati, sā mahājanassa upakārāya bhavissatī’’ti. So tattha tattha sāsanaṃ pesesi, bheriṃ carāpesi – ‘‘ajja rājā bhagavato santikaṃ gacchati, sabbe attano vibhavānurūpena rañño ārakkhaṃ gaṇhantū’’ti.
于是,大众心想:“听说国王要去拜见导师,今天会有什么样的说法呢?我们还去星宿节庆做什么?我们也到那边去吧。”就这样,所有人都手持香、花鬘等物品,等候在路上,期盼国王的到来。耆婆也向国王禀报说:“大王,象车已经备妥,现在请您判断时机是否合适。”这里的“现在请您判断时机是否合适”乃一句客气话,其真实意思是:“您吩咐的事,我已经做好,现在去或不去,都请您按自己的心意决定。”显示巴利原文
Tato mahājano cintesi – ‘‘rājā kira satthudassanatthaṃ gacchati, kīdisī vata bho dhammadesanā bhavissati, kiṃ no nakkhattakīḷāya, tattheva gamissāmā’’ti. Sabbe gandhamālādīni gahetvā rañño āgamanaṃ ākaṅkhamānā magge aṭṭhaṃsu. Jīvakopi rañño paṭivedesi – ‘‘kappitāni kho te, deva, hatthiyānāni, yassa dāni kālaṃ maññasī’’ti. Tattha yassa dāni kālaṃ maññasīti upacāravacanametaṃ. Idaṃ vuttaṃ hoti – ‘‘yaṃ tayā āṇattaṃ, taṃ mayā kataṃ, idāni tvaṃ yassa gamanassa vā agamanassa vā kālaṃ maññasi, tadeva attano ruciyā karohī’’ti.
159 「各别妇女」,即各自分开、互不混杂的妇女,指的是一头母象配一位妇女这样的安排。「当火炬被执持时」,是说手持的火炬正被高高举起的时候。「以广大王威」,即凭借着极为广大的国王威势。经文亦作“mahaccā”,义即“广大”,这只是性别的语法变化罢了。这里所说的“王威”,就是指国王的神通威力。那么,他的王威具体是什么呢?正是统御方圆三百由旬、两大王国所带来的自在威势与荣光。虽未事先筹备,只一念“某日国王将去亲近如来”,那五百名妇女便当即换上男装,裹好头巾,肩挎利剑,手持嵌宝长矛,齐齐整整齐地走了出来。正是针对此情景,经文才说:「令各别妇女乘象……」。显示巴利原文
159.Paccekā itthiyoti pāṭiyekkā itthiyo, ekekissā hatthiniyā ekekaṃ itthinti vuttaṃ hoti. Ukkāsu dhāriyamānāsūti daṇḍadīpikāsu dhāriyamānāsu. Mahacca rājānubhāvenāti mahatā rājānubhāvena. Mahaccātipi pāḷi, mahatiyāti attho, liṅgavipariyāyo esa. Rājānubhāvo vuccati rājiddhi. Kā panassa rājiddhi? Tiyojanasatānaṃ dvinnaṃ mahāraṭṭhānaṃ issariyasirī. Tassa hi asukadivasaṃ rājā tathāgataṃ upasaṅkamissatīti paṭhamataraṃ saṃvidahane asatipi taṅkhaṇaññeva pañca itthisatāni purisavesaṃ gahetvā paṭimukkaveṭhanāni aṃse āsattakhaggāni maṇidaṇḍatomare gahetvā nikkhamiṃsu. Yaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ – ‘‘paccekā itthiyo āropetvā’’ti.
此外,还有一万六千位刹帝利舞伎女围绕在国王身边。在她们的外围,是侏儒、驼背、山野人等;再外围一层,是后宫那些可信赖的侍卫;侍卫的外围,是约六万名服饰缤纷、仪态华丽的大臣;大臣的外围,是约九万名严饰着各种庄严具、手持各式兵器的王族子弟,看来犹如年轻的持明者一般;在他们外围,是约一万名婆罗门,身着价值百金的衣服,将价值五百金的上衣搭于一边肩上,沐浴清净,遍抹上等香料,颈悬金花鬘等种种饰物,容光焕发,高举右手,一路呼喊着胜利的欢呼声而前行;在他们外围,是五音齐奏的乐器队伍;乐器队伍外围,是由弓箭手排列而成的防卫圈;弓箭手外围,是一队队象群;象群外围,是骏马交颈相接、并排行进的马队;马队外围,是车辆首尾相衔、彼此碰撞的队列;车辆外围,是勇士们挥臂交击的阵形;最外围,则是十八种兵种组成的军阵,各各依其身份所应有的庄严与装饰,显得光彩夺目。耆婆医师正是这样布置国王的随从队伍的,他使得即使有人站在最外围放箭,那箭也绝射不到国王。而耆婆本人则在离国王不远处步行,心里思忖。显示巴利原文
Aparāpi soḷasasahassakhattiyanāṭakitthiyo rājānaṃ parivāresuṃ. Tāsaṃ pariyante khujjavāmanakakirātādayo. Tāsaṃ pariyante antepurapālakā vissāsikapurisā. Tesaṃ pariyante vicitravesavilāsino saṭṭhisahassamattā mahāmattā. Tesaṃ pariyante vividhālaṅkārapaṭimaṇḍitā nānappakāraāvudhahatthā vijjādharataruṇā viya navutisahassamattā raṭṭhiyaputtā. Tesaṃ pariyante satagghanikāni nivāsetvā pañcasatagghanikāni ekaṃsaṃ katvā sunhātā suvilittā kañcanamālādinānābharaṇasobhitā dasasahassamattā brāhmaṇā dakkhiṇahatthaṃ ussāpetvā jayasaddaṃ ghosantā gacchanti. Tesaṃ pariyante pañcaṅgikāni tūriyāni. Tesaṃ pariyante dhanupantiparikkhepo. Tassa pariyante hatthighaṭā. Hatthīnaṃ pariyante gīvāya gīvaṃ paharamānā assapanti. Assapariyante aññamaññaṃ saṅghaṭṭanarathā. Rathapariyante bāhāya bāhaṃ paharayamānā yodhā. Tesaṃ pariyante attano attano anurūpāya ābharaṇasampattiyā virocamānā aṭṭhārasa seniyo. Iti yathā pariyante ṭhatvā khitto saro rājānaṃ na pāpuṇāti, evaṃ jīvako komārabhacco rañño parisaṃ saṃvidahitvā attanā rañño avidūreneva gacchati – ‘‘sace koci upaddavo hoti, paṭhamatara rañño jīvitadānaṃ dassāmī’’ti. Ukkānaṃ pana ettakāni satāni vā sahassāni vāti paricchedo natthīti evarūpiṃ rājiddhiṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ – ‘‘mahaccarājānubhāvena yena jīvakassa komārabhaccassa ambavanaṃ, tena pāyāsī’’ti.
「曾有一种怖畏」这一句中,所说的怖畏有四种:心的惊悚怖畏、智怖畏、所缘怖畏以及愧怖畏。在这四种怖畏当中,诸如“缘于生而有的恐怖恐惧”(《中部·怖畏恐惧经》)等说法所指出的,便是“心的惊悚怖畏”;诸如“那些众生听闻如来说法之后,大多生起了怖畏、悚惧与惊怖”(《相应部》3.78)这类经文所指出的,便是“智怖畏”;而像“这想必就是那种怖畏恐惧降临了”(《中部》1.49)这一句经文所指出的,便是“所缘怖畏”。显示巴利原文
Ahudeva bhayanti ettha cittutrāsabhayaṃ, ñāṇabhayaṃ, ārammaṇabhayaṃ, ottappabhayanti catubbidhaṃ bhayaṃ, tattha ‘‘jātiṃ paṭicca bhayaṃ bhayānaka’’ntiādinā nayena vuttaṃ cittutrāsabhayaṃ nāma. ‘‘Tepi tathāgatassa dhammadesanaṃ sutvā yebhuyyena bhayaṃ saṃvegaṃ santāsaṃ āpajjantī’’ti (saṃ. ni. 3.78) evamāgataṃ ñāṇabhayaṃ nāma. ‘‘Etaṃ nūna taṃ bhayabheravaṃ āgacchatī’’ti (ma. ni. 1.49) ettha vuttaṃ ārammaṇabhayaṃ nāma.
人们称赞怯懦者,只因那里没有勇士;
因为善者出于怖畏,不造作恶行。”(《相应部》1.33)
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Bhīruṃ pasaṃsanti, na hi tattha sūraṃ; Bhayā hi santo, na karonti pāpa’’nti . (saṃ. ni. 1.33);
这称为‘愧怖畏’。在这些怖畏中,此处的‘心惊怖畏’,意思是‘那时确实存在’。‘惊悚’即惊悚的状态,指全身颤抖。‘毛发竖立’即令毛发竖立,指毛发竖立的状态。然而,这种毛发竖立,在听闻正法等生起喜悦时,也会由于喜悦而生起。对于生性胆怯的人,在遭受突击、见到夜叉等时,也会由于怖畏而生起。这里应理解为由怖畏所引起的毛发竖立。显示巴利原文
Idaṃ ottappabhayaṃ nāma. Tesu idha cittutrāsabhayaṃ, ahu ahosīti attho. Chambhitattanti chambhitassa bhāvo. Sakalasarīracalananti attho. Lomahaṃsoti lomahaṃsanaṃ, uddhaṃ ṭhitalomatāti attho. So panāyaṃ lomahaṃso dhammassavanādīsu pītiuppattikāle pītiyāpi hoti . Bhīrukajātikānaṃ sampahārapisācādidassanesu bhayenāpi. Idha bhayalomahaṃsoti veditabbo.
为什么他会恐惧呢?有人说是因为黑暗。据说王舍城有三十二座大城门、六十四座小城门,耆婆的芒果园位于城墙与灵鹫峰之间。他从东门出城,走进山影之中。在那里,山顶遮住了月亮,山影与树影交叠,形成一片黑暗。但这并非真正的原因,因为当时有无数火炬,百千万枝,难以计数,根本没有任何幽暗。显示巴利原文
Kasmā panesa bhītoti? Andhakārenāti eke vadanti. Rājagahe kira dvattiṃsa mahādvārāni, catusaṭṭhi khuddakadvārāni. Jīvakassa ambavanaṃ pākārassa ca gijjhakūṭassa ca antarā hoti. So pācīnadvārena nikkhamitvā pabbatacchāyāya pāvisi, tattha pabbatakūṭena cando chādito, pabbatacchāyāya ca rukkhacchāyāya ca andhakāraṃ ahosīti, tampi akāraṇaṃ. Tadā hi ukkānaṃ satasahassānampi paricchedo natthi.
然而,国王因为四周寂静无声而对耆婆生起了疑惧。据说耆婆曾在高楼上禀告他:“大王,世尊喜好寂静,应以寂静的方式前往。”因此国王禁止了乐器声。乐器只是被拿着而已,侍从们也不高声说话,仅以手势示意,寂静地行走。芒果林中连一声弹指声都听不到。国王们本是喜好声音嬉游的,他因这片寂静而不安,对耆婆起了疑心,心想:“这耆婆在我的芒果林里安排了一千二百五十位比丘,此处却连一丝弹指声都听不到,恐怕有诈。他想骗我出城,在前面布置军队,抓住我,自己便可撑起伞盖称王。此人具足五头大象之力,又紧挨着我行走,而我身边连一个手持武器的士兵都没有。哎呀,我恐怕要遭殃了。”如此恐惧之后,他却无法装作不害怕,便将自己的恐惧表露了出来。因此经文说:“那时,国王……没有声响。”(Atha kho rājā…pe… na nigghoso)其中,“sammā”是朋友间的称呼,意思是:“朋友,你不会骗我吧?”“不欺骗”(na palambhesi)是说:“你不会把没有的事说成有,来骗我吧?”“人声”(niggho)显示巴利原文
Ayaṃ pana appasaddataṃ nissāya jīvake āsaṅkāya bhīto. Jīvako kirassa uparipāsādeyeva ārocesi – ‘‘mahārāja appasaddakāmo bhagavā, appasaddeneva upasaṅkamitabbo’’ti. Tasmā rājā tūriyasaddaṃ nivāresi. Tūriyāni kevalaṃ gahitamattāneva honti, vācampi uccaṃ anicchārayamānā accharāsaññāya gacchanti. Ambavanepi kassaci khipitasaddopi na suyyati. Rājāno ca nāma saddābhiratā honti. So taṃ appasaddataṃ nissāya ukkaṇṭhito jīvakepi āsaṅkaṃ uppādesi. ‘‘Ayaṃ jīvako mayhaṃ ambavane aḍḍhateḷasāni bhikkhusatānī’’ti āha. Ettha ca khipitasaddamattampi na suyyati, abhūtaṃ maññe, esa vañcetvā maṃ nagarato nīharitvā purato balakāyaṃ upaṭṭhapetvā maṃ gaṇhitvā attanā chattaṃ ussāpetukāmo. Ayañhi pañcannaṃ hatthīnaṃ balaṃ dhāreti. Mama ca avidūreneva gacchati, santike ca me āvudhahattho ekapurisopi natthi. Aho vata me anattho’’ti. Evaṃ bhāyitvā ca pana abhīto viya sandhāretumpi nāsakkhi. Attano bhītabhāvaṃ tassa āvi akāsi. Tena vuttaṃ. ‘‘Atha kho rājā…pe… na nigghoso’’ti. Tattha sammāti vayassābhilāpo esa, kacci maṃ vayassāti vuttaṃ hoti. Na palambhesīti yaṃ natthi taṃ atthīti vatvā kacci maṃ na vippalambhayasi. Nigghosoti kathāsallāpanigghoso.
“莫怕,大王!” (Mā bhāyi, mahārājā) 耆婆心想:“这位国王不了解我,认为‘这个人不会夺人之命’。然而,如果我不安慰他,他可能会崩溃。”于是坚定地安慰道:“莫怕,大王!”然后说:“陛下,不……”等。「往前」 (abhikkamā) 意思是朝着那个方向去,也就是进入。因为说一遍不够坚定,便又快速说了两遍。“那些圆亭中的灯火在燃烧” (Ete maṇḍalamāḷe dīpā jhāyantī),大王,贼众是不会点亮灯火待在那里的,而这些圆亭中灯火明亮。凭着这灯火的标志,大王请前往。显示巴利原文
Mā bhāyi, mahārājāti jīvako – ‘‘ayaṃ rājā maṃ na jānāti ‘nāyaṃ paraṃ jīvitā voropetī’ti; sace kho pana naṃ na assāsessāmi, vinasseyyā’’ti cintayitvā daḷhaṃ katvā samassāsento ‘‘mā bhāyi mahārājā’’ti vatvā ‘‘na taṃ devā’’tiādimāha. Abhikkamāti abhimukho kama gaccha, pavisāti attho. Sakiṃ vutte pana daḷhaṃ na hotīti taramānova dvikkhattuṃ āha. Ete maṇḍalamāḷe dīpā jhāyantīti mahārāja, corabalaṃ nāma na dīpe jāletvā tiṭṭhati, ete ca maṇḍalamāḷe dīpā jalanti. Etāya dīpasaññāya yāhi mahārājāti vadati.
《沙门果问》注释显示巴利原文
Sāmaññaphalapucchāvaṇṇanā
160 "象地"是指能骑象行走的地方,称为象地。"大象下来"意为在精舍的外门楼处从象背下来。双脚落地的刹那,世尊的威光遍触国王的身体。顿时,他全身流汗,衣服犹如刚被拧过一般。他忆起自己的罪过,生起极大恐怖。他无法径直走向世尊,便抓住耆婆的手,如同游园一般,赞叹精舍道:"善哉,耆婆友,你做得很好,做得很好!"就这样逐步走到圆亭门前,即到达世尊所在之处。显示巴利原文
160.Nāgassa bhūmīti yattha sakkā hatthiṃ abhirūḷhena gantuṃ, ayaṃ nāgassa bhūmi nāma. Nāgā paccorohitvāti vihārassa bahidvārakoṭṭhake hatthito orohitvā. Bhūmiyaṃ patiṭṭhitasamakālameva pana bhagavato tejo rañño sarīraṃ phari. Athassa tāvadeva sakalasarīrato sedā mucciṃsu, sāṭakā pīḷetvā apanetabbā viya ahesuṃ. Attano aparādhaṃ saritvā mahābhayaṃ uppajji. So ujukaṃ bhagavato santikaṃ gantuṃ asakkonto jīvakaṃ hatthe gahetvā ārāmacārikaṃ caramāno viya ‘‘idaṃ te samma jīvaka suṭṭhu kāritaṃ idaṃ suṭṭhu kārita’’nti vihārassa vaṇṇaṃ bhaṇamāno anukkamena yena maṇḍalamāḷassa dvāraṃ tenupasaṅkami, sampattoti attho.
"朋友,在哪里呢?"为什么他这样问?有人说:"因为不认识。"据说他年少时曾随父亲见过当时的世尊,但后来由于亲近恶友,犯下杀父之罪,又派遣刺客,放出那罗祇梨象,成为大罪人,之后便再未到过世尊面前,故因不认得而发问。但这并不合理。因为世尊具足种种殊胜相,以随形好庄严,放出六色光明,照耀整个园苑,犹如众星所围绕的满月,被比丘僧团环绕,端坐于圆亭中央,谁会不认识呢?然而,国王只是基于自身的威仪而问。王族本来就有这样的习气,即使知道也装作不知而问。耆婆听了,心想:"这位国王站在大地上问'大地在哪里',仰望天空问'日月在哪里',站在须弥山脚问'须弥山在哪里',同样地,他站在十力尊者面前,却问'世尊在哪里'。好吧,我来为他指示世尊。"于是向着世尊合掌致敬,说:"陛下,那位就是世尊。"等等。"在前"意为:世尊被僧团环绕,安坐于前。显示巴利原文
Kahaṃ pana sammāti kasmā pucchīti. Eke tāva ‘‘ajānanto’’ti vadanti. Iminā kira daharakāle pitarā saddhiṃ āgamma bhagavā diṭṭhapubbo, pacchā pana pāpamittasaṃsaggena pitughātaṃ katvā abhimāre pesetvā dhanapālaṃ muñcāpetvā mahāparādho hutvā bhagavato sammukhībhāvaṃ na upagatapubboti asañjānanto pucchatīti. Taṃ akāraṇaṃ, bhagavā hi ākiṇṇavaralakkhaṇo anubyañjanapaṭimaṇḍito chabbaṇṇāhi rasmīhi sakalaṃ ārāmaṃ obhāsetvā tārāgaṇaparivuto viya puṇṇacando bhikkhugaṇaparivuto maṇḍalamāḷamajjhe nisinno, taṃ ko na jāneyya. Ayaṃ pana attano issariyalīlāya pucchati. Pakati hesā rājakulānaṃ, yaṃ jānantāpi ajānantā viya pucchanti. Jīvako pana taṃ sutvā – ‘ayaṃ rājā pathaviyaṃ ṭhatvā kuhiṃ pathavīti, nabhaṃ ulloketvā kuhiṃ candimasūriyāti, sinerumūle ṭhatvā kuhiṃ sinerūti vadamāno viya dasabalassa purato ṭhatvā kuhiṃ bhagavā’ti pucchati. ‘‘Handassa bhagavantaṃ dassessāmī’’ti cintetvā yena bhagavā tenañjaliṃ paṇāmetvā ‘‘eso mahārājā’’tiādimāha. Purakkhatoti parivāretvā nisinnassa purato nisinno.
161 "往世尊那里去"意为:世尊所在之处,他便前往,即来到世尊近前。"站在一边"意为:不碰触世尊或比丘僧团,在适宜自己站立的一处,顶礼世尊后,独自站立。"默然,默然"意为:无论他向哪里看,那里都一片默然。因为在这时,没有一位比丘躁动手脚或发出任何声响,也没有一位比丘去注视那饰以一切庄严、有舞女眷属相伴、立于世尊面前的国王或随众。所有比丘都只是凝望着世尊而坐。显示巴利原文
161.Yena bhagavā tenupasaṅkamīti yattha bhagavā tattha gato, bhagavato santikaṃ upagatoti attho. Ekamantaṃ aṭṭhāsīti bhagavantaṃ vā bhikkhusaṃghaṃ vā asaṅghaṭṭayamāno attano ṭhātuṃ anucchavike ekasmiṃ padese bhagavantaṃ abhivādetvā ekova aṭṭhāsi. Tuṇhībhūtaṃ tuṇhībhūtanti yato yato anuviloketi, tato tato tuṇhībhūtamevāti attho. Tattha hi ekabhikkhussapi hatthakukkuccaṃ vā pādakukkuccaṃ vā khipitasaddo vā natthi, sabbālaṅkārapaṭimaṇḍitaṃ nāṭakaparivāraṃ bhagavato abhimukhe ṭhitaṃ rājānaṃ vā rājaparisaṃ vā ekabhikkhupi na olokesi. Sabbe bhagavantaṃyeva olokayamānā nisīdiṃsu.
国王对僧团的寂静生起净信,见诸根寂静的比丘僧团犹如无垢清澈的湖水,便一遍遍注视,发出感叹。此处所说的“以此”,是指通过身、语、意三方面的戒行寂静,僧团正是以此寂静而寂静。他并非因为想着“啊,愿我儿子出家后也能这样寂静”才说这番话,实则是见僧团后心生净信,忆起了自己的儿子。世间人得到稀有之物或见到罕见之事时,自然就会忆念起亲爱与交好之人,因此他是在见到僧团后,在忆念儿子时这样说的。显示巴利原文
Rājā tesaṃ upasame pasīditvā vigatapaṅkatāya vippasannarahadamiva upasantindriyaṃ bhikkhusaṅghaṃ punappunaṃ anuviloketvā udānaṃ udānesi. Tattha imināti yena kāyikena ca vācasikena ca mānasikena ca sīlūpasamena bhikkhusaṅgho upasanto, iminā upasamenāti dīpeti. Tattha ‘‘aho vata me putto pabbajitvā ime bhikkhū viya upasanto bhaveyyā’’ti nayidaṃ sandhāya esa evamāha. Ayaṃ pana bhikkhusaṅghaṃ disvā pasanno puttaṃ anussari. Dullabhañhi laddhā acchariyaṃ vā disvā piyānaṃ ñātimittādīnaṃ anussaraṇaṃ nāma lokassa pakatiyeva. Iti bhikkhusaṅghaṃ disvā puttaṃ anussaramāno esa evamāha.
也可如此理解:他出于对儿子的疑虑,希望儿子也能获得这种寂静,所以这样说。据说他是这样思惟的:“我儿子会问:‘父亲尚且年轻,我的祖父在哪里呢?’当他听说‘被你父亲杀死了’,便可能想:‘我也要杀死父亲,夺取王位。’”正是出于对儿子的这种担忧,希望他能获得内心的寂静,所以这样说。然而,尽管他这么说,儿子终究还会杀他。因为这个王族中,父杀之事已连续出现五代:阿阇世杀死频婆娑罗,优陀耶杀死阿阇世;优陀耶的儿子大矛杀死优陀耶;大矛的儿子阿那律杀死大矛;阿那律的儿子龙奴杀死阿那律。国人对龙奴极为愤怒,说道:“这些都是断绝王统的国王,留着有什么用?”于是杀死了龙奴。显示巴利原文
Api ca putte āsaṅkāya tassa upasamaṃ icchamāno pesa evamāha. Evaṃ kirassa ahosi, putto me pucchissati – ‘‘mayhaṃ pitā daharo. Ayyako me kuhi’’nti. So ‘‘pitarā te ghātito’’ti sutvā ‘‘ahampi pitaraṃ ghātetvā rajjaṃ kāressāmī’’ti maññissati. Iti putte āsaṅkāya tassa upasamaṃ icchamāno pesa evamāha. Kiñcāpi hi esa evamāha. Atha kho naṃ putto ghātessatiyeva. Tasmiñhi vaṃse pituvadho pañcaparivaṭṭe gato. Ajātasattu bimbisāraṃ ghātesi, udayo ajātasattuṃ . Tassa putto mahāmuṇḍiko nāma udayaṃ. Tassa putto anuruddho nāma mahāmuṇḍikaṃ. Tassa putto nāgadāso nāma anuruddhaṃ. Nāgadāsaṃ pana – ‘‘vaṃsacchedakarājāno ime, kiṃ imehī’’ti raṭṭhavāsino kupitā ghātesuṃ.
为什么世尊要说“你去了”呢?据说,世尊在国王还未开口时便这样思惟:“这位国王到来后默然无语地站立,他究竟在想什么?”世尊了知他的心念:“他无法与我交谈,便望着比丘僧团,忆起了儿子。如果我不先开口,他一句话也说不出来。那么我就与他交谈吧。”于是,在国王默然无语之后,世尊接着说:“大王,你顺着心中的爱念去了。”它的意思是:犹如从高处涌出的水必定流向低处,大王也是如此,注视比丘僧团之后,便顺着心中的爱念去追忆了。显示巴利原文
Agamā kho tvanti kasmā evamāha? Bhagavā kira rañño vacībhede akateyeva cintesi – ‘‘ayaṃ rājā āgantvā tuṇhī niravo ṭhito, kiṃ nu kho cintesī’’ti. Athassa cittaṃ ñatvā – ‘‘ayaṃ mayā saddhiṃ sallapituṃ asakkonto bhikkhusaṅghaṃ anuviloketvā puttaṃ anussari, na kho panāyaṃ mayi anālapante kiñci kathetuṃ sakkhissati, karomi tena saddhiṃ kathāsallāpa’’nti. Tasmā rañño vacanānantaraṃ ‘‘agamā kho tvaṃ, mahārāja, yathāpema’’nti āha. Tassattho – mahārāja, yathā nāma unname vuṭṭhaṃ udakaṃ yena ninnaṃ tena gacchati, evameva tvaṃ bhikkhusaṅghaṃ anuviloketvā yena pemaṃ tena gatoti.
于是国王心想:“啊,佛陀的功德真是稀有!像我这样对世尊犯下重大过失的人,恐怕再也找不出第二个了。我杀害了世尊最重要的护持者,又听信提婆达多的话,派遣刺客前去行刺,还放出那罗祇梨象,也正是因为我,提婆达多才推出滚石。世尊面对如此罪大恶极的我,竟然还能开口对我说话,十力者的尊口毫无厌嫌!啊,世尊以五种方式安住于无恼害中,真是善为安立。我怎么能舍弃这样的导师,去向外寻求依靠呢?”他这样一想,心中生起喜悦,便开口称唤世尊:“尊者,我所亲爱的……”等等。显示巴利原文
Atha rañño etadahosi – ‘‘aho acchariyā buddhaguṇā, mayā sadiso bhagavato aparādhakārako nāma natthi, mayā hissa aggupaṭṭhāko ghātito, devadattassa ca kathaṃ gahetvā abhimārā pesitā, nāḷāgiri mutto, maṃ nissāya devadattena silā paviddhā, evaṃ mahāparādhaṃ nāma maṃ ālapato dasabalassa mukhaṃ nappahoti; aho bhagavā pañcahākārehi tādilakkhaṇe suppatiṭṭhito. Evarūpaṃ nāma satthāraṃ pahāya bahiddhā na pariyesissāmā’’ti so somanassajāto bhagavantaṃ ālapanto ‘‘piyo me, bhante’’tiādimāha.
162 「向比丘僧团合掌后」(Bhikkhusaṅghassa añjaliṃ paṇāmetvā):据说他这样考虑:“如果我在礼敬世尊之后,又东奔西走地去礼敬比丘僧团,那么世尊就会被置于我身后,这样的举动也是不恭敬的。就像一个人先礼敬了国王,又去礼敬副王,那就等于对国王不尊重了。”因此,他在礼敬世尊后,就直接在原地合掌向比丘僧团礼敬,然后退坐到一旁。「某个地方」(kañcideva desaṃ) 指的是“某个角落”(kañci okāsaṃ)。显示巴利原文
162.Bhikkhusaṅghassaañjaliṃ paṇāmetvāti evaṃ kirassa ahosi bhagavantaṃ vanditvā itocito ca gantvā bhikkhusaṅghaṃ vandantena ca bhagavā piṭṭhito kātabbo hoti, garukāropi cesa na hoti. Rājānaṃ vanditvā uparājānaṃ vandantenapi hi rañño agāravo kato hoti. Tasmā bhagavantaṃ vanditvā ṭhitaṭṭhāneyeva bhikkhusaṅghassa añjaliṃ paṇāmetvā ekamantaṃ nisīdi. Kañcideva desanti kañci okāsaṃ.
接着,世尊为了激起他提问的兴趣,说道:“大王,如果你有所欲问,就请问吧。”(puccha, mahārāja, yadākaṅkhasīti) 这句话的含义是:“你要是想问,就问吧,对我来说,解答疑问并无任何负担。”或者是:“请问吧,无论你想问什么,我都会一一为你解答。”这便是如来以一切知者的身份所作的开许提问(sabbaññupavāraṇa),这种殊胜是独觉佛、上首弟子乃至大声闻弟子所不具备的。因为他们不会说“如果你有什么想问的”(yadākaṅkhasīti),而是会说“我们听了之后会弄清楚的”(sutvā vedissāmāti)。只有诸佛才会说:“贤友,如果你有所欲问,请问吧”(puccha, āvuso, yadākaṅkhasīti),或者说:“大王,如果你有所欲问,请问吧。”显示巴利原文
Athassa bhagavā pañhapucchane ussāhaṃ janento āha – ‘‘puccha, mahārāja, yadākaṅkhasī’’ti. Tassattho – ‘‘puccha yadi ākaṅkhasi, na me pañhavissajjane bhāro atthi’’. Atha vā ‘‘puccha, yaṃ ākaṅkhasi, sabbaṃ te vissajjessāmī’’ti sabbaññupavāraṇaṃ pavāresi, asādhāraṇaṃ paccekabuddhaaggasāvakamahāsāvakehi. Te hi yadākaṅkhasīti na vadanti, sutvā vedissāmāti vadanti. Buddhā pana – ‘‘puccha, āvuso, yadākaṅkhasī’’ti (saṃ. ni. 1.237), vā ‘‘puccha, mahārāja, yadākaṅkhasī’’ti vā,
无论你问什么,我都会为你彻底解答。(《长部·尼迦耶》2.356)
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Puccha, vāsava, maṃ pañhaṃ, yaṃ kiñci manasicchasi; Tassa tasseva pañhassa, ahaṃ antaṃ karomi te’’ti. (dī. ni. 2.356) vā;
或:“比丘,既然如此,你便在自己的座位上坐下,想问任何问题就问吧。”显示巴利原文
Tena hi tvaṃ, bhikkhu, sake āsane nisīditvā puccha, yadākaṅkhasīti vā,
对于婆和利与你,以及一切人的所有疑惑,我已给予机会,无论你们心中想问什么,请问吧。
已给予机会,无论你们心中想问什么,请问吧。(《经集》1036)或
萨毗耶,无论你心中想问什么,问我吧。
或:“对于每一个问题,我都为你彻底解决。”(《经集》517)
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Bāvarissa ca tuyhaṃ vā, sabbesaṃ sabbasaṃsayaṃ; Katāvakāsā pucchavho, yaṃ kiñci manasicchathā’’ti. (su. ni. 1036) vā; ‘‘Puccha maṃ, sabhiya, pañhaṃ, yaṃ kiñci manasicchasi; Tassa tasseva pañhassa, ahaṃ antaṃ karomi te’’ti. (su. ni. 517) vā;
那些夜叉王、天神、沙门、婆罗门和游方者,各自宣称拥有一切智并提出邀请。世尊成就佛果后发出这样的邀请,这并不稀奇。当他尚在菩萨地、安住于有限的部分智时——显示巴利原文
Tesaṃ tesaṃ yakkhanarindadevasamaṇabrāhmaṇaparibbājakānaṃ sabbaññupavāraṇaṃ pavārenti. Anacchariyañcetaṃ, yaṃ bhagavā buddhabhūmiṃ patvā etaṃ pavāraṇaṃ pavāreyya. Yo bodhisattabhūmiyaṃ padesañāṇe ṭhito –
“憍陈如,请你解答问题;
品行端正的仙人们正在请求他。
憍陈如,这就是人间的法;
这个负担会落在已成长的人身上。
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Koṇḍañña , pañhāni viyākarohi; Yācanti taṃ isayo sādhurūpā. Koṇḍañña, eso manujesu dhammo; Yaṃ vuddhamāgacchati esa bhāro’’ti. (jā. 2.17.60);
如是,为了释提桓因等人的利益,被仙人们所请求——显示巴利原文
Evaṃ sakkādīnaṃ atthāya isīhi yācito –
已给予机会了,贤者们,请尽管发问吧,
无论心中想求问的任何问题。
我必将为你们一一解答一切问题,
因我已亲自了知此世间与他世间。”
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Katāvakāsā pucchantu bhonto, Yaṃ kiñci pañhaṃ manasābhipatthitaṃ; Ahañhi taṃ taṃ vo viyākarissaṃ, Ñatvā sayaṃ lokamimaṃ parañcā’’ti. (jā. 2.17.61);
就这样,在獐子长老的时代,以及在《桑巴瓦本生》中:有位婆罗门,经历极长的时间,为寻问题的尽头,走遍整个赡部洲三次,始终不见答案。当他得允提问时,一个年仅七岁、正在路边玩沙土的小孩,于路中央盘腿结跏趺坐——显示巴利原文
Evaṃ sarabhaṅgakāle. Sambhavajātake ca sakalajambudīpaṃ tikkhattuṃ vicaritvā pañhānaṃ antakaraṃ adisvā suciratena brāhmaṇena, pañhaṃ puṭṭhuṃ okāse kārite jātiyā sattavassiko rathikāya paṃsuṃ kīḷanto pallaṅkamābhujitvā antaravīthiyaṃ nisinnova –
我定会告诉你,正如善巧者所做的那样;
而国王也知道那事,无论他做与不做。”
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Taggha te ahamakkhissaṃ, yathāpi kusalo tathā; Rājā ca kho taṃ jānāti, yadi kāhati vā na vā’’ti. (jā. 1.16.172);
163 当世尊如此作了关于一切知的自恣后,国王心生欢喜,提出问题:“尊者,正如这些……”等等。此处,“技艺”即“技艺处”。“种种技艺处”意指众多技艺。“哪种呢?”意为有哪些呢?他以“象师”等语,展示了那些依各种技艺而活命的人。其意趣是:“正如这些依各自技艺活命的人,依其技艺而有现见的技艺之果为人所知。同样,能否也指出一种现见的沙门果呢?”因此,他列举了诸技艺处,并指出了依技艺而活命的人。显示巴利原文
163. Evaṃ bhagavatā sabbaññupavāraṇāya pavāritāya attamano rājā pañhaṃ pucchanto – ‘‘yathā nu kho imāni, bhante’’tiādimāha. Tattha sippameva sippāyatanaṃ. Puthusippāyatanānīti bahūni sippāni. Seyyathidanti katame pana te. Hatthārohātiādīhi ye taṃ taṃ sippaṃ nissāya jīvanti, te dasseti. Ayañhi assādhippāyo – ‘‘yathā imesaṃ sippūpajīvīnaṃ taṃ taṃ sippaṃ nissāya sandiṭṭhikaṃ sippaphalaṃ paññāyati. Sakkā nu kho evaṃ sandiṭṭhikaṃ sāmaññaphalaṃ paññāpetu’’nti. Tasmā sippāyatanāni āharitvā sippūpajīvino dasseti.
此处,象师指所有驯象师、象医、象贩等;马师指所有驯马师、马医、马贩等;车师指所有车匠、车战者、车卫等;弓师指弓箭教师与射手;旗手是在战斗中持胜利旗帜行于阵前的人;扇师是排列军阵之人,他们会说:“这里是国王的位置,这里是某大臣的位置。”团食施者,一说是骁勇的大战士,据说他们冲入敌军,如切饭团般斩下敌人首级后跃出;也指在战场上给战士们分发饭钵的人,他们因此得名。豪族王子指那些勇悍好斗的王子。突击者指那些人:他们先说“我们要取谁的首级或武器?”,得到“取某人的来”的吩咐后,便冲入战场去夺取,因其冲入,故称突击者。大象指如大象般的大战士,这是对即使遭遇象兵等也不退转的战士的称号。勇者指绝对的勇士,即便身着网甲或皮甲也能渡海作战。皮甲战士指身穿皮铠甲,或持防箭皮盾作战的人。女奴之子指因强烈爱慕而作战的家奴战士。厨人指制作糕饼者。理发师指沐浴师。沐浴显示巴利原文
Tattha hatthārohāti sabbepi hatthācariyahatthivejjahatthimeṇḍādayo dasseti. Assārohāti sabbepi assācariyaassavejjaassameṇḍādayo. Rathikāti sabbepi rathācariyarathayodharatharakkhādayo. Dhanuggahāti dhanuācariyā issāsā. Celakāti ye yuddhe jayadhajaṃ gahetvā purato gacchanti. Calakāti idha rañño ṭhānaṃ hotu, idha asukamahāmattassāti evaṃ senābyūhakārakā. Piṇḍadāyakāti sāhasikamahāyodhā. Te kira parasenaṃ pavisitvā parasīsaṃ piṇḍamiva chetvā chetvā dayanti, uppatitvā uppatitvā niggacchantīti attho. Ye vā saṅgāmamajjhe yodhānaṃ bhattapātiṃ gahetvā parivisanti, tesampetaṃ nāmaṃ. Uggārājaputtāti uggatuggatā saṅgāmāvacarā rājaputtā. Pakkhandinoti ye ‘‘kassa sīsaṃ vā āvudhaṃ vā āharāmā’’ti ‘‘vatvā asukassā’’ti vuttā saṅgāmaṃ pakkhanditvā tadeva āharanti, ime pakkhandantīti pakkhandino. Mahānāgāti mahānāgā viya mahānāgā, hatthiādīsupi abhimukhaṃ āgacchantesu anivattitayodhānametaṃ adhivacanaṃ. Sūrāti ekantasūrā, ye sajālikāpi sacammikāpi samuddaṃ tarituṃ sakkonti. Cammayodhinoti ye cammakañcukaṃ vā pavisitvā saraparittāṇacammaṃ vā gahetvā yujjhanti. Dāsikaputtāti balavasinehā gharadāsayodhā. Āḷārikāti pūvikā. Kappakāti nhāpikā. Nhāpakāti ye nhāpenti. Sūdāti bhattakārakā. Mālākārādayo pākaṭāyeva. Gaṇakāti acchiddakapāṭhakā. Muddikāti hatthamuddāya gaṇanaṃ nissāya jīvino. Yāni vā panaññānipīti ayakāradantakāracittakārādīni. Evaṃgatānīti evaṃ pavattāni. Te diṭṭheva dhammeti te hatthārohādayo tāni puthusippāyatanāni dassetvā rājakulato mahāsampattiṃ labhamānā sandiṭṭhikameva sippaphalaṃ upajīvanti. Sukhentīti sukhitaṃ karonti. Pīṇentīti pīṇitaṃ thāmabalūpetaṃ karonti. Uddhaggikādīsu upari phalanibbattanato uddhaṃ aggamassā atthīti uddhaggikā. Saggaṃ arahatīti sovaggikā. Sukho vipāko assāti sukhavipākā. Suṭṭhu agge rūpasaddagandharasaphoṭṭhabbaāyuvaṇṇasukhayasaādhipateyyasaṅkhāte dasa dhamme saṃvatteti nibbattetīti saggasaṃvattanikā. Taṃ evarūpaṃ dakkhiṇaṃ dānaṃ patiṭṭhapentīti attho. Sāmaññaphalanti ettha paramatthato maggo sāmaññaṃ. Ariyaphalaṃ sāmaññaphalaṃ. Yathāha – ‘‘katamañca, bhikkhave, sāmaññaṃ? Ayameva ariyo aṭṭhaṅgiko maggo. Seyyathidaṃ, sammādiṭṭhi…pe… sammāsamādhi. Idaṃ vuccati, bhikkhave, sāmaññaṃ. Katamāni ca, bhikkhave, sāmaññaphalāni? Sotāpattiphalaṃ…pe… arahattaphala’’nti (saṃ. ni. 5.35). Taṃ esa rājā na jānāti. Upari āgataṃ pana dāsakassakopamaṃ sandhāya pucchati.
那时,世尊并未直接回答,而是心想:“这里有众多外道弟子和王臣前来。如果我开示黑分与白分(不善与善)来讲述,他们便会非难:‘我们的国王满怀热忱而来,而沙门乔达摩自从他到来后,就只是讲沙门间的喧闹与争吵。’这样他们就不会恭敬听法。但若由国王自己来讲述,他们便无法非难,只会随顺国王,因为世间确实追随有权力者。来,我将任务交给国王吧。”于是世尊将任务交给国王,说道:“你是否记得……”等等。显示巴利原文
Atha bhagavā pañhaṃ avissajjetvāva cintesi – ‘‘ime bahū aññatitthiyasāvakā rājāmaccā idhāgatā, te kaṇhapakkhañca sukkapakkhañca dīpetvā kathīyamāne amhākaṃ rājā mahantena ussāhena idhāgato, tassāgatakālato paṭṭhāya samaṇo gotamo samaṇakolāhalaṃ samaṇabhaṇḍanameva kathetīti ujjhāyissanti, na sakkaccaṃ dhammaṃ sossanti, raññā pana kathīyamāne ujjhāyituṃ na sakkhissanti, rājānameva anuvattissanti. Issarānuvattako hi loko. ‘Handāhaṃ raññova bhāraṃ karomī’ti rañño bhāraṃ karonto ‘‘abhijānāsi no tva’’ntiādimāha.
164 “你是否记得(abhijānāsi no tvaṃ)”意为:你是否记得?此处的“no”字应与后面的“问”字结合理解。完整的意思是:“大王,你曾向其他沙门、婆罗门问过这个问题吗?你还记得曾问过吗?没有忘失吧?”“若不麻烦你(sace te agaru)”意为:若对你而言,将他们当时的回答在此复述出来并非沉重之事,若你没有任何不适,就请讲出来。“尊者,对我来说不麻烦(na kho me, bhante, garu)”他这样说,是针对什么而言的呢?因为在那些看似贤者的人面前说话极为困难,他们会逐字逐音地挑剔。而真正的贤者听了陈述后,会赞许讲得好的地方;对于讲得有缺失之处,如经义、含义、词句等有所不契,他们会一一纠正后再作开示。像世尊这样真正的贤者,再无第二人。因此他说:“尊者,对我来说并不麻烦;只要有世尊在场,或有如世尊一般的人在场,我便不会觉得为难。”显示巴利原文
164. Tattha abhijānāsi no tvanti abhijānāsi nu tvaṃ. Ayañca no-saddo parato pucchitāti padena yojetabbo. Idañhi vuttaṃ hoti – ‘‘mahārāja, tvaṃ imaṃ pañhaṃ aññe samaṇabrāhmaṇe pucchitā nu, abhijānāsi ca naṃ puṭṭhabhāvaṃ, na te sammuṭṭha’’nti. Sace te agarūti sace tuyhaṃ yathā te byākariṃsu, tathā idha bhāsituṃ bhāriyaṃ na hoti, yadi na koci aphāsukabhāvo atthi, bhāsassūti attho. Na kho me bhanteti kiṃ sandhāyāha? Paṇḍitapatirūpakānañhi santike kathetuṃ dukkhaṃ hoti, te pade pade akkhare akkhare dosameva vadanti. Ekantapaṇḍitā pana kathaṃ sutvā sukathitaṃ pasaṃsanti, dukkathitesu pāḷipadaatthabyañjanesu yaṃ yaṃ virujjhati, taṃ taṃ ujukaṃ katvā denti. Bhagavatā ca sadiso ekantapaṇḍito nāma natthi. Tenāha – ‘‘na kho me, bhante, garu; yatthassa bhagavā nisinno bhagavantarūpo vā’’ti.
富兰那迦叶议论的注释显示巴利原文
Pūraṇakassapavādavaṇṇanā
165 “Ekamidāha”意为“我独自一人在此”。结束了可带来欢喜、应被忆持的交谈,也就是完成了能生欢喜、适于铭记的谈话之后。显示巴利原文
165.Ekamidāhanti ekaṃ idha ahaṃ. Sammodanīyaṃ kathaṃ sāraṇīyaṃ vītisāretvāti sammodajanakaṃ saritabbayuttakaṃ kathaṃ pariyosāpetvā.
166 于“大王,对作者、令作者”等句中,“作者”指亲手造作的人。“令作者”指通过命令使他人造作的人。“断者”指砍断他人手足等的人。“煮者”指以杖等折磨他人的人。“令忧者”指通过夺取他人财物等方式使人陷于忧愁的人。“令生忧者”指自己生起忧愁,或令他人心生忧愁的人。“令疲者”指以断绝饮食、捆绑、关入暗室等方式,令自己疲劳或使他人疲劳的人。“悸动者、令悸动者”指他人悸动时自己随之悸动,且令他人悸动的人。“令夺命者”指自己杀生或令他人杀生的人。如此,一切处皆当理解为作与令作之义。显示巴利原文
166.‘‘Karoto kho, mahārāja, kārayato’’tiādīsu karototi sahatthā karontassa. Kārayatoti āṇattiyā kārentassa. Chindatoti paresaṃ hatthādīni chindantassa. Pacatoti pare daṇḍena pīḷentassa. Socayatoti parassa bhaṇḍaharaṇādīhi socayato. Socāpayatoti sokaṃ sayaṃ karontassapi parehi kārāpentassapi . Kilamatoti āhārupacchedabandhanāgārappavesanādīhi sayaṃ kilamantassapi parehi kilamāpentassapi. Phandato phandāpayatoti paraṃ phandantaṃ phandanakāle sayampi phandato parampi phandāpayato. Pāṇamatipātāpayatoti pāṇaṃ hanantassapi hanāpentassapi. Evaṃ sabbattha karaṇakāraṇavaseneva attho veditabbo.
“Sandhi”指屋舍的缝隙。“Nillopa”指大规模的劫掠。“Ekāgārika”指围住独一户人家而加以劫夺。“Paripanthe”指为了抢夺往来行人而拦在路中的人。“作恶者,恶不被作”(Karoto na karīyati pāpaṃ):即使怀有“我在作某种恶”的认知而去造作,恶也不成其为恶,即无有恶;可是众生却处于“我在作恶”这样的认知中。“Khurapariyanta”指刀轮的边缘,或如刀刃般锋利的边际。“一肉堆”即一堆肉,“堆”是其同义词。“以此为因”指成为一堆肉的原因。显示巴利原文
Sandhinti gharasandhiṃ. Nillopanti mahāvilopaṃ. Ekāgārikanti ekameva gharaṃ parivāretvā viluppanaṃ. Paripantheti āgatāgatānaṃ acchindanatthaṃ magge tiṭṭhato. Karoto na karīyati pāpanti yaṃ kiñci pāpaṃ karomīti saññāya karotopi pāpaṃ na karīyati, natthi pāpaṃ. Sattā pana pāpaṃ karomāti evaṃsaññino hontīti dīpeti. Khurapariyantenāti khuraneminā, khuradhārasadisapariyantena vā. Ekaṃ maṃsakhalanti ekaṃ maṃsarāsiṃ. Puñjanti tasseva vevacanaṃ. Tatonidānanti ekamaṃsakhalakaraṇanidānaṃ.
“南岸”:指南岸之人,残暴凶恶。针对他们,才说“杀害”等语。北岸的众生则有信心、有净信,是皈依佛、皈依法、皈依僧的弟子。针对他们,才说“布施”等语。其中,“祭祀”指举行大祭祀。“调伏”是通过调伏诸根,或持守布萨戒而调御自身。“防护”是通过持戒而防护。“实语”是说真实语。“阿含”(Āgama)意为“到来”,指流转、发生。这段话彻底否定了善恶业的造作。显示巴利原文
Dakkhiṇanti dakkhiṇatīre manussā kakkhaḷā dāruṇā, te sandhāya ‘‘hananto’’tiādimāha. Uttaratīre sattā saddhā honti pasannā buddhamāmakā dhammamāmakā saṅghamāmakā, te sandhāya dadantotiādimāha. Tattha yajantoti mahāyāgaṃ karonto. Damenāti indriyadamena uposathakammena vā. Saṃyamenāti sīlasaṃyamena. Saccavajjenāti saccavacanena. Āgamoti āgamanaṃ, pavattīti attho. Sabbathāpi pāpapuññānaṃ kiriyameva paṭikkhipati.
所谓“问芒果却答以菠萝蜜”,是指当被问到“芒果是什么样的?芒果的树干、叶子、花朵、果实是怎样的?”时,却回答说“菠萝蜜是这样的,菠萝蜜的树干、叶子、花朵、果实是这样的”。“于已征服之境”:指在自己命令所及的范围内。“应受呵斥”:指应受指责。“不欢喜”:指不发出“善哉,善哉”这样的赞叹。“不斥责”:指不用“你说了愚人的恶语”这样的话来驳斥他。“不执取”:指不将其作为核心要义来受持。“不记持”:指不依其核心要义,而将“这是出离,这是胜义”铭记于心。然而,对于这些词句本身,他却是已经学习过、也记住了的。显示巴利原文
Ambaṃ puṭṭho labujaṃ byākaroti nāma, yo kīdiso ambo kīdisāni vā ambassa khandhapaṇṇapupphaphalānīti vutte ediso labujo edisāni vā labujassa khandhapaṇṇapupphaphalānīti byākaroti. Vijiteti āṇāpavattidese. Apasādetabbanti viheṭhetabbaṃ. Anabhinanditvāti ‘‘sādhu sādhū’’ti evaṃ pasaṃsaṃ akatvā. Appaṭikkositvāti bāladubbhāsitaṃ tayā bhāsitanti evaṃ appaṭibāhitvā. Anuggaṇhantoti sārato aggaṇhanto. Anikkujjantoti sāravaseneva idaṃ nissaraṇaṃ, ayaṃ paramatthoti hadaye aṭṭhapento. Byañjanaṃ pana tena uggahitañceva nikkujjitañca.
末伽梨瞿舍利观点的注释显示巴利原文
Makkhaligosālavādavaṇṇanā
167-169 在末伽梨瞿舍利的观点中,“缘”只是“因”的同义词。他以此二者,否定了实际上存在的——身恶行等是杂染的缘,以及身善行等是清净的缘。“自作”:即自己作的业。他否定了“众生依此自作业而能达至天界、魔界、梵天界、声闻菩提、辟支菩提,乃至一切知智”这样的说法。以第二个词“他作”,否定了依靠他人的教导与教诫——除了大菩萨之外,其余众生由人天福乐开始,直至证得阿拉汉果的这种他力所作。如此,这个愚人等同于在攻击胜利者的法轮。“无有士夫所作”:他否定了众生依这种士夫的作为而成就前述的那些功德。“无有力量”:他否定了众生依靠自力精进努力而获得那些成就的“力量”。“无有精进”等词,都是“士夫所作”的同义词。只是为了反驳“此是由于我们的精进,此是由于士夫的力量,此是由于士夫的奋发而发生的”这一类说法,才将这些词分别开示。显示巴利原文
167-169. Makkhalivāde paccayoti hetuvevacanameva, ubhayenāpi vijjamānameva kāyaduccaritādīnaṃ saṃkilesapaccayaṃ, kāyasucaritādīnañca visuddhipaccayaṃ paṭikkhipati. Attakāreti attakāro. Yena attanā katakammena ime sattā devattampi mārattampi brahmattampi sāvakabodhimpi paccekabodhimpi sabbaññutampi pāpuṇanti, tampi paṭikkhipati. Dutiyapadena yaṃ parakāraṃ parassa ovādānusāsaniṃ nissāya ṭhapetvā mahāsattaṃ avaseso jano manussasobhagyataṃ ādiṃ katvā yāva arahattaṃ pāpuṇāti, taṃ parakāraṃ paṭikkhipati. Evamayaṃ bālo jinacakke pahāraṃ deti nāma. Natthi purisakāreti yena purisakārena sattā vuttappakārā sampattiyo pāpuṇanti , tampi paṭikkhipati. Natthi balanti yamhi attano bale patiṭṭhitā sattā vīriyaṃ katvā tā sampattiyo pāpuṇanti, taṃ balaṃ paṭikkhipati. Natthi vīriyantiādīni sabbāni purisakāravevacanāneva. ‘‘Idaṃ no vīriyena idaṃ purisathāmena, idaṃ purisaparakkamena pavatta’’nti evaṃ pavattavacanapaṭikkhepakaraṇavasena panetāni visuṃ ādiyanti.
「一切有情」:即骆驼、牛、驴等,毫无遗漏地全部包括。「一切生类」:是说单根生类、两根生类等。「一切有」:是针对卵生、胎生、湿生中的众生而言。「一切命」:是针对稻、麦、豆等而言,他因其生长的状态而以为“有命”。「无力、无能、无精进」:是说它们没有自主力、没有力量、也没有精进。「任由命运、聚分、本性所转」:其中,“命运”即决定;“聚分”即六种生类投生之处;“本性”即自性。如此,它们被命运、聚分和本性所转变,达到种种不同的状态。这表示:“注定应存在的,便那样存在;注定不应存在的,便不存在。”「唯于六种生类」:是说只在六种生类中感受苦与乐,表明并没有另外能受苦乐的地方。显示巴利原文
Sabbe sattāti oṭṭhagoṇagadrabhādayo anavasese pariggaṇhāti. Sabbe pāṇāti ekindriyo pāṇo, dvindriyo pāṇotiādivasena vadati. Sabbe bhūtāti aṇḍakosavatthikosesu bhūte sandhāya vadati. Sabbe jīvāti sāliyavagodhumādayo sandhāya vadati. Tesu hi so virūhanabhāvena jīvasaññī. Avasā abalā avīriyāti tesaṃ attano vaso vā balaṃ vā vīriyaṃ vā natthi. Niyatisaṅgatibhāvapariṇatāti ettha niyatīti niyatā. Saṅgatīti channaṃ abhijātīnaṃ tattha tattha gamanaṃ. Bhāvoti sabhāvoyeva. Evaṃ niyatiyā ca saṅgatiyā ca bhāvena ca pariṇatā nānappakārataṃ pattā. Yena hi yathā bhavitabbaṃ, so tatheva bhavati. Yena na bhavitabbaṃ, so na bhavatīti dasseti. Chasvevābhijātīsūti chasu eva abhijātīsu ṭhatvā sukhañca dukkhañca paṭisaṃvedenti. Aññā sukhadukkhabhūmi natthīti dasseti.
「十四百千首要之生」:指最殊胜的出生有一万四千种,另有六千种,另有六百种。「五百业」:即五种百业。这纯粹是以诡辩来显示无意义的见解。对于「五业、三业」等说法,含义也是如此。但也有人这样说:「五业」是约五根而说;「三业」指身业等。而在「业与半业」中,据其见解,身业和语业算是“业”,意业算是“半业”。「六十二道」:即六十二种修行之道。「六十二中劫」:一个大劫中,本来有六十四个中劫,但这愚者因为不知道另外两个中劫,所以才这么说。显示巴利原文
Yonipamukhasatasahassānīti pamukhayonīnaṃ uttamayonīnaṃ cuddasasatasahassāni aññāni ca saṭṭhisatāni aññāni ca chasatāni. Pañca ca kammunosatānīti pañcakammasatāni ca. Kevalaṃ takkamattakena niratthakaṃ diṭṭhiṃ dīpeti. Pañca ca kammāni tīṇi ca kammānītiādīsupi eseva nayo. Keci panāhu – ‘‘pañca ca kammānīti pañcindriyavasena bhaṇati. Tīṇīti kāyakammādivasenā’’ti. Kamme ca upaḍḍhakamme cāti ettha panassa kāyakammañca vacīkammañca kammanti laddhi, manokammaṃ upaḍḍhakammanti. Dvaṭṭhipaṭipadāti dvāsaṭṭhi paṭipadāti vadati. Dvaṭṭhantarakappāti ekasmiṃ kappe catusaṭṭhi antarakappā nāma honti. Ayaṃ pana aññe dve ajānanto evamāha.
「六类生」:即黑色类生、蓝色类生、红色类生、黄色类生、白色类生、最极白色类生,这是他所说的六种生类。其中,杀羊者、捕鸟者、猎兽者、杀猪者、猎人、杀鱼者、盗贼、刽子手、狱卒,以及其他从事残忍暴行之业的人,他称为「黑色类生」。他把比丘称为「蓝色类生」,据说是因为比丘在受用四种资具时,犹如在食物中掺了刺一般进食。而“比丘是棘刺活命者”这句话,其实正是他自己经典里的原话。或者,他认为确实有一种出家人名为“棘刺活命者”。他把耆那教的裸形者和只穿一件衣的修行者称为「红色类生」,并说这些人比前两种更清净。他把穿着白衣的在家人——也就是那些裸形者的弟子——称为「黄色类生」,如此一来,他将自己的供养者抬高到比耆那教徒更胜的位置。他把邪命外道的男男女女称为「白色类生」,说这些人比前四种更清净。最后,他把难陀、婆求、翅舍、僧耆奢、末伽梨瞿舍利·瞿舍罗等称为「最极白色类生」,说他们比所有其他人都更清净。显示巴利原文
Chaḷābhijātiyoti kaṇhābhijāti, nīlābhijāti, lohitābhijāti, haliddābhijāti, sukkābhijāti, paramasukkābhijātīti imā cha abhijātiyo vadati. Tattha orabbhikā, sākuṇikā, māgavikā, sūkarikā, luddā, macchaghātakā corā, coraghātakā, bandhanāgārikā, ye vā panaññepi keci kurūrakammantā, ayaṃ kaṇhābhijātīti (a. ni. 6.57) vadati. Bhikkhū nīlābhijātīti vadati, te kira catūsu paccayesu kaṇṭake pakkhipitvā khādanti. ‘‘Bhikkhū kaṇṭakavuttikā’’ti (a. ni. 6.57) ayañhissa pāḷiyeva. Atha vā kaṇṭakavuttikā eva nāma eke pabbajitāti vadati. Lohitābhijāti nāma nigaṇṭhā ekasāṭakāti vadati. Ime kira purimehi dvīhi paṇḍaratarā. Gihī odātavasanā acelakasāvakā haliddābhijātīti vadati. Evaṃ attano paccayadāyake nigaṇṭhehipi jeṭṭhakatare karoti. Ājīvakā ājīvakiniyo sukkābhijātīti vadati. Te kira purimehi catūhi paṇḍaratarā. Nando, vaccho, kiso, saṅkiccho, makkhaligosālo, paramasukkābhijātīti (a. ni. 6.57) vadati. Te kira sabbehi paṇḍaratarā.
“八种男子界”:即愚钝界、游戏界、试步界、直行界、学人界、沙门界、胜者界、堕落界——他称此为八种男子界。其中,从出生之日起七日之内,有情方离母胎的逼窄处,故皆迟钝、昏昧,此阶段称为“愚钝界”。若是恶道转生者,则不断哭泣叫唤;若是善道转生者,则似忆起宿世般微笑,此阶段称为“游戏界”。当幼儿抓住父母的手足、扶着床或椅,将脚试探于地面尝试迈步的阶段,称为“试步界”。能独立安稳步行时,称为“直行界”。正在学习种种技艺时,称为“学人界”。离家出家修行时,称为“沙门界”。随师修学并有所体证时,称为“胜者界”。若有比丘既属堕落,又是一个无所得的胜者,他便称这种无所得的沙门为“堕落界”。显示巴利原文
Aṭṭha purisabhūmiyoti mandabhūmi, khiḍḍābhūmi, padavīmaṃsabhūmi, ujugatabhūmi, sekkhabhūmi, samaṇabhūmi , jinabhūmi, pannabhūmīti imā aṭṭha purisabhūmiyoti vadati. Tattha jātadivasato paṭṭhāya sattadivase sambādhaṭṭhānato nikkhantattā sattā mandā honti momūhā, ayaṃ mandabhūmīti vadati. Ye pana duggatito āgatā honti, te abhiṇhaṃ rodanti ceva viravanti ca, sugatito āgatā taṃ anussaritvā hasanti, ayaṃ khiḍḍābhūmi nāma. Mātāpitūnaṃ hatthaṃ vā pādaṃ vā mañcaṃ vā pīṭhaṃ vā gahetvā bhūmiyaṃ padanikkhipanaṃ padavīmaṃsabhūmi nāma. Padasā gantuṃ samatthakāle ujugatabhūmi nāma. Sippāni sikkhitakāle sekkhabhūmi nāma. Gharā nikkhamma pabbajitakāle samaṇabhūmi nāma. Ācariyaṃ sevitvā jānanakāle jinabhūmi nāma. Bhikkhu ca pannako jino na kiñci āhāti evaṃ alābhiṃ samaṇaṃ pannabhūmīti vadati.
“四十九邪命外道”:指四十九种邪命外道的谋生方式。“百游方者”:指一百种游方者的出家方式。“百龙居”:指一百个龙所居住的区域。“二十根百”:即二十种根各有百数。“三十地狱百”:即三十种地狱各有百数。“尘界”:指扬撒灰尘之处,这是就手背、脚背等部位而言的。“七有想胎”:这是针对骆驼、牛、驴、羊、家畜、野兽、水牛等所说的。“七无想胎”:这是针对稻、米、大麦、小麦、稗、黍、稊稗等所说的。“无系胎”:指在结节处生出的胎,这是针对甘蔗、竹、芦苇等所说的。“七神”:本来有众多的神,他却说只有七个。本来人亦无量,他却说人的种类只有七种。“七毕舍遮”:毕舍遮本来有种种大小不同的形体,他却说有七种大毕舍遮。“池”:指大池,他是针对耳环池、车匠池、无热恼池、狮子崖池、六牙池、曼陀基尼池、拘那罗池等所说的。显示巴利原文
Ekūnapaññāsa ājīvakasateti ekūnapaññāsaājīvakavuttisatāni. Paribbājakasateti paribbājakapabbajjāsatāni. Nāgāvāsasateti nāgamaṇḍalasatāni. Vīse indriyasateti vīsatindriyasatāni. Tiṃse nirayasateti tiṃsa nirayasatāni. Rajodhātuyoti rajaokiraṇaṭṭhānāni, hatthapiṭṭhipādapiṭṭhādīni sandhāya vadati. Satta saññīgabbhāti oṭṭhagoṇagadrabhaajapasumigamahiṃse sandhāya vadati. Satta asaññīgabbhāti sālivīhiyavagodhūmakaṅguvarakakudrūsake sandhāya vadati. Nigaṇṭhigabbhāti gaṇṭhimhi jātagabbhā, ucchuveḷunaḷādayo sandhāya vadati. Satta devāti bahū devā. So pana sattāti vadati. Manussāpi anantā, so sattāti vadati. Sattapisācāti pisācā mahantamahantā sattāti vadati. Sarāti mahāsarā, kaṇṇamuṇḍarathakāraanotattasīhappapātachaddantamandākinīkuṇāladahe gahetvā vadati.
“绳结”:即指结节。“大悬崖”:指巨大的断崖。“百小悬崖”:指上百座小悬崖。“大梦”:指重大的梦境。“百小梦”:指上百个小梦境。至于“大劫”,则是就大劫而言的。对此,他是这样解释的:有一大湖,每隔一百年,以草尖从中取一滴水。如此取水七次,直至该大湖完全干涸,这全过程所用之时,才称为一个“大劫”。他所持的见解是:无论愚者还是智者,都必须经历如此大劫,在流转八万四千大劫之后,才能究竟苦边。据说,依其说法,智者无法中途净化而证得解脱,愚者亦不能超越此限而提早抵达终点。显示巴利原文
Pavuṭāti gaṇṭhikā. Papātāti mahāpapātā. Papātasatānīti khuddakapapātasatāni. Supināti mahāsupinā. Supinasatānīti khuddakasupinasatāni. Mahākappinoti mahākappānaṃ. Tattha ekamhā mahāsarā vassasate vassasate kusaggena ekaṃ udakabinduṃ nīharitvā sattakkhattuṃ tamhi sare nirudake kate eko mahākappoti vadati. Evarūpānaṃ mahākappānaṃ caturāsītisatasahassāni khepetvā bāle ca paṇḍite ca dukkhassantaṃ karontīti ayamassa laddhi. Paṇḍitopi kira antarā visujjhituṃ na sakkoti. Bālopi tato uddhaṃ na gacchati.
“以戒”:指以裸露外道之戒,或以其他任何一种戒。“以誓愿”:指以那样的誓愿。“以苦行”:指以苦行。所谓“未成熟而令成熟”,是说有人心想“我是智者”,于是半途便自以为清净。所谓“已成熟,触之又触,令其消尽”,是说有人心想“我是愚者”,于是超过所说的时限而死去。“hevaṃ natthi”:意为“这样不存在”,这是显示此二者皆不能成就。“如斗量”:就像用斗来量取。“于乐与苦”:在乐与苦上。“界限已定”:由所说的时限所构成的界限已定。“无减损与增长”:没有减损,也没有增长。意思是:对于智者,轮回不会缩短;对于愚者,轮回也不会延长。“增上与减下”:即增上与减下,这是对减损与增长的另一种表述。显示巴利原文
Sīlenāti acelakasīlena vā aññena vā yena kenaci. Vatenāti tādiseneva vatena. Tapenāti tapokammena. Aparipakkaṃ paripāceti nāma, yo ‘‘ahaṃ paṇḍito’’ti antarā visujjhati. Paripakkaṃ phussa phussa byantiṃ karoti nāma yo ‘‘ahaṃ bālo’’ti vuttaparimāṇaṃ kālaṃ atikkamitvā yāti. Hevaṃ natthīti evaṃ natthi. Tañhi ubhayampi na sakkā kātunti dīpeti. Doṇamiteti doṇena mitaṃ viya. Sukhadukkheti sukhadukkhaṃ. Pariyantakateti vuttaparimāṇena kālena katapariyante. Natthihāyanavaḍḍhaneti natthi hāyanavaḍḍhanāni. Na saṃsāro paṇḍitassa hāyati, na bālassa vaḍḍhatīti attho. Ukkaṃsāvakaṃseti ukkaṃsāvakaṃsā. Hāyanavaḍḍhanānametaṃ adhivacanaṃ.
现在,以譬喻来证成此义,故说“譬如线团”等。其中,“线团”:指缠绕而成的线球。“当它被解开时便随之而去”:如同人站在山顶或树顶上抛掷线团,线便随着自身长度一边被解开一边前进;线尽之时,它就在那里停住,不再前进。同样地,这是用以显示:一旦超过所说的时限,就不再往前行进。显示巴利原文
Idāni tamatthaṃ upamāya sādhento ‘‘seyyathāpi nāmā’’tiādimāha. Tattha suttaguḷeti veṭhetvā katasuttaguḷe. Nibbeṭhiyamānameva paletīti pabbate vā rukkhagge vā ṭhatvā khittaṃ suttappamāṇena nibbeṭhiyamānameva gacchati, sutte khīṇe tattheva tiṭṭhati, na gacchati. Evameva vuttakālato uddhaṃ na gacchatīti dasseti.
阿耆多翅舍钦婆罗的见解注释显示巴利原文
Ajitakesakambalavādavaṇṇanā
170-172 在阿耆多的学说中,说“无施”,是就布施没有果报而说。“已供”指大型的祭祀。“已献”指赠礼的供养。这两者也是就它们没有果报而加以否定的。“善行恶行之果、果报”:凡被称为果或果报的,他说都不存在。“此世无”是指那些在他世界的有情没有此世;“他世无”是指在此世的有情也没有他世,表明一切众生就在各自所在的地方断灭。“无母无父”是就孝敬父母或忤逆父母的善行恶行之果报不存在而说的。“无化生有情”指死后转生于他处的有情不存在。显示巴利原文
170-172. Ajitavāde natthi dinnanti dinnaphalābhāvaṃ sandhāya vadati. Yiṭṭhaṃ vuccati mahāyāgo. Hutanti paheṇakasakkāro adhippeto. Tampi ubhayaṃ phalābhāvameva sandhāya paṭikkhipati. Sukatadukkaṭānanti sukatadukkaṭānaṃ, kusalākusalānanti attho. Phalaṃ vipākoti yaṃ phalanti vā vipākoti vā vuccati, taṃ natthīti vadati. Natthi ayaṃ lokoti paraloke ṭhitassa ayaṃ loko natthi, natthi paro lokoti idha loke ṭhitassāpi paro loko natthi, sabbe tattha tattheva ucchijjantīti dasseti. Natthi mātā natthi pitāti tesu sammāpaṭipattimicchāpaṭipattīnaṃ phalābhāvavasena vadati. Natthi sattā opapātikāti cavitvā upapajjanakā sattā nāma natthīti vadati.
“由四大地种所成”即由四大种所构成。“地归于地身”指内地界归于外地界。“随往”即追随,“随至”是其同义词,也有“随逐”的意思,二者皆显示“往、至”之义。水等诸界同理。“诸根”指意等六根奔向虚空。“以床为第五”即以卧床为第五,指床以及抓住床脚的四个人。“直到火葬场”即直到墓地。“句迹”指“此人如此持戒,如此破戒”等种种功德与过失的陈述,或者此处即指身体本身。“鸽子色”即鸽子的颜色,意指鸽翅之色。“成灰”即成为灰末,此即原文。“诸献祭”指任何分为赠送、礼品、供养等的布施,这一切最终都只成为灰烬,不会在此后成为给予果报之物。“施被愚人施设”指布施由愚人所设立,意思是:这种布施是愚人、无智慧者所设立的,并非智者所设立。愚人布施,智者接受。显示巴利原文
Cātumahābhūtikoti catumahābhūtamayo. Pathavī pathavikāyanti ajjhattikapathavīdhātu bāhirapathavīdhātuṃ. Anupetīti anuyāyati. Anupagacchatīti tasseva vevacanaṃ. Anugacchatītipi attho. Ubhayenāpi upeti, upagacchatīti dasseti. Āpādīsupi eseva nayo. Indriyānīti manacchaṭṭhāni indriyāni ākāsaṃ pakkhandanti. Āsandipañcamāti nipannamañcena pañcamā, mañco ceva cattāro mañcapāde gahetvā ṭhitā cattāro purisā cāti attho. Yāvāḷāhanāti yāva susānā. Padānīti ‘ayaṃ evaṃ sīlavā ahosi, evaṃ dussīlo’tiādinā nayena pavattāni guṇāguṇapadāni, sarīrameva vā ettha padānīti adhippetaṃ. Kāpotakānīti kapotavaṇṇāni, pārāvatapakkhavaṇṇānīti attho. Bhassantāti bhasmantā, ayameva vā pāḷi. Āhutiyoti yaṃ paheṇakasakkārādibhedaṃ dinnadānaṃ, sabbaṃ taṃ chārikāvasānameva hoti, na tato paraṃ phaladāyakaṃ hutvā gacchatīti attho. Dattupaññattanti dattūhi bālamanussehi paññattaṃ. Idaṃ vuttaṃ hoti – ‘bālehi abuddhīhi paññattamidaṃ dānaṃ, na paṇḍitehi. Bālā denti, paṇḍitā gaṇhantī’ti dasseti.
其中,富兰那说“作恶不被〔恶〕做”是在否定业;阿耆多说“身坏断灭”是在否定果报;末迦梨·瞿舍罗说“无因”则是在否定两者。而在否定业时,果报也被否定了;在否定果报时,业也被否定了。如此,这一切在义理上都是既否定业又否定果报,并且是无因论者、非作业论者及虚无论者。显示巴利原文
Tattha pūraṇo ‘‘karoto na karīyati pāpa’’nti vadanto kammaṃ paṭibāhati. Ajito ‘‘kāyassa bhedā ucchijjatī’’ti vadanto vipākaṃ paṭibāhati. Makkhali ‘‘natthi hetū’’ti vadanto ubhayaṃ paṭibāhati. Tattha kammaṃ paṭibāhantenāpi vipāko paṭibāhito hoti, vipākaṃ paṭibāhantenāpi kammaṃ paṭibāhitaṃ hoti. Iti sabbepete atthato ubhayappaṭibāhakā ahetukavādā ceva akiriyavādā ca natthikavādā ca honti.
那些执取他们的见解,在夜间住处或日间住处坐着念诵、思察的人,在面对“作恶不被〔恶〕做、无因、无缘、死则断灭”等所缘时,邪念稳定而住,心达到一境性,速行心生起。第一个速行还有可救治,第二等速行也是如此;到了第七个速行,即使在诸佛看来也无法救治、不可逆转,就像阿利咤荆棘一样。其中,有些人陷入一种邪见,有些人陷入两种,有些人陷入三种。无论是陷入一种、两种或三种,都已经成为决定性的邪见者;他成为通往天趣的障碍,也成为通往涅槃的障碍。在此生结束后,他连天界都无法去,更不用说证得涅槃了。这种有情被称为“轮回桩”,如同大地的守护者,大多没有出离这种生存状态的可能。显示巴利原文
Ye vā pana tesaṃ laddhiṃ gahetvā rattiṭṭhāne divāṭhāne nisinnā sajjhāyanti vīmaṃsanti, tesaṃ ‘‘karoto na karīyati pāpaṃ, natthi hetu, natthi paccayo, mato ucchijjatī’’ti tasmiṃ ārammaṇe micchāsati santiṭṭhati, cittaṃ ekaggaṃ hoti, javanāni javanti, paṭhamajavane satekicchā honti, tathā dutiyādīsu, sattame buddhānampi atekicchā anivattino ariṭṭhakaṇṭakasadisā. Tattha koci ekaṃ dassanaṃ okkamati, koci dve, koci tīṇipi, ekasmiṃ okkantepi, dvīsu tīsu okkantesupi, niyatamicchādiṭṭhikova hoti; patto saggamaggāvaraṇañceva mokkhamaggāvaraṇañca, abhabbo tassattabhāvassa anantaraṃ saggampi gantuṃ, pageva mokkhaṃ. Vaṭṭakhāṇu nāmesa satto pathavigopako, yebhuyyena evarūpassa bhavato vuṭṭhānaṃ natthi.
因此,对于恶人,如同对待毒蛇一般,
希求安乐的有智者,应当远远避之。
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Tasmā akalyāṇajanaṃ, āsīvisamivoragaṃ; Ārakā parivajjeyya, bhūtikāmo vicakkhaṇo’’ti.
波拘陀迦旃延论注显示巴利原文
Pakudhakaccāyanavādavaṇṇanā
173-175 在波拘陀的学说中,“akaṭā”(非所作)意指不是被造作的。“Akaṭavidhā”(非所作种种)意指不是以种种方式被造作的。“Evaṃ karohi”(如是作)的意思是:它们不会因任何人的命令而被动地成为那样。“Animmitā”(非所造)意指甚至无法以神通力制造它们。“Animmātā”(非能造)指不可被制造;有些人将此词释为“animmāpetabbā”(不应被造),但这个词既不见于经典,也不见于注疏。关于“不孕”等三个词,其意义如前所述。“Na iñjanti”(不动摇):因为它们如同因陀罗柱一般安住,所以不被动摇。“Na vipariṇamanti”(不变异):即不舍弃自己的本性。“Na aññamaññaṃ byābādhenti”(不相互恼害):即不互相伤害。“Nālaṃ”(非能):即无能为力。在“地身”等词中,“地”即是“地身”,或者说为地的集合体。“Tattha”(在那里):在那有灵魂的七身之集合中。“正是七身”:如同刀锋击打一堆绿豆等时,能从绿豆等之间的缝隙穿入一般,在七身的间隙与孔洞之中,刀可以显示巴利原文
173-175. Pakudhavāde akaṭāti akatā. Akaṭavidhāti akatavidhānā. Evaṃ karohīti kenaci kārāpitāpi na hontīti attho. Animmitāti iddhiyāpi na nimmitā. Animmātāti animmāpitā, keci animmāpetabbāti padaṃ vadanti, taṃ neva pāḷiyaṃ, na aṭṭhakathāyaṃ dissati. Vañjhādipadattayaṃ vuttatthameva. Na iñjantīti esikatthambho viya ṭhitattā na calanti. Na vipariṇamantīti pakatiṃ na jahanti. Na aññamaññaṃ byābādhentīti na aññamaññaṃ upahananti. Nālanti na samatthā. Pathavikāyotiādīsu pathavīyeva pathavikāyo, pathavisamūho vā. Tatthāti tesu jīvasattamesu kāyesu. Sattannaṃ tveva kāyānanti yathā muggarāsiādīsu pahataṃ satthaṃ muggādīnaṃ antarena pavisati, evaṃ sattannaṃ kāyānaṃ antarena chiddena vivarena satthaṃ pavisati. Tattha ahaṃ imaṃ jīvitā voropemīti kevalaṃ saññāmattameva hotīti dasseti.
尼干陀若提子论注显示巴利原文
Nigaṇṭhanāṭaputtavādavaṇṇanā
176-178 在尼乾子学说中,“cātuyāmasaṃvarasaṃvuto”意指以四分防护而得防护。“Sabbavārivārito ca”指遮止一切水,弃绝所有冷水。据说他对冷水起众生想,因此不用。“Sabbavāriyutto”指具备一切遮恶之防护。“Sabbavāridhuto”指依一切遮恶之防护而涤除罪恶。“Sabbavāriphuṭo”指为一切遮恶之防护所触及。“Gatatto”谓心已达究竟。“Yatatto”谓心已得防护。“Ṭhitatto”谓心善安住。其教说中虽有随顺于法之处,然因见不清净,故皆成邪见。显示巴利原文
176-178. Nāṭaputtavāde cātuyāmasaṃvarasaṃvutoti catukoṭṭhāsena saṃvarena saṃvuto. Sabbavārivāritocāti vāritasabbaudako paṭikkhittasabbasītodakoti attho. So kira sītodake sattasaññī hoti, tasmā na taṃ vaḷañjeti. Sabbavāriyuttoti sabbena pāpavāraṇena yutto. Sabbavāridhutoti sabbena pāpavāraṇena dhutapāpo. Sabbavāriphuṭoti sabbena pāpavāraṇena phuṭṭho. Gatattoti koṭippattacitto. Yatattoti saṃyatacitto. Ṭhitattoti suppatiṭṭhitacitto. Etassa vāde kiñci sāsanānulomampi atthi, asuddhaladdhitāya pana sabbā diṭṭhiyeva jātā.
散阇耶毗罗胝子论注显示巴利原文
Sañcayabelaṭṭhaputtavādavaṇṇanā
179-181 散阇耶论中的“不死矫乱”,其义与前述相同。显示巴利原文
179-181. Sañcayavādo amarāvikkhepe vuttanayo eva.
第一现见沙门果注显示巴利原文
Paṭhamasandiṭṭhikasāmaññaphalavaṇṇanā
182 “Sohaṃ, bhante”即“尊者,我”之意:犹如挤压沙子而不得油,我于外道诸说中寻不见精髓,故而请问世尊。显示巴利原文
182.Sohaṃ, bhanteti so ahaṃ bhante, vālukaṃ pīḷetvā telaṃ alabhamāno viya titthiyavādesu sāraṃ alabhanto bhagavantaṃ pucchāmīti attho.
183 「Yathā te khameyyā」的意思是“只要世尊觉得合适”。「Dāso」指奴仆,即家生奴、买得奴、俘获奴、自愿为奴这四种中的一种。「Kammakāro」指工作者,即勤快不懈、习惯于做事的人。他远远看见主人便率先起身,因此称为“先起者”(pubbuṭṭhāyī)。这样起身后,便为主人铺设座位,做完洗脚等应做之事,然后才躺下或坐下,因此称为“后卧者”(pacchānipātī)。另一种说法是:在主人尚未起床时他就先起来了,因此称为“先起者”;从清晨开始直到主人夜间入睡前,他把所有事务做完后才躺下休息,因此称为“后卧者”。他口中总是应答着“做什么?做什么?”,随时回应主人的吩咐,因此称为“应答‘做什么?’者”(kiṃkārapaṭissāvī)。他专做令主人欢喜的事,因此称为“悦意行者”(manāpacārī);只说亲切爱语,因此称为“爱语者”(piyavādī);总是看着主人心满意足的面容来行事,因此称为“仰面者”(mukhullokako)。显示巴利原文
183.Yathā te khameyyāti yathā te rucceyya. Dāsoti antojātadhanakkītakaramarānītasāmaṃdāsabyopagatānaṃ aññataro. Kammakāroti analaso kammakaraṇasīloyeva. Dūrato disvā paṭhamameva uṭṭhahatīti pubbuṭṭhāyī. Evaṃ uṭṭhito sāmino āsanaṃ paññapetvā pādadhovanādikattabbakiccaṃ katvā pacchā nipatati nisīdatīti pacchānipātī. Sāmikamhi vā sayanato avuṭṭhite pubbeyeva vuṭṭhātīti pubbuṭṭhāyī. Paccūsakālato paṭṭhāya yāva sāmino rattiṃ niddokkamanaṃ, tāva sabbakiccāni katvā pacchā nipatati, seyyaṃ kappetīti pacchānipātī. Kiṃ karomi, kiṃ karomīti evaṃ kiṃkārameva paṭisuṇanto vicaratīti kiṃ kārapaṭissāvī. Manāpameva kiriyaṃ karotīti manāpacārī. Piyameva vadatīti piyavādī. Sāmino tuṭṭhapahaṭṭhaṃ mukhaṃ ullokayamāno vicaratīti mukhullokako.
「Devo maññe」意思是“如同天王一般”。「Sovatassāhaṃ puññāni kareyyaṃ」意思是“啊,若我能如此该多好,能修诸般福德”。另有「So vatassa'ssa」的异读,意思相同。他出家精勤后,这样思维:「Yaṃnūnāhaṃ」——如果我作布施,即使尽我一生行布施,也及不上国王一日所施的百分之一。显示巴利原文
Devo maññeti devo viya. Sovatassāhaṃ puññāni kareyyanti so vata ahaṃ evarūpo assaṃ, yadi puññāni kareyyanti attho. ‘‘So vatassa’ssa’’ntipi pāṭho, ayamevattho. Yaṃnūnāhanti sace dānaṃ dassāmi, yaṃ rājā ekadivasaṃ deti, tato satabhāgampi yāvajīvaṃ na sakkhissāmi dātunti pabbajjāyaṃ ussāhaṃ katvā evaṃ cintanabhāvaṃ dasseti.
「以身防护」(kāyena saṃvuto):即以身关闭、堵住不善法进入之门,此为含义。其余两句也同理。「以食衣为最上」(ghāsacchādanaparamatāya):即以食衣为最上、为最高,意指舍弃不正当的谋生方式,以最严格的减损行而满足。「乐于远离」(abhirato paviveke):即乐于经中所说的三种远离——“身远离属于住于远离处者,心远离属于乐出离者,依远离属于无依着、达到行灭之人”;意指舍弃群体的交际,以身独住;舍弃心烦恼的交际,依八等至而独住;进入果等至或灭等至,证得涅槃而住。「Yagghe」:这是一个表示责备语气的不变词。显示巴利原文
Kāyena saṃvutoti kāyena pihito hutvā akusalassa pavesanadvāraṃ thaketvāti attho. Eseva nayo sesapadadvayepi. Ghāsacchādanaparamatāyāti ghāsacchādanena paramatāya uttamatāya, etadatthampi anesanaṃ pahāya aggasallekhena santuṭṭhoti attho. Abhirato paviveketi ‘‘kāyaviveko ca vivekaṭṭhakāyānaṃ, cittaviveko ca nekkhammābhiratānaṃ, paramavodānappattānaṃ upadhiviveko ca nirupadhīnaṃ puggalānaṃ visaṅkhāragatāna’’nti evaṃ vutte tividhepi viveke rato; gaṇasaṅgaṇikaṃ pahāya kāyena eko viharati, cittakilesasaṅgaṇikaṃ pahāya aṭṭhasamāpattivasena eko viharati, phalasamāpattiṃ vā nirodhasamāpattiṃ vā pavisitvā nibbānaṃ patvā viharatīti attho. Yaggheti codanatthe nipāto.
184 「我们也会用座位来邀请」(Āsanenapinimanteyyāma):即把坐过的座位拍净,然后说‘请坐这里’。「也会强行邀请」(Abhinimanteyyāmapi naṃ):即主动持往而邀请。其中,主动持往有两种方式:以语言及以身体。若这样说道:‘在您等想要的任何时候,需要我们的衣等,请尽管开口。’此即是以语言主动持往而邀请。若见到衣等有所短缺,便取出那些物品说‘请收下这些’,这样给予,即是以身体主动持往而邀请。针对这两种情形,说了「也会强行邀请」。在此,「病缘药具」(gilānapaccayabhesajjaparikkhāro)是指任何适合病人的药物,其词义解释在《清净道论》中已说。「守护、遮挡与保护」(rakkhāvaraṇagutti):即名为守护、遮挡的保护。然而,这种保护若安排手持武器的人站岗,则不名为如法的安排。但若这样安排:在不适当的时间,捡柴人、采叶人等不得进入寺院,猎鹿人等不得在寺院界内捕鹿或捕鱼,这样的保护则名为如法的保护。针对此而说「如法」显示巴利原文
184.Āsanenapinimanteyyāmāti nisinnāsanaṃ papphoṭetvā idha nisīdathāti vadeyyāma. Abhinimanteyyāmapi nanti abhiharitvāpi naṃ nimanteyyāma. Tattha duvidho abhihāro – vācāya ceva kāyena ca. Tumhākaṃ icchiticchitakkhaṇe amhākaṃ cīvarādīhi vadeyyātha yenatthoti vadanto hi vācāya abhiharitvā nimanteti nāma. Cīvarādivekallaṃ sallakkhetvā idaṃ gaṇhāthāti tāni dento pana kāyena abhiharitvā nimanteti nāma. Tadubhayampi sandhāya abhinimanteyyāmapi nanti āha. Ettha ca gilānapaccayabhesajjaparikkhāroti yaṃ kiñci gilānassa sappāyaṃ osadhaṃ. Vacanattho pana visuddhimagge vutto. Rakkhāvaraṇaguttinti rakkhāsaṅkhātañceva āvaraṇasaṅkhātañca guttiṃ. Sā panesā na āvudhahatthe purise ṭhapentena dhammikā nāma saṃvidahitā hoti. Yathā pana avelāya kaṭṭhahārikapaṇṇahārikādayo vihāraṃ na pavisanti, migaluddakādayo vihārasīmāya mige vā macche vā na gaṇhanti, evaṃ saṃvidahantena dhammikā nāma rakkhā saṃvihitā hoti, taṃ sandhāyāha – ‘‘dhammika’’nti.
185 「如果是这样的话」(Yadi evaṃ sante):即假如你的奴隶能从你那里得到礼敬等,事情若如此。在那样的情况下。「必定」(Addhā):这是一个表示决定的词语。「第一」(Paṭhama):说出此词时,即暗示还有其他存在。正因如此,国王才说:‘尊者,那么,还能有别的吗?’等。显示巴利原文
185.Yadi evaṃ santeti yadi tava dāso tuyhaṃ santikā abhivādanādīni labheyya. Evaṃ sante. Addhāti ekaṃsavacanametaṃ. Paṭhamanti bhaṇanto aññassāpi atthitaṃ dīpeti. Teneva ca rājā sakkā pana, bhante, aññampītiādimāha.
第二项 现见的沙门果注释(Dutiyasandiṭṭhikasāmaññaphalavaṇṇanā)显示巴利原文
Dutiyasandiṭṭhikasāmaññaphalavaṇṇanā
186-188 「耕」(Kasatī):故名为耕作者(kassako)。「屋主」(gahapatiko):即家的主人,仅为一户之家长。「作钩者」(karakārako):即制作名为钩的工具之人。「增堆者」(rāsivaḍḍhako):即使谷堆与财堆增长者。显示巴利原文
186-188. Kasatīti kassako. Gehassa pati, ekagehamatte jeṭṭhakoti gahapatiko. Balisaṅkhātaṃ karaṃ karotīti karakārako. Dhaññarāsiṃ dhanarāsiñca vaḍḍhetīti rāsivaḍḍhako.
“少”(Appaṃ vā):即微少,乃至仅一升米之量。“财蕴”(Bhogakkhandhaṃ):指财富之聚。“大”(Mahantaṃ vā):即广大。为了表明:如同舍弃大的而出家是难事,舍弃少的亦是如此,故两者俱说。而在关于奴隶的部分,因奴隶对自己尚且不能自主,何况对财富。凡是他所拥有的财物,皆唯属其主人所有,故此不提财物。显示巴利原文
Appaṃvāti parittakaṃ vā antamaso taṇḍulanāḷimattakampi. Bhogakkhandhanti bhogarāsiṃ. Mahantaṃ vāti vipulaṃ vā. Yathā hi mahantaṃ pahāya pabbajituṃ dukkaraṃ, evaṃ appampīti dassanatthaṃ ubhayamāha. Dāsavāre pana yasmā dāso attanopi anissaro, pageva bhogānaṃ. Yañhi tassa dhanaṃ, taṃ sāmikānaññeva hoti, tasmā bhogaggahaṇaṃ na kataṃ. Ñātiyeva ñātiparivaṭṭo.
更为殊胜的沙门果注释(Paṇītatarasāmaññaphalavaṇṇanā)显示巴利原文
Paṇītatarasāmaññaphalavaṇṇanā
189 “那么,尊者,是否还有其他现见之法可证?”:此处未说“即是如此”。何以故?因为若说“即是如此”,世尊足能以此类譬喻,历经整个日夜乃至更长时,亦能阐明沙门果。虽听闻彼世尊说法,实无有边际,但国王思维:‘其义理大抵如是’,为更询其殊胜差别,故不言“即是如此”,而问:“更优越、更殊胜的”。其中,“更优越”(abhikkantataraṃ)即更可意、最胜之意。“更殊胜”(paṇītataraṃ)即更上等。“因此”(Tena hi):此为一表催促语气之不变词。他于催促听闻时作如是说。“请听”(Suṇohi):即他欲听闻那更优越、更殊胜的沙门果。显示巴利原文
189.Sakkā pana, bhante, aññampi diṭṭheva dhammeti idha evamevāti na vuttaṃ. Taṃ kasmāti ce, evamevāti hi vuccamāne pahoti bhagavā sakalampi rattindivaṃ tato vā bhiyyopi evarūpāhi upamāhi sāmaññaphalaṃ dīpetuṃ. Tattha kiñcāpi etassa bhagavato vacanasavane pariyantaṃ nāma natthi, tathāpi attho tādisoyeva bhavissatīti cintetvā upari visesaṃ pucchanto evamevāti avatvā – ‘‘abhikkantatarañca paṇītatarañcā’’ti āha. Tattha abhikkantataranti abhimanāpataraṃ atiseṭṭhataranti attho. Paṇītataranti uttamataraṃ. Tena hīti uyyojanatthe nipāto. Savane uyyojento hi naṃ evamāha. Suṇohīti abhikkantatarañca paṇītatarañca sāmaññaphalaṃ suṇāti.
“善作意”(Sādhukaṃ manasikarohī):此处“善”(sādhukaṃ)与“善哉”(sādhu)同义。盖此sādhu一词,见于请求、接受、赞赏、美好、坚定等义。如于“善哉,尊者!愿世尊为我略说法要”等处,是见于请求。于“尊者!善哉。”那位比丘对世尊所说欢喜、随喜后……”等处,是见于接受。于“善哉!善哉!舍利弗!”等处,是见于赞赏。显示巴利原文
Sādhukaṃ manasikarohīti ettha pana sādhukaṃ sādhūti ekatthametaṃ. Ayañhi sādhu-saddo āyācanasampaṭicchanasampahaṃsanasundara daḷhīkammādīsu dissati. ‘‘Sādhu me, bhante, bhagavā saṅkhittena dhammaṃ desetū’’tiādīsu (saṃ. ni. 4.95) hi āyācane dissati. ‘‘Sādhu, bhanteti kho so bhikkhu bhagavato bhāsitaṃ abhinanditvā anumoditvā’’tiādīsu (ma. ni. 3.86) sampaṭicchane. ‘‘Sādhu sādhu, sāriputtā’’tiādīsu (dī. ni. 3.349) sampahaṃsane.
‘‘Sādhu dhammaruci rājā, sādhu paññāṇavā naro; Sādhu mittānamaddubbho, pāpassākaraṇaṃ sukha’’nti. (jā. 2.17.101);
于“美好”等义中亦如是。例如“那么,婆罗门,请善巧谛听、善作意”等(《增支部》5.192),此中“善巧”(sādhuka)一词正用于“坚固作”与“教令”之义。在此,此词亦应被理解为既表“坚固作”,亦表“教令”。它亦可通于“美好”义。以“坚固作”义,即“请坚固听闻此法,善加执持”;以“教令”义,即“依我教敕而听”;以“美好”义,即“请听此美妙、殊胜之法”——此义当如是知。显示巴利原文
Ādīsu sundare. ‘‘Tena hi, brāhmaṇa, suṇohi sādhukaṃ manasi karohī’’tiādīsu (a. ni. 5.192) sādhukasaddoyeva daḷhīkamme, āṇattiyantipi vuccati . Idhāpi assa ettheva daḷhīkamme ca āṇattiyañca veditabbo. Sundarepi vaṭṭati. Daḷhīkammatthena hi daḷhamimaṃ dhammaṃ suṇāhi, suggahitaṃ gaṇhanto. Āṇattiatthena mama āṇattiyā suṇāhi, sundaratthena sundaramimaṃ bhaddakaṃ dhammaṃ suṇāhīti evaṃ dīpitaṃ hoti.
“作意”意为“转向”、“平心持意”,即令心不散乱而谛听,将法安住于心中。此处的“听”是为了防止耳根的散乱;“善巧作意”则是通过对作意的坚固策励,以防止意根的散乱。前者旨在防止对文句颠倒的执取,后者旨在防止对义理颠倒的执取。再者,前者策励听闻正法,后者策励对已闻之法进行忆持、审察等。前句阐明:“此法文句圆满,故应听闻”;后句阐明:“此法义理甚深,故应善巧作意”。或者,可将“善巧”一词通贯两句来理解:因法在法理上甚深、在开示上甚深,故应“善巧地听”;因法在义理上甚深、在证悟上甚深,故应“善巧地作意”。“我将详说”,意为:“大王,请允许”——如是我已应允,将详细开示《沙门果》。显示巴利原文
Manasi karohīti āvajja, samannāharāti attho, avikkhittacitto hutvā nisāmehi, citte karohīti adhippāyo. Api cettha suṇohīti sotindriyavikkhepanivāraṇametaṃ. Sādhukaṃ manasi karohīti manasikāre daḷhīkammaniyojanena manindriyavikkhepanivāraṇaṃ. Purimañcettha byañjanavipallāsaggāhavāraṇaṃ, pacchimaṃ atthavipallāsaggāhavāraṇaṃ. Purimena ca dhammassavane niyojeti, pacchimena sutānaṃ dhammānaṃ dhāraṇūpaparikkhādīsu. Purimena ca sabyañjano ayaṃ dhammo, tasmā savanīyoti dīpeti . Pacchimena sattho, tasmā sādhukaṃ manasi kātabboti. Sādhukapadaṃ vā ubhayapadehi yojetvā yasmā ayaṃ dhammo dhammagambhīro ceva desanāgambhīro ca, tasmā suṇāhi sādhukaṃ, yasmā atthagambhīro ca paṭivedhagambhīro ca, tasmā sādhukaṃ manasi karohīti evaṃ yojanā veditabbā. Bhāsissāmīti sakkā mahārājāti evaṃ paṭiññātaṃ sāmaññaphaladesanaṃ vitthārato bhāsissāmi. ‘‘Desessāmī’’ti hi saṅkhittadīpanaṃ hoti. Bhāsissāmīti vitthāradīpanaṃ. Tenāha vaṅgīsatthero –
他既能简略开示,亦能详细宣说;
其音声犹如画眉鸟,涌发无碍辩才。
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Saṅkhittenapi deseti, vitthārenapi bhāsati; Sāḷikāyiva nigghoso, paṭibhānaṃ udīrayī’’ti. (saṃ. ni. 1.214);
世尊这样说后,摩揭陀王阿阇世——韦提希之子——心生踊跃,应道:“是的,尊者!”他如此回应世尊,领受了世尊的话语。这是说:他随顺、接受了世尊所言。显示巴利原文
Evaṃ vutte ussāhajāto hutvā – ‘‘evaṃ, bhante’’ti kho rājā māgadho ajātasattu vedehiputto bhagavato paccassosi bhagavato vacanaṃ sampaṭicchi, paṭiggahesīti vuttaṃ hoti.
190 于是世尊这样对他说;意思是,世尊此时将宣说“大王,于此……”等全部经文。其中,“于此”(idha)是一个表示处所的虚词,有时是依于“世间”而说的,例如:“如来出现于此世间”。有时是依于“教法”而说的,例如:“比丘们,就在此教法中,有第一沙门,也有第二沙门” 。有时是依于“处所”而说的,例如:显示巴利原文
190. Athassa bhagavā etadavoca, etaṃ avoca, idāni vattabbaṃ ‘‘idha mahārājā’’tiādiṃ sakalaṃ suttaṃ avocāti attho. Tattha idhāti desāpadese nipāto, svāyaṃ katthaci lokaṃ upādāya vuccati. Yathāha – ‘‘idha tathāgato loke uppajjatī’’ti. Katthaci sāsanaṃ yathāha – ‘‘idheva, bhikkhave, paṭhamo samaṇo, idha dutiyo samaṇo’’ti (a. ni. 4.241). Katthaci okāsaṃ. Yathāha –
“我住立此处,身为天众,正念具足,
我又获得了寿命,贤者,你当如此了知。
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Idheva tiṭṭhamānassa, devabhūtassa me sato; Punarāyu ca me laddho, evaṃ jānāhi mārisā’’ti. (dī. ni. 2.369);
有时,“这”(idha)仅用于补足语句。例如:“比丘们,我于此(idhāhaṃ)食已,不再受食”(《中部》1.30)。但在此处,应知它是依于“世间”而说的。“大王”——为了展开先前已应允的教导,世尊再次称呼“大王”。整句的意思是:“大王,于此世间,如来出现,他是阿拉汉……乃至……佛陀、世尊。”其中,“如来”一词在《梵网经》中已作解释。“阿拉汉”等词,在《清净道论》中已有详释。“出现于世间”的“世间”有三种:器世间、有情世间、行世间。但此处指的是有情世间。而且,如来在有情世间出现,并非在天界,亦非在梵天界,唯在于人界。在人界中,也非在其他轮围世界,而正是在此轮围世界。于此轮围世界,也并非任意处所,而是划定范围为:“东方有名为伽迦罗的镇,其附近有大娑罗,超出这些便是边地,以内是中央;东南方有名为沙罗伐底的河,超出其外是边地,以内是中央;南方有名为白耳者的镇,超出其外是边地,以内是中央;显示巴利原文
Katthaci padapūraṇamattameva. Yathāha ‘‘idhāhaṃ, bhikkhave, bhuttāvī assaṃ pavārito’’ti (ma. ni. 1.30). Idha pana lokaṃ upādāya vuttoti veditabbo. Mahārājāti yathā paṭiññātaṃ desanaṃ desetuṃ puna mahārājāti ālapati. Idaṃ vuttaṃ hoti – ‘‘mahārāja imasmiṃ loke tathāgato uppajjati arahaṃ…pe… buddho bhagavā’’ti. Tattha tathāgatasaddo brahmajāle vutto. Arahantiādayo visuddhimagge vitthāritā. Loke uppajjatīti ettha pana lokoti – okāsaloko sattaloko saṅkhāralokoti tividho. Idha pana sattaloko adhippeto. Sattaloke uppajjamānopi ca tathāgato na devaloke, na brahmaloke, manussalokeva uppajjati. Manussalokepi na aññasmiṃ cakkavāḷe, imasmiṃyeva cakkavāḷe. Tatrāpi na sabbaṭṭhānesu, ‘‘puratthimāya disāya gajaṅgalaṃ nāma nigamo tassāparena mahāsālo, tato parā paccantimā janapadā orato majjhe, puratthimadakkhiṇāya disāya salaḷavatī nāma nadī. Tato parā paccantimā janapadā, orato majjhe, dakkhiṇāya disāya setakaṇṇikaṃ nāma nigamo, tato parā paccantimā janapadā, orato majjhe, pacchimāya disāya thūṇaṃ nāma brāhmaṇagāmo, tato parā paccantimā janapadā, orato majjhe, uttarāya disāya usiraddhajo nāma pabbato, tato parā paccantimā janapadā orato majjhe’’ti evaṃ paricchinne āyāmato tiyojanasate, vitthārato aḍḍhateyyayojanasate, parikkhepato navayojanasate majjhimapadese uppajjati. Na kevalañca tathāgato, paccekabuddhā, aggasāvakā, asītimahātherā, buddhamātā, buddhapitā, cakkavattī rājā aññe ca sārappattā brāhmaṇagahapatikā etthevuppajjanti.
在此,从善生供养甜乳粥之食,直至证得阿拉汉道,这段期间称为“出现”;于阿拉汉果位,则称为“已出现”。或者从大出离开始,直至阿拉汉道;或者从兜率天开始,直至阿拉汉道;或者从燃灯佛足下发愿开始,直至阿拉汉道,皆称为“出现”;于阿拉汉果,则称为“已出现”。此处是就最初出现的情形而说“出现”,意即“如来出现于世间”。显示巴利原文
Tattha tathāgato sujātāya dinnamadhupāyāsabhojanato yāva arahattamaggo, tāva uppajjati nāma, arahattaphale uppanno nāma. Mahābhinikkhamanato vā yāva arahattamaggo. Tusitabhavanato vā yāva arahattamaggo. Dīpaṅkarapādamūlato vā yāva arahattamaggo, tāva uppajjati nāma, arahattaphale uppanno nāma. Idha sabbapaṭhamaṃ uppannabhāvaṃ sandhāya uppajjatīti vuttaṃ. Tathāgato loke uppanno hotīti ayañhettha attho.
“那位……此世间”:彼世尊,即此世间。现在指出当说的内容。“含天神的”(sadevakaṃ):即与诸天同在,故称含天神的。同样,“含魔罗的”:即与魔罗同在,故称含魔罗的;“含梵天的”:即与梵天同在,故称含梵天的;“含沙门婆罗门的”:即与沙门、婆罗门同在,故称含沙门婆罗门的。“生类”(pajā):由出生而有的,称为生类。“含天人的”:即与天和人同在。其中,“含天神的”一词,当知是指五欲界天;“含魔罗的”一词,指第六欲界天;“含梵天的”一词,指梵身天等梵天界。“含沙门婆罗门”一词,一方面指那些作为教法之敌、持反对立场的沙门婆罗门,另一方面也指已止息恶法、已排遣恶法的沙门婆罗门。“生类”一词,指有情世间。“含天人的”一词,指世俗所称呼的天,以及其余的人。因此,在这里应当这样理解:前三个词,连同器世间一并说明有情世间;后两个词,则纯粹就有情世间而言。显示巴利原文
So imaṃ lokanti so bhagavā imaṃ lokaṃ. Idāni vattabbaṃ nidasseti. Sadevakanti saha devehi sadevakaṃ. Evaṃ saha mārena samārakaṃ, saha brahmunā sabrahmakaṃ, saha samaṇabrāhmaṇehi sassamaṇabrāhmaṇiṃ. Pajātattā pajā, taṃ pajaṃ. Saha devamanussehi sadevamanussaṃ. Tattha sadevakavacanena pañca kāmāvacaradevaggahaṇaṃ veditabbaṃ. Samāraka – vacanena chaṭṭhakāmāvacaradevaggahaṇaṃ. Sabrahmakavacanena brahmakāyikādibrahmaggahaṇaṃ. Sassamaṇabrāhmaṇīvacanena sāsanassa paccatthikapaccāmittasamaṇabrāhmaṇaggahaṇaṃ, samitapāpabāhitapāpasamaṇabrāhmaṇaggahaṇañca. Pajāvacanena sattalokaggahaṇaṃ. Sadevamanussavacanena sammutidevaavasesamanussaggahaṇaṃ. Evamettha tīhi padehi okāsalokena saddhiṃ sattaloko. Dvīhi pajāvasena sattalokova gahitoti veditabbo.
另一种解释:以“含天神的”一词,摄受无色界天世间;以“含魔罗的”一词,摄受六欲天世间;以“含梵天的”一词,摄受有色梵天世间;以“含沙门婆罗门等”一词,或以四众弟子而言,指与世俗天共处的人间世间,或指其余一切有情世间。显示巴利原文
Aparo nayo, sadevakaggahaṇena arūpāvacaradevaloko gahito. Samārakaggahaṇena cha kāmāvacaradevaloko. Sabrahmakaggahaṇena rūpī brahmaloko. Sassamaṇabrāhmaṇādiggahaṇena catuparisavasena sammutidevehi vā saha manussaloko, avasesasabbasattaloko vā.
此处,以“含天神的”一句,从最殊胜的层次作区分,表明一切世间皆为如来所现证。然而,有人生起疑惑:“魔罗有大威德力,是六欲天的自在主、他化自在者,难道连他也被这位如来所现证了吗?”为断除这些人的疑惑,随即宣说“含魔罗的”。又有人这样想:“梵天有大威德力,能以一手指照亮一千轮围世界,以两手指……乃至以十手指照亮十千轮围世界,并享受无上的禅那等至之乐,难道连他也被现证了吗?”为断除此疑惑,继而宣说“含梵天的”。还有人这样考虑:“有诸多沙门、婆罗门是教法的敌人,难道连他们也被现证了吗?”为断除此疑惑,更说“含沙门、婆罗门及生类”。如此,先以最殊胜的层次表明众生已被现证之后,再依世俗的天与其余人等,从最殊胜的区分角度,显示其余有情世间的现证,故说“含天人的”。这便是此处的内在次第。显示巴利原文
Api cettha sadevakavacanena ukkaṭṭhaparicchedato sabbassa lokassa sacchikatabhāvamāha. Tato yesaṃ ahosi – ‘‘māro mahānubhāvo cha kāmāvacarissaro vasavattī, kiṃ sopi etena sacchikato’’ti, tesaṃ vimatiṃ vidhamanto ‘‘samāraka’’nti āha. Yesaṃ pana ahosi – ‘‘brahmā mahānubhāvo ekaṅguliyā ekasmiṃ cakkavāḷasahasse ālokaṃ pharati, dvīhi …pe… dasahi aṅgulīhi dasasu cakkavāḷasahassesu ālokaṃ pharati. Anuttarañca jhānasamāpattisukhaṃ paṭisaṃvedeti, kiṃ sopi sacchikato’’ti, tesaṃ vimatiṃ vidhamanto sabrahmakanti āha. Tato ye cintesuṃ – ‘‘puthū samaṇabrāhmaṇā sāsanassa paccatthikā, kiṃ tepi sacchikatā’’ti, tesaṃ vimatiṃ vidhamanto sassamaṇabrāhmaṇiṃ pajanti āha. Evaṃ ukkaṭṭhukkaṭṭhānaṃ sacchikatabhāvaṃ pakāsetvā atha sammutideve avasesamanusse ca upādāya ukkaṭṭhaparicchedavasena sesasattalokassa sacchikatabhāvaṃ pakāsento sadevamanussanti āha. Ayamettha bhāvānukkamo.
然而古师们说:「含诸天的」就是指与诸天共在的其余世间;「含魔的」就是指与魔罗共在的其余世间;「含梵天的」就是指与梵天共在的其余世间。如此,以这三种方式,将三界一切有情收摄于三句之中,随后又以两句总括,而说「含沙门、婆罗门,含众生、天人」。这样,通过这五句不同的表述,便恰如其分地将三界众生完全统摄了。显示巴利原文
Porāṇā panāhu sadevakanti devehi saddhiṃ avasesalokaṃ. Samārakanti mārena saddhiṃ avasesalokaṃ. Sabrahmakanti brahmehi saddhiṃ avasesalokaṃ. Evaṃ sabbepi tibhavūpage satte tīhākārehi tīsu padesu pakkhipitvā puna dvīhi padehi pariyādiyanto sassamaṇabrāhmaṇiṃ pajaṃ sadevamanussanti āha. Evaṃ pañcahipi padehi tena tenākārena tedhātukameva pariyādinnanti.
「亲自证知、现证之后而宣说」:其中,「亲自」(sayaṃ)意为自己,不依他人引导。「证知」(abhiññā)即 abhiññāya,意思是依殊胜的智慧而了知。「现证」(sacchikatvā)意为令法现前、亲证,这便排除了类比推理等认知方式。「宣说」(pavedeti)意为觉悟、令知、开显。显示巴利原文
Sayaṃ abhiññā sacchikatvā pavedetīti ettha pana sayanti sāmaṃ aparaneyyo hutvā. Abhiññāti abhiññāya, adhikena ñāṇena ñatvāti attho. Sacchikatvāti paccakkhaṃ katvā, etena anumānādipaṭikkhepo kato hoti. Pavedetīti bodheti viññāpeti pakāseti.
「他开示初善、中善、后善的法」:彼世尊出于对众生的悲悯,虽然舍弃了无上的远离之乐,仍然为众生宣说法要。并且,无论是少说还是多说,他一向以初善等殊胜方式而开示。也就是说:在开头,他以善妙、良善、无有过失的方式开示;在中间,同样以善妙、良善、无有过失的方式开示;在结尾,也同样以善妙、良善、无有过失的方式开示。在这里,既有「教说」的初、中、后,也有「教法」的初、中、后。先就教说而言:在四句偈中,第一句称为初,随后的两句称为中,最后一句称为后。对于仅有一处联结的经典,因缘部分是初,「这就是世尊所说」是后,这两者之间的内容是中。对于有多处联结的经典,第一处联结是初,最后一处联结是后,中间的一处、两处乃至多处联结,即为中。显示巴利原文
So dhammaṃ deseti ādikalyāṇaṃ…pe… pariyosānakalyāṇanti so bhagavā sattesu kāruññataṃ paṭicca hitvāpi anuttaraṃ vivekasukhaṃ dhammaṃ deseti. Tañca kho appaṃ vā bahuṃ vā desento ādikalyāṇādippakārameva deseti. Ādimhipi, kalyāṇaṃ bhaddakaṃ anavajjameva katvā deseti, majjhepi, pariyosānepi, kalyāṇaṃ bhaddakaṃ anavajjameva katvā desetīti vuttaṃ hoti. Tattha atthi desanāya ādimajjhapariyosānaṃ, atthi sāsanassa. Desanāya tāva catuppadikāyapi gāthāya paṭhamapādo ādi nāma, tato dve majjhaṃ nāma, ante eko pariyosānaṃ nāma. Ekānusandhikassa suttassa nidānaṃ ādi, idamavocāti pariyosānaṃ, ubhinnamantarā majjhaṃ. Anekānusandhikassa suttassa paṭhamānusandhi ādi, ante anusandhi pariyosānaṃ, majjhe eko vā dve vā bahū vā majjhameva.
然而于教法中,戒、定、观称为“初”。有经文说:“什么是善法之始?即是善清净的戒与正直的见。”(《相应部》)又,如说“诸比丘,有中道,为如来所证悟”的这一圣道,则称为“中”。果与涅槃则称为“后”。如经中说:“婆罗门,梵行以此为目的,以此为核心,以此为最终”(《中部》),此处以果为后;而说“毗舍佉贤友,梵行以涅槃为归宿,以涅槃为彼岸,以涅槃为最终”(《中部》)时,则以涅槃为后。这里指的是教法的初、中、后。因为世尊说法时,于初展示戒,于中阐明道,于后展示涅槃,故说:“他开示初善、中善、后善的法。”因此,其他说法者说法时亦当如此遵循:显示巴利原文
Sāsanassa pana sīlasamādhivipassanā ādi nāma. Vuttampi cetaṃ – ‘‘ko cādi kusalānaṃ dhammānaṃ? Sīlañca suvisuddhaṃ diṭṭhi ca ujukā’’ti (saṃ. ni. 5.369). ‘‘Atthi, bhikkhave, majjhimā paṭipadā tathāgatena abhisambuddhā’’ti evaṃ vutto pana ariyamaggo majjhaṃ nāma. Phalañceva nibbānañca pariyosānaṃ nāma. ‘‘Etadatthamidaṃ, brāhmaṇa, brahmacariyaṃ, etaṃ sāraṃ, etaṃ pariyosāna’’nti (ma. ni. 1.324) hi ettha phalaṃ pariyosānanti vuttaṃ. ‘‘Nibbānogadhaṃ hi, āvuso visākha, brahmacariyaṃ vussati, nibbānaparāyanaṃ nibbānapariyosāna’’nti (ma. ni. 1.466) ettha nibbānaṃ pariyosānanti vuttaṃ. Idha desanāya ādimajjhapariyosānaṃ adhippetaṃ. Bhagavā hi dhammaṃ desento ādimhi sīlaṃ dassetvā majjhe maggaṃ pariyosāne nibbānaṃ dasseti. Tena vuttaṃ – ‘‘so dhammaṃ deseti ādikalyāṇaṃ majjhekalyāṇaṃ pariyosānakalyāṇa’’nti. Tasmā aññopi dhammakathiko dhammaṃ kathento –
于初时展示戒,于中时阐明道;
于后时展示涅槃,此即说法者的准则。
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Ādimhi sīlaṃ dasseyya, majjhe maggaṃ vibhāvaye; Pariyosānamhi nibbānaṃ, esā kathikasaṇṭhitī’’ti.
“有义有文”:如果某人的开示依赖于对粥、饭食、女人、男子等的描述,则不称为有义地开示。然而世尊舍弃了那样的开示,而教导基于四念处等的开示,因此被称为“有义地开示”。另一方面,如果某人的开示只有单一音节,或是全无唇音的音节,或是全为送气音、全为鼻音的音节,那就如同达米勒人、吉罗陀人、娑婆罗人等边地部族的语言,由于音韵不具足,便称为“无文”的开示。而世尊——显示巴利原文
Sātthaṃ sabyañjananti yassa hi yāgubhattaitthipurisādivaṇṇanānissitā desanā hoti, na so sātthaṃ deseti. Bhagavā pana tathārūpaṃ desanaṃ pahāya catusatipaṭṭhānādinissitaṃ desanaṃ deseti. Tasmā sātthaṃ desetīti vuccati. Yassa pana desanā ekabyañjanādiyuttā vā sabbaniroṭṭhabyañjanā vā sabbavissaṭṭhasabbaniggahītabyañjanā vā, tassa damiḷakirātasavarādimilakkhūnaṃ bhāsā viya byañjanapāripūriyā abhāvato abyañjanā nāma desanā hoti. Bhagavā pana –
不送气音与送气音,长与短,重与轻,以及鼻音;
结合、确立与解脱:依于对音节的辨识,而有此十种分类。
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Sithilaṃ dhanitañca dīgharassaṃ, garukaṃ lahukañca niggahītaṃ; Sambandhavavatthitaṃ vimuttaṃ, dasadhā byañjanabuddhiyā pabhedo’’ti.
如此,世尊不以十种文句有任何缺失,令文句完全圆满而开示法,故称“教导具足文句的法”。其中,“唯圆满”的“唯”,指完全、全部。“圆满”,指无缺无余。这是说:世尊所教导的法,正是完全圆满,连一分不圆满也没有。既无可增添,也无可删减,因此应理解为“完全圆满”。而“清净”,是指没有随烦恼。若有人心想“我要借由这个法教来求得利养或恭敬”,以此心说法,他的教导便不清净。但世尊不企求世间利养,唯以利益众生之心,修习慈心,心地柔软,安住于度脱众生的本怀,以这样的心说法,故被称为“教导清净的法”。显示巴利原文
Evaṃ vuttaṃ dasavidhaṃ byañjanaṃ amakkhetvā paripuṇṇabyañjanameva katvā dhammaṃ deseti, tasmā sabyañjanaṃ dhammaṃ desetīti vuccati. Kevalaparipuṇṇanti ettha kevalanti sakalādhivacanaṃ. Paripuṇṇanti anūnādhikavacanaṃ. Idaṃ vuttaṃ hoti sakalaparipuṇṇameva deseti, ekadesanāpi aparipuṇṇā natthīti. Upanetabbaapanetabbassa abhāvato kevalaparipuṇṇanti veditabbaṃ. Parisuddhanti nirupakkilesaṃ. Yo hi imaṃ dhammadesanaṃ nissāya lābhaṃ vā sakkāraṃ vā labhissāmīti deseti, tassa aparisuddhā desanā hoti. Bhagavā pana lokāmisanirapekkho hitapharaṇena mettābhāvanāya muduhadayo ullumpanasabhāvasaṇṭhitena cittena deseti. Tasmā parisuddhaṃ dhammaṃ desetīti vuccati.
“阐明梵行”——此处,“梵行”一词可见于以下诸义:布施、承事、五学处戒、四梵住、远离淫欲、满足于己妻、精进、布萨戒支、圣道、教法。显示巴利原文
Brahmacariyaṃ pakāsetīti ettha panāyaṃ brahmacariya-saddo dāne veyyāvacce pañcasikkhāpadasīle appamaññāsu methunaviratiyaṃ sadārasantose vīriye uposathaṅgesu ariyamagge sāsaneti imesvatthesu dissati.
获得了神通、光辉、力量与精进的再生;
这就是你的大宫殿,龙王!
我与妻子,曾于人世间……
我们二人,以信心而为施主;
那时,我的家宛如一口随时可取用的井。
这就是我的誓愿,这就是我的梵行,
这善行所感得的果报,
即是成就神通、光辉、力与精进,
明智者啊,还有我的这座大宫殿。
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Kiṃ te vataṃ kiṃ pana brahmacariyaṃ, Kissa suciṇṇassa ayaṃ vipāko; Iddhī jutī balavīriyūpapatti, Idañca te nāga, mahāvimānaṃ. Ahañca bhariyā ca manussaloke, Saddhā ubho dānapatī ahumhā; Opānabhūtaṃ me gharaṃ tadāsi, Santappitā samaṇabrāhmaṇā ca. Taṃ me vataṃ taṃ pana brahmacariyaṃ, Tassa suciṇṇassa ayaṃ vipāko; Iddhī jutī balavīriyūpapatti, Idañca me dhīra mahāvimāna’’nti. (jā. 2.17.1595);
在这部《富那迦本生》中,布施即被称为梵行。显示巴利原文
Imasmiñhi puṇṇakajātake dānaṃ brahmacariyanti vuttaṃ.
正是那手能赐予所欲,正是那手能流出甘蜜;
正是由于我这梵行,福德才得以在手中成就。
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Kena pāṇi kāmadado, kena pāṇi madhussavo; Kena te brahmacariyena, puññaṃ pāṇimhi ijjhati. Tena pāṇi kāmadado, tena pāṇi madhussavo; Tena me brahmacariyena, puññaṃ pāṇimhi ijjhatī’’ti. (pe. va. 275,277);
在《嫩芽饿鬼事》中,“服侍”被称为梵行。在《帝帝利亚本生》中:“比丘们,就这样,那称为帝帝利亚的梵行确实曾存在过。”(《小品》311)这里将“五学处戒”称为梵行。在《大典尊经》中:“五髻啊,然而我那种梵行,不是为了厌离,不是为了离贪,不是为了灭尽……终归只是为了投生到梵天界而已。”(《长部》第2册329)这里将“四梵住”称为梵行。在《端正经》中:“别人将成为非梵行者,而我们在这里要成为梵行者。”(《中部》第1册83)这里将“离淫欲”称为梵行。显示巴利原文
Imasmiṃ aṅkurapetavatthumhi veyyāvaccaṃ brahmacariyanti vuttaṃ. ‘‘Evaṃ, kho taṃ bhikkhave, tittiriyaṃ nāma brahmacariyaṃ ahosī’’ti (cūḷava. 311) imasmiṃ tittirajātake pañcasikkhāpadasīlaṃ brahmacariyanti vuttaṃ. ‘‘Taṃ kho pana me, pañcasikha, brahmacariyaṃ neva nibbidāya na virāgāya na nirodhāya…pe… yāvadeva brahmalokūpapattiyā’’ti (dī. ni. 2.329) imasmiṃ mahāgovindasutte catasso appamaññāyo brahmacariyanti vuttā. ‘‘Pare abrahmacārī bhavissanti, mayamettha brahmacārī bhavissāmā’’ti (ma. ni. 1.83) imasmiṃ sallekhasutte methunavirati brahmacariyanti vuttā.
妻子们也不逾越对我们的忠诚;
除了她们之外,我们行持梵行。
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Mayañca bhariyā nātikkamāma, Amhe ca bhariyā nātikkamanti; Aññatra tāhi brahmacariyaṃ carāma, Tasmā hi amhaṃ daharā na mīyare’’ti. (jā. 1.4.97);
在《大法护本生》中,“满足于己妻”被称为梵行;在《毛发竖立经》中则说:“舍利弗,我确实忆念我曾修习四支具足的梵行,我那时实为苦行者。”(《中部》第1册第155节)此处将“精进”称为梵行。显示巴利原文
Mahādhammapālajātake sadārasantoso brahmacariyanti vutto. ‘‘Abhijānāmi kho panāhaṃ, sāriputta, caturaṅgasamannāgataṃ brahmacariyaṃ caritā, tapassī sudaṃ homī’’ti (ma. ni. 1.155) lomahaṃsanasutte vīriyaṃ brahmacariyanti vuttaṃ.
以低劣的梵行,投生于刹帝利族;
以中等的梵行,获得天身;以殊胜的梵行,则得清净。
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Hīnena brahmacariyena, khattiye upapajjati; Majjhimena ca devattaṃ, uttamena visujjhatī’’ti. (jā. 1.8.75);
如此,在《尼弥本生》中,为调御自身而受持的八支布萨,称为梵行。“五髻!我的这个梵行,确实是为了彻底的厌离、离贪、灭尽……乃至……这就是圣八支道”(《长部·大典尊经》2.329),在《大典尊经》中,圣道被称为梵行。“这个梵行成就、繁荣、广布、众人所知、广大,乃至为天人与人所善宣说”(《长部·和合经》3.174),在《和合经》中,涵盖三学的整个教法被称为梵行。此处所指,正是此梵行。因此说“阐明梵行”,即开示“初善……乃至……清净”之法。当他如此开示时,便阐明了涵盖三学的整个教法的梵行,应作此理解。“梵行”:以最殊胜义,即如梵那样的行持;或谓,是成就梵行者(如佛陀等)的行持。显示巴利原文
Evaṃ nimijātake attadamanavasena kato aṭṭhaṅgiko uposatho brahmacariyanti vutto. ‘‘Idaṃ kho pana me, pañcasikha, brahmacariyaṃ ekantanibbidāya virāgāya nirodhāya…pe… ayameva ariyo aṭṭhaṅgiko maggo’’ti (dī. ni. 2.329) mahāgovindasuttasmiṃyeva ariyamaggo brahmacariyanti vutto. ‘‘Tayidaṃ brahmacariyaṃ iddhañceva phītañca vitthārikaṃ bāhujaññaṃ puthubhūtaṃ yāva devamanussehi suppakāsita’’nti (dī. ni. 3.174) pāsādikasutte sikkhattayasaṅgahitaṃ sakalasāsanaṃ brahmacariyanti vuttaṃ. Imasmimpi ṭhāne idameva brahmacariyanti adhippetaṃ. Tasmā brahmacariyaṃ pakāsetīti so dhammaṃ deseti ādikalyāṇaṃ…pe… parisuddhaṃ. Evaṃ desento ca sikkhattayasaṅgahitaṃ sakalasāsanaṃ brahmacariyaṃ pakāsetīti evamettha attho daṭṭhabbo. Brahmacariyanti seṭṭhaṭṭhena brahmabhūtaṃ cariyaṃ. Brahmabhūtānaṃ vā buddhādīnaṃ cariyanti vuttaṃ hoti.
191 “他闻法”:指他听闻具有上述成就的法。“或居士”:为何首先提到居士?因其已摧破我慢,且人数众多。通常,从刹帝利家族出家者,依仗出身而生慢;从婆罗门家族出家者,依仗咒术而生慢;从卑贱家族出家者,也因各自出身而不能安立我慢。然而,居士之子们,腋下汗流,背结盐霜,亲身耕作田地,由于没有那样的慢,故已摧破我慢与骄慢。他们出家后,不造我慢或骄慢,尽力学习全部佛语,修习观业处,能证得阿罗汉果。再者,从其他家族出离出家者并不多,居士才是人数众多者。因此,由于已摧破我慢且人数众多,故首先指出“居士”。显示巴利原文
191.Taṃ dhammanti taṃ vuttappakārasampadaṃ dhammaṃ. Suṇāti gahapati vāti kasmā paṭhamaṃ gahapatiṃ niddisati? Nihatamānattā, ussannattā ca. Yebhuyyena hi khattiyakulato pabbajitā jātiṃ nissāya mānaṃ karonti. Brāhmaṇakulā pabbajitā mante nissāya mānaṃ karonti. Hīnajaccakulā pabbajitā attano attano vijātitāya patiṭṭhātuṃ na sakkonti. Gahapatidārakā pana kacchehi sedaṃ muñcantehi piṭṭhiyā loṇaṃ pupphamānāya bhūmiṃ kasitvā tādisassa mānassa abhāvato nihatamānadappā honti. Te pabbajitvā mānaṃ vā dappaṃ vā akatvā yathābalaṃ sakalabuddhavacanaṃ uggahetvā vipassanāya kammaṃ karontā sakkonti arahatte patiṭṭhātuṃ. Itarehi ca kulehi nikkhamitvā pabbajitā nāma na bahukā, gahapatikāva bahukā. Iti nihatamānattā ussannattā ca paṭhamaṃ gahapatiṃ niddisatīti.
“或于其他某一种”:指其他家族中的某一类。“再生”:意为出生。“他对如来生起信心”:他听闻清净法后,于法主如来生信:“彼世尊实为正自觉者。”“他这样反思”:即他这样观察。“居家是拥挤的”:纵使夫妇二人同住六十肘的房屋,或彼此住处相隔百由旬,因存在障碍之义,居家仍是拥挤的。“是尘路”:依《大注释》所说,此为贪尘等生起之处。亦有说是来路。因无粘着,如同“露天”,故说“是露天”。出家者虽住尖顶屋、宝殿乃至天宫等门窗紧闭的隐蔽处,毕竟不粘着、不执取、不受束缚,故说“出家是露天”。复次,居家为拥挤,乃因无有行善的空间;尘路,有如不设防的垃圾场,是诸漏与烦恼尘的聚集之处;出家为露天,乃因行善有开阔的空间。显示巴利原文
Aññatarasmiṃ vāti itaresaṃ vā kulānaṃ aññatarasmiṃ. Paccājātoti patijāto. Tathāgate saddhaṃ paṭilabhatīti parisuddhaṃ dhammaṃ sutvā dhammassāmimhi tathāgate – ‘‘sammāsambuddho vata so bhagavā’’ti saddhaṃ paṭilabhati. Iti paṭisañcikkhatīti evaṃ paccavekkhati. Sambādho gharāvāsoti sacepi saṭṭhihatthe ghare yojanasatantarepi vā dve jāyampatikā vasanti, tathāpi nesaṃ sakiñcanasapalibodhaṭṭhena gharāvāso sambādhoyeva. Rajopathoti rāgarajādīnaṃ uṭṭhānaṭṭhānanti mahāaṭṭhakathāyaṃ vuttaṃ. Āgamanapathotipi vadanti. Alagganaṭṭhena abbhokāso viyāti abbhokāso. Pabbajito hi kūṭāgāraratanapāsādadevavimānādīsu pihitadvāravātapānesu paṭicchannesu vasantopi neva laggati, na sajjati, na bajjhati. Tena vuttaṃ – ‘‘abbhokāso pabbajjā’’ti. Api ca sambādho gharāvāso kusalakiriyāya okāsābhāvato. Rajopatho asaṃvutasaṅkāraṭṭhānaṃ viya rajānaṃ kilesarajānaṃ sannipātaṭṭhānato. Abbhokāso pabbajjā kusalakiriyāya yathāsukhaṃ okāsasabbhāvato.
“此非易事……我应出家”:此处略说如下:此三学所摄之梵行,须日日不破戒地持守,直至临终最后一念,故为绝对圆满;须日日不为烦恼垢染而行持,直至临终最后一念,故为绝对清净。应如磨光的螺贝、洗净的螺贝那般行持。而在家人身处俗家环境,欲如此绝对圆满……乃至……绝对清净地行持,并非易事。那么,我何不剃除须发,披上黄褐色袈裟,从家出离,走向无家的出家生活?于此,农耕、经商等利益家庭之业称为“家业”;出家则无此,故当知出家即是“非家业”,即无家的状态。“我应出家”:即我应修此出家之道。显示巴利原文
Nayidaṃsukaraṃ…pe… pabbajeyyanti etthāyaṃ saṅkhepakathā, yadetaṃ sikkhattayabrahmacariyaṃ ekampi divasaṃ akhaṇḍaṃ katvā carimakacittaṃ pāpetabbatāya ekantaparipuṇṇaṃ, caritabbaṃ ekadivasampi ca kilesamalena amalīnaṃ katvā carimakacittaṃ pāpetabbatāya ekantaparisuddhaṃ . Saṅkhalikhitanti likhitasaṅkhasadisaṃ dhotasaṅkhasappaṭibhāgaṃ caritabbaṃ. Idaṃ na sukaraṃ agāraṃ ajjhāvasatā agāramajjhe vasantena ekantaparipuṇṇaṃ…pe… carituṃ, yaṃnūnāhaṃ kese ca massuñca ohāretvā kasāyarasapītatāya kāsāyāni brahmacariyaṃ carantānaṃ anucchavikāni vatthāni acchādetvā paridahitvā agārasmā nikkhamitvā anagāriyaṃ pabbajeyyanti. Ettha ca yasmā agārassa hitaṃ kasivāṇijjādikammaṃ agāriyanti vuccati, tañca pabbajjāya natthi, tasmā pabbajjā anagāriyanti ñātabbā, taṃ anagāriyaṃ. Pabbajeyyanti paṭipajjeyyaṃ.
192-193 “少”:数量在一千以下的财富积聚称为少,从一千起则称为多。“亲族圈”:由于具有系缚的意义,亲族即称为亲族圈。二十人以下也称为少,从二十人起则称为多。“巴帝摩卡律仪防护者”:即具足巴帝摩卡律仪。“仪行与行处具足者”:即于仪行和行处皆具足。“于微小罪”:即于微细的过失。“于诸过失”:即于诸不善法。“见怖畏者”:即见怖畏者。“正受持”:即正确地受持之后。“于诸学处学”:即于诸学处,逐条正确地受持而学。以上是此处的略说,广说见于《清净道论》。显示巴利原文
192-193.Appaṃ vāti sahassato heṭṭhā bhogakkhandho appo nāma hoti, sahassato paṭṭhāya mahā. Ābandhanaṭṭhena ñātiyeva ñātiparivaṭṭo. Sopi vīsatiyā heṭṭhā appo nāma hoti, vīsatiyā paṭṭhāya mahā. Pātimokkhasaṃvarasaṃvutoti pātimokkhasaṃvarena samannāgato. Ācāragocarasampannoti ācārena ceva gocarena ca sampanno. Aṇumattesūti appamattakesu. Vajjesūti akusaladhammesu. Bhayadassāvīti bhayadassī. Samādāyāti sammā ādiyitvā. Sikkhati sikkhāpadesūti sikkhāpadesu taṃ taṃ sikkhāpadaṃ samādiyitvā sikkhati. Ayamettha saṅkhepo, vitthāro pana visuddhimagge vutto.
“具足善的身业、语业,清净活命”:于此,虽由仪行与行处所摄,已包含善的身业、语业,然此名为“活命清净戒”之法,非于虚空或树顶等处生起,而唯于身门、语门中生起。故为显示其生起之门,说“具足善的身业、语业”;又因具足彼,故为“清净活命”者。或者,此亦依《沙门文荼迦经》(《中部·2·260》)而说。于彼经中云:“工匠!何等为善戒?我说:善的身业、善的语业,及清净的活命,这些皆是戒。”由具足彼故,当知为“清净活命”者。显示巴利原文
Kāyakammavacīkammena samannāgato kusalena parisuddhājīvoti ettha ācāragocaraggahaṇeneva ca kusale kāyakammavacīkamme gahitepi yasmā idaṃ ājīvapārisuddhisīlaṃ nāma na ākāse vā rukkhaggādīsu vā uppajjati, kāyavacīdvāresuyeva pana uppajjati; tasmā tassa uppattidvāradassanatthaṃ kāyakammavacīkammena samannāgato kusalenāti vuttaṃ. Yasmā pana tena samannāgato, tasmā parisuddhājīvo. Samaṇamuṇḍikaputtasuttantavasena (ma. ni. 2.260) vā evaṃ vuttaṃ. Tattha hi ‘‘katame ca, thapati, kusalā sīlā? Kusalaṃ kāyakammaṃ, kusalaṃ vacīkammaṃ, parisuddhaṃ ājīvampi kho ahaṃ thapati sīlasmiṃ vadāmī’’ti vuttaṃ. Yasmā pana tena samannāgato, tasmā parisuddhājīvoti veditabbo.
“戒具足者”:指具足《梵网经》中所说的三种戒。“防护根门者”:指在包括意根的六根上,已经防护好根门的人。“具足念与正知者”:指于前进、返回等七种状况中,具足念与正知的人。“知足者”:指对于衣服、饮食、住处、医药这四种资具,以三种知足而知足的人。显示巴利原文
Sīlasampannoti brahmajāle vuttena tividhena sīlena samannāgato hoti. Indriyesu guttadvāroti manacchaṭṭhesu indriyesu pihitadvāro hoti. Satisampajaññena samannāgatoti abhikkante paṭikkantetiādīsu sattasu ṭhānesu satiyā ceva sampajaññena ca samannāgato hoti. Santuṭṭhoti catūsu paccayesu tividhena santosena santuṭṭho hoti.
小戒释义显示巴利原文
Cūḷasīlavaṇṇanā
194-211 如此,在列出纲要后,再按次第分别解说时,世尊说道:“大王!比丘如何是戒具足者呢?”等等。其中,“此是他的戒”意思是:对于这位比丘,远离杀生属于他戒行中的一种戒。或者,此处的处格表示依主释(属格)的意义。因为在《大注》中,这句话就被解释为“这就是那位沙门的戒”。其余的内容,则应依照《梵网经》中所说的方式来理解。“此是他的戒”意思是:这就是他所持守的戒。显示巴利原文
194-211. Evaṃ mātikaṃ nikkhipitvā anupubbena bhājento ‘‘kathañca, mahārāja, bhikkhu sīlasampanno hotī’’tiādimāha. Tattha idampissa hoti sīlasminti idampi assa bhikkhuno pāṇātipātā veramaṇi sīlasmiṃ ekaṃ sīlaṃ hotīti attho. Paccattavacanatthe vā etaṃ bhummaṃ. Mahāaṭṭhakathāyañhi idampi tassa samaṇassa sīlanti ayameva attho vutto. Sesaṃ brahmajāle vuttanayeneva veditabbaṃ. Idamassa hoti sīlasminti idaṃ assa sīlaṃ hotīti attho.
212 “不见任何来自某处的怖畏,即:由于戒的防护”:在那些源自不防护的怖畏中,凡是可能由戒防护而生的怖畏,他从任何单一的防护中都见不到那种怖畏。为什么呢?因为在有防护时,源自不防护的怖畏便不存在了。“如同已灌顶者……”:就像一位依照仪轨正式举行了刹帝利灌顶仪式、头顶已灌过圣水的人。“即:来自敌人的怖畏”:他不见到可能来自任何敌人的怖畏。为什么呢?因为他已经挫败了一切敌人。“内在”:指自身相续内在,也就是在自己的身心相续之中。“无过失之乐”:他感受着那无可指责、无可非议的善妙之乐,此乐以戒为基础,由无追悔、欢喜、喜、轻安等一系列善法所扶持的身心之乐。“大王!比丘如此即是戒具足者”:如此,具足了这样详尽开显的三种戒,这位比丘便堪称“戒具足者”。关于戒的论述到此结束。显示巴利原文
212.Na kutoci bhayaṃ samanupassati, yadidaṃ sīlasaṃvaratoti yāni asaṃvaramūlakāni bhayāni uppajjanti, tesu yaṃ idaṃ bhayaṃ sīlasaṃvarato bhaveyya, taṃ kutoci ekasaṃvaratopi na samanupassati. Kasmā? Saṃvarato asaṃvaramūlakassa bhayassa abhāvā. Muddhābhisittoti yathāvidhānavihitena khattiyābhisekena muddhani avasitto. Yadidaṃ paccatthikatoti yaṃ kutoci ekapaccatthikatopi bhayaṃ bhaveyya, taṃ na samanupassati. Kasmā? Yasmā nihatapaccāmitto. Ajjhattanti niyakajjhattaṃ, attano santāneti attho. Anavajjasukhanti anavajjaṃ aninditaṃ kusalaṃ sīlapadaṭṭhānehi avippaṭisārapāmojjapītipassaddhidhammehi pariggahitaṃ kāyikacetasikasukhaṃ paṭisaṃvedeti. Evaṃ kho, mahārāja, bhikkhu sīlasampanno hotīti evaṃ nirantaraṃ vitthāretvā dassitena tividhena sīlena samannāgato bhikkhu sīlasampanno nāma hotīti sīlakathaṃ niṭṭhāpesi.
根律仪论显示巴利原文
Indriyasaṃvarakathā
213 在“守护根门”的分别中,说到“以眼见色”时,此中“眼”字:于某些语境指佛眼,如云:“他以佛眼观察世间”(《大品·9》);于某些语境指称为一切知智的普眼,如云:“善慧佛,登上了那由法所成的殿堂,成为普眼者”(《大品·8》);于某些语境指法眼,如云:“那远离尘垢、远离烦恼的法眼生起了”(《大品·16》,此处即指三种圣道的智慧),而“眼生起了,智生起了”(《大品·15》)此中则指宿命通等智慧,名为慧眼;于“以天眼”等所现之处,即指天眼;于“缘于眼及色”中,即指感官的净色眼。然在此处,此“眼”字是假借净色眼之名而转指眼识,故其意为:以眼识别见色之后。其余未释之义,《清净道论》中已尽解说。「不杂染之乐」:因远离烦恼的杂染,此增上心所生之乐纯而不杂、清净无染,他正体验此乐。显示巴利原文
213. Indriyesu guttadvārabhājanīye cakkhunā rūpanti ayaṃ cakkhusaddo katthaci buddhacakkhumhi vattati, yathāha – ‘‘buddhacakkhunā lokaṃ volokesī’’ti (mahāva. 9). Katthaci sabbaññutaññāṇasaṅkhāte samantacakkhumhi, yathāha – ‘‘tathūpamaṃ dhammamayaṃ, sumedha, pāsādamāruyha samantacakkhū’’ti (mahāva. 8). Katthaci dhammacakkhumhi ‘‘virajaṃ vītamalaṃ dhammacakkhuṃ udapādī’’ti (mahāva. 16) hi ettha ariyamaggattayapaññā. ‘‘Cakkhuṃ udapādi ñāṇaṃ udapādī’’ti (mahāva. 15) ettha pubbenivāsādiñāṇaṃ paññācakkhūti vuccati. ‘‘Dibbena cakkhunā’’ti (ma. ni. 1.284) āgataṭṭhānesu dibbacakkhumhi vattati. ‘‘Cakkhuñca paṭicca rūpe cā’’ti ettha pasādacakkhumhi vattati. Idha panāyaṃ pasādacakkhuvohārena cakkhuviññāṇe vattati, tasmā cakkhuviññāṇena rūpaṃ disvāti ayametthattho. Sesapadesu yaṃ vattabbaṃ siyā, taṃ sabbaṃ visuddhimagge vuttaṃ. Abyāsekasukhanti kilesabyāsekavirahitattā abyāsekaṃ asammissaṃ parisuddhaṃ adhicittasukhaṃ paṭisaṃvedetīti.
正念正知论显示巴利原文
Satisampajaññakathā
214 在“正念正知”的分别中,说到“于前进时、返回时”:此处先说“前进”是指向前行,“返回”是指转回,这两者在行、立、坐、卧四威仪中皆具。在行走中,将身体向前移动,即称为前进;向后折返,即称为返回。在站立中,立于原地而身体前倾,亦称为前进;身体后仰,亦称为返回。在坐着中,坐着时将身体朝座前挪移,称为前进;退向后方,称为返回。在躺卧中,亦可以此道理类推。显示巴利原文
214. Satisampajaññabhājanīyamhi abhikkante paṭikkanteti ettha tāva abhikkantaṃ vuccati gamanaṃ, paṭikkantaṃ nivattanaṃ, tadubhayampi catūsu iriyāpathesu labbhati. Gamane tāva purato kāyaṃ abhiharanto abhikkamati nāma . Paṭinivattanto paṭikkamati nāma. Ṭhānepi ṭhitakova kāyaṃ purato onāmento abhikkamati nāma, pacchato apanāmento paṭikkamati nāma. Nisajjāya nisinnakova āsanassa purimaaṅgābhimukho saṃsaranto abhikkamati nāma, pacchimaaṅgapadesaṃ paccāsaṃsaranto paṭikkamati nāma. Nipajjanepi eseva nayo.
「于一切所作中具正知」:即是以正知而行一切应作之事;或可说,他本身就是正知的践行者。因为他在前进等一切动作中,确实始终保持着正知,从未离于正知。此处正知有四种:「有益正知」「适宜正知」「行处正知」「不痴正知」。其中,当欲前进的心念生起时,他不单凭心的冲动便立刻行动,而是先思惟:“我去那里究竟有否义利?”在把握了有义利与无义利之后,再择取有义利者而行,这便是「有益正知」。这里所说的“义利”,是指通过见佛塔、见菩提树、见僧众、见长老、见不净相等,使法得到增长。因为有人见佛塔或菩提树后,便以佛为所缘,或见僧后以僧为所缘,生起欢喜心,随即观察它的坏灭,可证得阿拉汉果。见长老们后,依止其教诫;见不净相后,在那里证入初禅,再同样观察它的坏灭,亦可证得阿拉汉果。所以说,见到这些是「有益」的。但也有一类人主张,即使通过财物供养所得的增长,亦可称为义利,因为以此为基础能资助梵行的修习。显示巴利原文
Sampajānakārī hotīti sampajaññena sabbakiccakārī. Sampajaññameva vā kārī. So hi abhikkantādīsu sampajaññaṃ karoteva. Na katthaci sampajaññavirahito hoti. Tattha sātthakasampajaññaṃ, sappāyasampajaññaṃ, gocarasampajaññaṃ asammohasampajaññanti catubbidhaṃ sampajaññaṃ. Tattha abhikkamanacitte uppanne cittavaseneva agantvā – ‘‘kinnu me ettha gatena attho atthi natthī’’ti atthānatthaṃ pariggahetvā atthapariggaṇhanaṃ sātthakasampajaññaṃ. Tattha ca atthoti cetiyadassanabodhisaṅghatheraasubhadassanādivasena dhammato vuḍḍhi. Cetiyaṃ vā bodhiṃ vā disvāpi hi buddhārammaṇaṃ, saṅghadassanena saṅghārammaṇaṃ, pītiṃ uppādetvā tadeva khayavayato sammasanto arahattaṃ pāpuṇāti. There disvā tesaṃ ovāde patiṭṭhāya, asubhaṃ disvā tattha paṭhamajjhānaṃ uppādetvā tadeva khayavayato sammasanto arahattaṃ pāpuṇāti. Tasmā etesaṃ dassanaṃ sātthakanti vuttaṃ. Keci pana āmisatopi vuḍḍhi atthoyeva, taṃ nissāya brahmacariyānuggahāya paṭipannattāti vadanti.
在行路之时,先审察适宜与不适宜,再把握其中适宜者,这便是「适宜正知」。具体如下:例如,瞻礼佛塔本身是有益的。然而,若遇佛塔举行大供养,四方十由旬乃至十二由旬内的大众云集,男女信众皆衣着盛装、佩戴严饰,犹如彩绘的画像般往来其间。那时,若对可意的所缘生起贪爱,对不可意的所缘生起瞋恚,或因不如理作意而生起愚痴,或触犯身体接触的罪过,乃至对清净梵行与法命造成障碍,这样的地方便是不适宜的。若无上述种种过患,便是适宜的。瞻礼菩提树也是如此。见僧众固然有益,但若在村中搭建了大讲堂,众人整夜听法,如同前述,既有大众聚集又会引生障碍,那么彼处便不适宜;若无障碍,则是适宜的。见到为大群随从所围绕的长老们,亦同此理。显示巴利原文
Tasmiṃ pana gamane sappāyāsappāyaṃ pariggahetvā sappāyapariggaṇhanaṃ sappāyasampajaññaṃ. Seyyathidaṃ – cetiyadassanaṃ tāva sātthakaṃ, sace pana cetiyassa mahāpūjāya dasadvādasayojanantare parisā sannipatanti, attano vibhavānurūpā itthiyopi purisāpi alaṅkatapaṭiyattā cittakammarūpakāni viya sañcaranti. Tatra cassa iṭṭhe ārammaṇe lobho hoti, aniṭṭhe paṭigho, asamapekkhane moho uppajjati, kāyasaṃsaggāpattiṃ vā āpajjati. Jīvitabrahmacariyānaṃ vā antarāyo hoti, evaṃ taṃ ṭhānaṃ asappāyaṃ hoti. Vuttappakāraantarāyābhāve sappāyaṃ. Bodhidassanepi eseva nayo. Saṅghadassanampi sātthaṃ. Sace pana antogāme mahāmaṇḍapaṃ kāretvā sabbarattiṃ dhammassavanaṃ karontesu manussesu vuttappakāreneva janasannipāto ceva antarāyo ca hoti, evaṃ taṃ ṭhānaṃ asappāyaṃ hoti. Antarāyābhāve sappāyaṃ. Mahāparisaparivārānaṃ therānaṃ dassanepi eseva nayo.
见不净相也是有益的。为了说明此义,有这样一个典故:据说,曾有一位年轻比丘带着沙弥去取齿木。沙弥偏离道路,向前行走时见到了不净相,由此证入初禅,并以初禅为根本,观照诸行,次第证悟了前三个果位。随后,为了更高的道果,他把握了业处,便停在那里。年轻的比丘没有看见他,高声呼唤:‘沙弥!’沙弥心中思惟:‘从我出家那天起,就未曾与比丘多说过两句闲话。日后,我还要证得更高的殊胜。’于是他回应道:‘尊者,有什么事?’比丘说:‘过来。’沙弥应了一声便走了过来,然后对比丘说:‘尊者,请您沿着这条路往前走,在我刚才站立的地方,向东边站一会儿,朝那个方向看一看。’比丘依言而行,也同样证得了与沙弥一致的殊胜。如此,一个不净相利益了两个人。虽然见不净相有此利益,但对男性而言,女性的不净相则不适宜;对女性而言,男性的不净相也不适宜。唯有同性的(不净相)才适宜。像这样去把握适宜,便称作「适宜正知」。显示巴利原文
Asubhadassanampi sātthaṃ, tadatthadīpanatthañca idaṃ vatthu – eko kira daharabhikkhu sāmaṇeraṃ gahetvā dantakaṭṭhatthāya gato. Sāmaṇero maggā okkamitvā purato gacchanto asubhaṃ disvā paṭhamajjhānaṃ nibbattetvā tadeva pādakaṃ katvā saṅkhāre sammasanto tīṇi phalāni sacchikatvā uparimaggatthāya kammaṭṭhānaṃ pariggahetvā aṭṭhāsi. Daharo taṃ apassanto sāmaṇerāti pakkosi. So ‘mayā pabbajitadivasato paṭṭhāya bhikkhunā saddhiṃ dve kathā nāma na kathitapubbā. Aññasmimpi divase upari visesaṃ nibbattessāmī’ti cintetvā kiṃ, bhanteti paṭivacanamadāsi. ‘Ehī’ti ca vutte ekavacaneneva āgantvā, ‘bhante, iminā tāva maggeneva gantvā mayā ṭhitokāse muhuttaṃ puratthābhimukho ṭhatvā olokethā’ti āha. So tathā katvā tena pattavisesameva pāpuṇi. Evaṃ ekaṃ asubhaṃ dvinnaṃ janānaṃ atthāya jātaṃ. Evaṃ sātthampi panetaṃ purisassa mātugāmāsubhaṃ asappāyaṃ, mātugāmassa ca purisāsubhaṃ asappāyaṃ, sabhāgameva sappāyanti evaṃ sappāyapariggaṇhanaṃ sappāyasampajaññaṃ nāma.
如此把握了「有益」与「适宜」之后,便应在三十八种业处中,选取契合自己心意的、名为‘行处’的业处,并受持不忘。在行乞食等行境之时,始终摄持此业处而行,这就名为「行处正知」。为了阐明它的含义,应知有如下四类人——显示巴利原文
Evaṃ pariggahitasātthakasappāyassa pana aṭṭhatiṃsāya kammaṭṭhānesu attano cittaruciyaṃ kammaṭṭhānasaṅkhātaṃ gocaraṃ uggahetvā bhikkhācāragocare taṃ gahetvāva gamanaṃ gocarasampajaññaṃ nāma. Tassāvibhāvanatthaṃ idaṃ catukkaṃ veditabbaṃ –
这里,有一类比丘“带出去而不持回”;有一类“持回而不带出去”;有一类“既不带出去也不持回”;有一类“既带出去又持回”。其中,什么是“带出去而不持回”呢?有一类比丘,白天以经行和坐禅净化自心,远离盖障;初夜时分同样如此,中夜作狮子卧,后夜又经行、坐禅而度过。清晨早起,完成佛塔广场、菩提树广场的日常义务,浇灌菩提树,备好饮用水和洗漱水,并依照《犍度》的规定,奉事轨范师、亲教师等一切应尽之务。他处理好身体之后,进入住所,在两三张禅座上依次坐暖,精勤修习业处。到了该乞食的时候,便起身,以业处为先导,持了衣钵从住所出来,心中一直系念业处,走到佛塔广场。如果他的业处是佛随念,就不放下此业处而进入佛塔广场;如果是其他的业处,则在台阶下停住,如同把手执之物暂时放下一般,搁置原来的业处,转而缘取对佛陀的欢喜心,然后登上佛塔广场。如果是大塔,便右绕三匝,在四个地方礼拜;如果是小塔,同样右绕,在八个地方礼拜。礼塔之后,来到菩提树广场,也要如同面对佛陀世尊本人一般,谦恭作礼,礼拜菩提树。他显示巴利原文
Idhekacco bhikkhu harati, na paccāharati; ekacco paccāharati, na harati; ekacco pana neva harati, na paccāharati; ekacco harati ca, paccāharati cāti. Tattha yo bhikkhu divasaṃ caṅkamena nisajjāya ca āvaraṇīyehi dhammehi cittaṃ parisodhetvā tathā rattiyā paṭhamayāme, majjhimayāme seyyaṃ kappetvā pacchimayāmepi nisajjacaṅkamehi vītināmetvā pageva cetiyaṅgaṇabodhiyaṅgaṇavattaṃ katvā bodhirukkhe udakaṃ āsiñcitvā, pānīyaṃ paribhojanīyaṃ paccupaṭṭhapetvā ācariyupajjhāyavattādīni sabbāni khandhakavattāni samādāya vattati. So sarīraparikammaṃ katvā senāsanaṃ pavisitvā dve tayo pallaṅke usumaṃ gāhāpento kammaṭṭhānaṃ anuyuñjitvā bhikkhācāravelāyaṃ uṭṭhahitvā kammaṭṭhānasīseneva pattacīvaramādāya senāsanato nikkhamitvā kammaṭṭhānaṃ manasikarontova cetiyaṅgaṇaṃ gantvā, sace buddhānussatikammaṭṭhānaṃ hoti, taṃ avissajjetvāva cetiyaṅgaṇaṃ pavisati. Aññaṃ ce kammaṭṭhānaṃ hoti, sopānamūle ṭhatvā hatthena gahitabhaṇḍaṃ viya taṃ ṭhapetvā buddhārammaṇaṃ pītiṃ gahetvā cetiyaṅgaṇaṃ āruyha, mahantaṃ cetiyaṃ ce, tikkhattuṃ padakkhiṇaṃ katvā catūsu ṭhānesu vanditabbaṃ. Khuddakaṃ cetiyaṃ ce, tatheva padakkhiṇaṃ katvā aṭṭhasu ṭhānesu vanditabbaṃ. Cetiyaṃ vanditvā bodhiyaṅgaṇaṃ pattenāpi buddhassa bhagavato sammukhā viya nipaccākāraṃ dassetvā bodhi vanditabbā. So evaṃ cetiyañca bodhiñca vanditvā paṭisāmitaṭṭhānaṃ gantvā paṭisāmitabhaṇḍakaṃ hatthena gaṇhanto viya nikkhittakammaṭṭhānaṃ gahetvā gāmasamīpe kammaṭṭhānasīseneva cīvaraṃ pārupitvā gāmaṃ piṇḍāya pavisati. Atha naṃ manussā disvā ayyo no āgatoti paccuggantvā pattaṃ gahetvā āsanasālāya vā gehe vā nisīdāpetvā yāguṃ datvā yāva bhattaṃ na niṭṭhāti, tāva pāde dhovitvā telena makkhetvā purato te nisīditvā pañhaṃ vā pucchanti, dhammaṃ vā sotukāmā honti. Sacepi na kathāpenti, janasaṅgahatthaṃ dhammakathā nāma kātabbā yevāti aṭṭhakathācariyā vadanti. Dhammakathā hi kammaṭṭhānavinimuttā nāma natthi, tasmā kammaṭṭhānasīseneva dhammakathaṃ kathetvā kammaṭṭhānasīseneva āhāraṃ paribhuñjitvā anumodanaṃ katvā nivattiyamānehipi manussehi anugatova gāmato nikkhamitvā tattha te nivattetvā maggaṃ paṭipajjati.
此时,那些先前出村、在村外用斋的沙弥和年轻比丘们看见了他,便迎上前去,接过他的衣钵。据说,古代的比丘们并不是因为认出“这位是我们的戒师、教授师”就看着面孔去服侍,而是完全按照到来的先后次第而行。他们问这位比丘:“尊者,这些人是您的什么人?是母系亲属,还是父系亲属?”他反问:“你们是看到什么才这样问呢?”“看到他们对您有那么深厚的情意与恭敬呀。”他便说道:“贤友们,这些人为我们所做的,即便是父母也难以做到。我们的衣钵都是他们供养的,依靠他们的恩惠,我们既不知怖畏中的怖畏是什么,也不知饥馑中的饥馑是什么。这样的恩人,确实再也找不到了。”他一面这样述说那些人的功德,一面离去。这就是所谓的“带出去而不持回”。显示巴利原文
Atha naṃ puretaraṃ nikkhamitvā bahigāme katabhattakiccā sāmaṇeradaharabhikkhū disvā paccuggantvā pattacīvaramassa gaṇhanti. Porāṇakabhikkhū kira amhākaṃ upajjhāyo ācariyoti na mukhaṃ oloketvā vattaṃ karonti, sampattaparicchedeneva karonti. Te taṃ pucchanti – ‘‘bhante, ete manussā tumhākaṃ kiṃ honti, mātipakkhato sambandhā pitipakkhato’’ti? Kiṃ disvā pucchathāti? Tumhesu etesaṃ pemaṃ bahumānanti. Āvuso, yaṃ mātāpitūhipi dukkaraṃ, taṃ ete amhākaṃ karonti, pattacīvarampi no etesaṃ santakameva, etesaṃ ānubhāvena neva bhaye bhayaṃ, na chātake chātakaṃ jānāma. Īdisā nāma amhākaṃ upakārino natthīti tesaṃ guṇe kathento gacchati. Ayaṃ vuccati harati na paccāharatīti.
如果有人像前面所说的那样,在日常义务与行道中修习,他体内的业生火界炽然生起,便舍弃非执受,转而执取执受;汗水从身上流下,此时业处便不能顺利地进入轨道。他于是在清晨拿了衣钵,急速礼拜塔庙,在牛群出村的时候入村乞粥。得到粥后,走到坐堂受用。这时,只要吞下两三口之后,体内的业生火界即舍弃执受,转而执取非执受。如同用百罐水沐浴过一般,火界平息了猛热,变得清凉。他以业处为先导而受用粥,然后洗钵、净面,从午前到进食之际一直作意业处;之后再到他处乞食,也总以业处为先导而受用食物。从此以后,他便能将辗转递进、持续现起的业处把握稳固而回来。这样的人,称为“持回而不带出去”。像这样的比丘,喝粥之后即着手修观,在佛陀的教法中证得阿拉汉果的人不计其数。就在斯里兰卡岛上,各个村落的坐堂中,无一处没有喝粥后证得阿拉汉果的比丘。显示巴利原文
Yassa pana pageva vuttappakāraṃ vattapaṭipattiṃ karontassa kammajatejodhātu pajjalati, anupādinnakaṃ muñcitvā upādinnakaṃ gaṇhāti, sarīrato sedā muñcanti, kammaṭṭhānaṃ vīthiṃ nārohati, so pageva pattacīvaramādāya vegasā cetiyaṃ vanditvā gorūpānaṃ nikkhamanavelāyameva gāmaṃ yāgubhikkhāya pavisitvā yāguṃ labhitvā āsanasālaṃ gantvā pivati, athassa dvattikkhattuṃ ajjhoharaṇamatteneva kammajatejodhātu upādinnakaṃ muñcitvā anupādinnakaṃ gaṇhāti, ghaṭasatena nhāto viya tejodhātu pariḷāhanibbānaṃ patvā kammaṭṭhānasīsena yāguṃ paribhuñjitvā pattañca mukhañca dhovitvā antarābhatte kammaṭṭhānaṃ manasikatvā avasesaṭṭhāne piṇḍāya caritvā kammaṭṭhānasīsena āhārañca paribhuñjitvā tato paṭṭhāya poṅkhānupoṅkhaṃ upaṭṭhahamānaṃ kammaṭṭhānaṃ gahetvā āgacchati, ayaṃ vuccati paccāharatina haratīti. Edisā ca bhikkhū yāguṃ pivitvā vipassanaṃ ārabhitvā buddhasāsane arahattappattā nāma gaṇanapathaṃ vītivattā. Sīhaḷadīpeyeva tesu tesu gāmesu āsanasālāyaṃ vā na taṃ āsanamatthi, yattha yāguṃ pivitvā arahattappattā bhikkhū natthīti.
如果另有人放逸而住,舍弃责任,破坏一切义务,被五种心的荒秽系缚着心而住,甚至连“有业处这回事”的想都不起。他入村乞食,以不适当的方式与在家人混杂交往,一起游走、一起吃喝之后,空无所有地出村。这样的人便称为“既不带去,也不持回”。显示巴利原文
Yo pana pamādavihārī hoti, nikkhittadhuro sabbavattāni bhinditvā pañcavidhacetokhīlavinibandhacitto viharanto – ‘‘kammaṭṭhānaṃ nāma atthī’’ti saññampi akatvā gāmaṃ piṇḍāya pavisitvā ananulomikena gihisaṃsaggena saṃsaṭṭho caritvā ca bhuñjitvā ca tuccho nikkhamati, ayaṃ vuccati neva harati na paccāharatīti.
而所谓“既带去,也持回”的人,应当依照“去与还”的义务规制来理解。那些善男子们为了自己的利益,在教法中出家之后,或十人、二十人、三十人、四十人、五十人,乃至百人共住一处,制定共住规约而共住:“贤友们,你们并非因为负债而出家,并非因为恐惧而出家,也并非为谋生而出家,而是为了从苦中解脱而出家。因此,行走时生起的烦恼,应当就在行走时加以克制;站立时、坐着时、躺卧时生起的烦恼,也应当就在躺卧时加以克制。”显示巴利原文
Yo panāyaṃ – ‘‘harati ca paccāharati cā’’ti vutto, so gatapaccāgatavattavaseneva veditabbo. Attakāmā hi kulaputtā sāsane pabbajitvā dasapi vīsampi tiṃsampi cattālīsampi paññāsampi satampi ekato vasantā katikavattaṃ katvā viharanti, ‘‘āvuso, tumhe na iṇaṭṭā, na bhayaṭṭā, na jīvikāpakatā pabbajitā, dukkhā muccitukāmā panettha pabbajitā, tasmā gamane uppannakilesaṃ gamaneyeva niggaṇhatha, tathā ṭhāne, nisajjāya, sayane uppannakilesaṃ sayaneva niggaṇhathā’’ti.
他们这样制定公约之后,在前往乞食时,会以半牛呼、一牛呼、半伽乌答、一伽乌答的距离为界,以那里的石块作为标记,带着“业处”的想,持续作意业处而行。如果任何人在行走中生起烦恼,就在那里降伏它。如果还不能降伏,他就停住;这时从后面来的人也会停住。后面的人心想:“这位比丘知道我心中生起的寻,这于我是不相宜的。”这样自我呵责,增长观禅,便在那里进入圣者的境地。如果仍然不能,他就坐下;这时从后面来的人也会坐下,道理相同。即使还不能进入圣者的境地,他也会镇伏那个烦恼,持续作意业处而行。他不会用与业处分离的心来抬脚;如果已经抬脚,就折返回原来的地方。正如住在廊房的摩诃普萨提婆长老那样。显示巴利原文
Te evaṃ katikavattaṃ katvā bhikkhācāraṃ gacchantā aḍḍhausabhausabhaaḍḍhagāvutagāvutantaresu pāsāṇā honti, tāya saññāya kammaṭṭhānaṃ manasikarontāva gacchanti. Sace kassaci gamane kileso uppajjati, tattheva naṃ niggaṇhāti. Tathā asakkonto tiṭṭhati, athassa pacchato āgacchantopi tiṭṭhati. So ‘‘ayaṃ bhikkhu tuyhaṃ uppannavitakkaṃ jānāti, ananucchavikaṃ te eta’’nti attānaṃ paṭicodetvā vipassanaṃ vaḍḍhetvā tattheva ariyabhūmiṃ okkamati; tathā asakkonto nisīdati. Athassa pacchato āgacchantopi nisīdatīti soyeva nayo. Ariyabhūmiṃ okkamituṃ asakkontopi taṃ kilesaṃ vikkhambhetvā kammaṭṭhānaṃ manasikarontova gacchati, na kammaṭṭhānavippayuttena cittena pādaṃ uddharati, uddharati ce, paṭinivattitvā purimapadesaṃyeva eti. Ālindakavāsī mahāphussadevatthero viya.
据说,这位长老圆满履行“去回行持”长达十九年。人们也见到了他:那些在路上耕作、播种、脱粒及从事种种劳作的人,望见长老这般往返行走,便纷纷议论说:“这位长老反复地折返而行,难道是迷路了吗?或是忘记了什么?”他对此不加理会,唯以专注业处之心修习沙门法,于二十年间证得阿拉汉果。在他证得阿拉汉果的那一日,住在他经行道尽头的天神以手指点亮明灯,侍立一旁。四大天王、帝释天以及娑婆主梵天都前来侍奉。林住者摩诃帝沙长老见到那片光明,于第二天问道:“昨夜尊者身边有光明,那是何等光明?”长老岔开话题说:“所谓光明,有灯火之光,亦有宝珠之光……”如这些等。后来被追问:“你们要隐瞒吗?”他才承认,并告知详情。又如住于黑藤圆亭的摩诃那迦长老一般。显示巴利原文
So kira ekūnavīsativassāni gatapaccāgatavattaṃ pūrento eva vihāsi, manussāpi addasaṃsu antarāmagge kasantā ca vapantā ca maddantā ca kammāni ca karontā theraṃ tathāgacchantaṃ disvā – ‘‘ayaṃ thero punappunaṃ nivattitvā gacchati, kinnu kho maggamūḷho, udāhu kiñci pamuṭṭho’’ti samullapanti. So taṃ anādiyitvā kammaṭṭhānayuttacitteneva samaṇadhammaṃ karonto vīsativassabbhantare arahattaṃ pāpuṇi, arahattappattadivase cassa caṅkamanakoṭiyaṃ adhivatthā devatā aṅgulīhi dīpaṃ ujjāletvā aṭṭhāsi. Cattāropi mahārājāno sakko ca devānamindo brahmā ca sahampati upaṭṭhānaṃ agamaṃsu. Tañca obhāsaṃ disvā vanavāsī mahātissatthero taṃ dutiyadivase pucchi – ‘‘rattibhāge āyasmato santike obhāso ahosi, kiṃ so obhāso’’ti? Thero vikkhepaṃ karonto obhāso nāma dīpobhāsopi hoti, maṇiobhāsopīti evamādimāha. Tato ‘paṭicchādetha tumhe’ti nibaddho ‘āmā’ti paṭijānitvā ārocesi. Kāḷavallimaṇḍapavāsī mahānāgatthero viya ca.
据说,他也圆满“去回行持”。最初,他心想:“我要先礼敬世尊的大精进行。”便决意七年之中只行站立与经行。此后,又用十六年圆满“去回行持”,证得阿拉汉果。他抬脚时,心与业处相应;若抬脚时心未相应,便折返回来。走到村庄附近,到了可能令人起疑“那是牛,还是出家人”的地方,他便停下,搭好上衣,从腋下取水洗钵,并含一口水在口中。何以故?“免得对前来布施或礼拜的人说‘祝你们长寿’之类的话,导致我的业处散乱。”不过,若被问到:“尊者,今日何日?”或问到时节、比丘人数、法义等问题,他便咽下水然后告知。若无人问日等问题,到了该出村的时候,他就在村口将水吐出,然后离去。显示巴利原文
Sopi kira gatapaccāgatavattaṃ pūrento – paṭhamaṃ tāva bhagavato mahāpadhānaṃ pūjessāmīti sattavassāni ṭhānacaṅkamameva adhiṭṭhāsi. Puna soḷasavassāni gatapaccāgatavattaṃ pūretvā arahattaṃ pāpuṇi. So kammaṭṭhānayutteneva cittena pādaṃ uddharanto, viyuttena uddhaṭe paṭinivattento gāmasamīpaṃ gantvā ‘‘gāvī nu pabbajito nū’’ti āsaṅkanīyapadese ṭhatvā cīvaraṃ pārupitvā kacchakantarato udakena pattaṃ dhovitvā udakagaṇḍūsaṃ karoti. Kiṃ kāraṇā? Mā me bhikkhaṃ dātuṃ vā vandituṃ vā āgate manusse ‘dīghāyukā hothā’ti vacanamattenāpi kammaṭṭhānavikkhepo ahosīti. ‘‘Ajja, bhante, katimī’’ti divasaṃ vā bhikkhugaṇanaṃ vā pañhaṃ vā pucchito pana udakaṃ gilitvā āroceti. Sace divasādīni pucchakā na honti, nikkhamanavelāya gāmadvāre niṭṭhubhitvāva yāti.
又如于迦兰巴提他寺入雨安居的五十位比丘。据说,他们在阿沙里月满月日共立公约:“未证阿拉汉果前,互不交谈。”入村乞食时,亦各含一口水而入。被问及日时等事,便按上述方式而行。那里的人们看见吐出的水,便知道:“今日来了一位,今日来了两位。”他们又想:“这些沙门究竟是只不与我们说话,还是彼此间也不交谈?若彼此也不交谈,定是起了争执。来吧,我们让他们互相和解吧。”众人来到寺院,在五十位比丘中,竟不见有两位比丘共处一处。其中一位有眼力的人便说:“诸位,争执者的住处绝非这般模样:塔院与菩提树院扫得如此洁净,扫帚摆放整齐,饮用水与洗漱用水也准备得妥妥当当。”众人便这样折返了。那些比丘在雨季三个月中皆证得阿拉汉果,于大自恣时作了清净自恣。显示巴利原文
Kalambatitthavihāre vassūpagatā paññāsabhikkhū viya ca. Te kira āsaḷhipuṇṇamāyaṃ katikavattaṃ akaṃsu – ‘‘arahattaṃ appatvā aññamaññaṃ nālapissāmā’’ti, gāmañca piṇḍāya pavisantā udakagaṇḍūsaṃ katvā pavisiṃsu. Divasādīsu pucchitesu vuttanayeneva paṭipajjiṃsu. Tattha manussā niṭṭhubhanaṃ disvā jāniṃsu – ‘‘ajjeko āgato, ajja dve’’ti. Evañca cintesuṃ – ‘‘kinnu kho ete amhehiyeva saddhiṃ na sallapanti, udāhu aññamaññampi. Sace aññamaññampi na sallapanti, addhā vivādajātā bhavissanti. Etha ne aññamaññaṃ khamāpessāmā’’ti, sabbe vihāraṃ gantvā paññāsāya bhikkhūsu dvepi bhikkhū ekokāse nāddasaṃsu. Tato yo tesu cakkhumā puriso, so āha – ‘‘na bho kalahakārakānaṃ vasanokāso īdiso hoti, susammaṭṭhaṃ cetiyaṅgaṇabodhiyaṅgaṇaṃ, sunikkhittā sammajjaniyo, sūpaṭṭhapitaṃ pānīyaṃ paribhojanīya’’nti, te tatova nivattā. Tepi bhikkhū anto temāseyeva arahattaṃ patvā mahāpavāraṇāya visuddhipavāraṇaṃ pavāresuṃ.
正如住在黑藤圆亭的摩诃那迦长老,又如那些在迦兰巴提他寺入雨安居的比丘们一样,他唯以与业处相应的心抬脚而行。走到村庄附近时,含一口水,观察各条街道:哪条街上没有酒鬼、赌徒、打闹滋事之人,也没有凶暴的象、马等,便选择那条街道而走。在那里行乞时,他不会像匆匆赶路的人那样疾行,因为并没有所谓‘疾行食后托钵头陀支’这种修法。行至地势不平之处,他便如运水车一般,稳重不动地前行。挨家挨户进入后,他审察施主是想布施还是不想布施,等待适当的时机。得到食物后,带入村内或村外,或返回寺院,在合适舒适的地方坐下,确立业所作意,对所食之物善作不净想,依车轴润滑油、涂疮药、亲子肉等譬喻来省察,并且受用具足八支的食物:‘不为嬉戏,不为骄慢,不为装饰,不为庄严……’进食之后,处理好饮水、洗钵等事务,片刻休息以消除因进食而产生的疲劳。正如午前那样,在午后、初夜、后夜,他也唯以作意业处而住。如此实践的人,便称为‘既向前带,也向后带’。显示巴利原文
Evaṃ kāḷavallimaṇḍapavāsī mahānāgatthero viya, kalambatitthavihāre vassūpagatabhikkhū viya ca kammaṭṭhānayutteneva cittena pādaṃ uddharanto gāmasamīpaṃ gantvā udakagaṇḍūsaṃ katvā vīthiyo sallakkhetvā, yattha surāsoṇḍadhuttādayo kalahakārakā caṇḍahatthiassādayo vā natthi, taṃ vīthiṃ paṭipajjati. Tattha ca piṇḍāya caramāno na turitaturito viya javena gacchati. Na hi javena piṇḍapātiyadhutaṅgaṃ nāma kiñci atthi. Visamabhūmibhāgappattaṃ pana udakasakaṭaṃ viya niccalo hutvā gacchati. Anugharaṃ paviṭṭho ca dātukāmaṃ vā adātukāmaṃ vā sallakkhetvā tadanurūpaṃ kālaṃ āgamento bhikkhaṃ paṭilabhitvā ādāya antogāme vā bahigāme vā vihārameva vā āgantvā yathā phāsuke patirūpe okāse nisīditvā kammaṭṭhānaṃ manasikaronto āhāre paṭikūlasaññaṃ upaṭṭhapetvā akkhabbhañjana – vaṇalepanaputtamaṃsūpamavasena paccavekkhanto aṭṭhaṅgasamannāgataṃ āhāraṃ āhāreti, neva davāya na madāya na maṇḍanāya na vibhūsanāya…pe… bhuttāvī ca udakakiccaṃ katvā muhuttaṃ bhattakilamathaṃ paṭippassambhetvā yathā purebhattaṃ, evaṃ pacchābhattaṃ purimayāmaṃ pacchimayāmañca kammaṭṭhānameva manasi karoti, ayaṃ vuccati harati ca paccāharati cāti.
实践这种称为‘带出带回’的来去义务者,若具备充分资粮,在青春初期便能证得阿拉汉果。若青春初期未能证得,则会在中年证得;若中年未能证得,则会在临终时证得;若临终时未能证得,便会生为天子后证得;若生为天子后也未能证得,则会在无佛出世的时代,现证辟支菩提。若无法现证辟支菩提,那么就会在诸佛面前成为‘速通达者’:如同有大智慧的婆醯·达鲁尸喇长老,具大神力的舍利弗长老,具大神通的大目犍连长老,头陀行大迦叶长老,拥有天眼的阿那律长老,持律的优波离长老,善巧说法的富楼那·满慈子长老,住于林野的离婆多长老,多闻的阿难长老,乐于乞食的罗睺罗长老一般,作为佛陀的真子。因此,在这四类人当中,那位‘既向前带,也向后带’的人,其‘行处正知’已达到究竟圆满。显示巴利原文
Idaṃ pana haraṇapaccāharaṇasaṅkhātaṃ gatapaccāgatavattaṃ pūrento yadi upanissayasampanno hoti, paṭhamavaye eva arahattaṃ pāpuṇāti. No ce paṭhamavaye pāpuṇāti, atha majjhimavaye; no ce majjhimavaye pāpuṇāti, atha maraṇasamaye; no ce maraṇasamaye pāpuṇāti, atha devaputto hutvā; no ce devaputto hutvā pāpuṇāti, anuppanne buddhe nibbatto paccekabodhiṃ sacchikaroti. No ce paccekabodhiṃ sacchikaroti, atha buddhānaṃ sammukhībhāve khippābhiñño hoti; seyyathāpi thero bāhiyo dārucīriyo mahāpañño vā, seyyathāpi thero sāriputto mahiddhiko vā, seyyathāpi thero mahāmoggallāno dhutavādo vā, seyyathāpi thero mahākassapo dibbacakkhuko vā, seyyathāpi thero anuruddho vinayadharo vā, seyyathāpi thero upāli dhammakathiko vā, seyyathāpi thero puṇṇo mantāṇiputto āraññiko vā, seyyathāpi thero revato bahussuto vā, seyyathāpi thero ānando bhikkhākāmo vā, seyyathāpi thero rāhulo buddhaputtoti. Iti imasmiṃ catukke yvāyaṃ harati ca paccāharati ca, tassa gocarasampajaññaṃ sikhāpattaṃ hoti.
在前行等一切动作中不迷乱,即是‘无痴正知’。应如此了知:在此教法中,比丘前行或返回时,不会像那些盲目的凡夫一般,在前行等动作中产生迷乱,误以为‘是自在前行,前行是由自我造作出来的’,或‘是我在前行,前行是我造作出来的’。他不会这样迷乱。当‘我前行’的心生起时,与那颗心一同生起的心生风界,在产生身表的状态下生起。正是由于这心生风界的推动与扩散作用,这个称为‘身体’的骨骸聚合体才得以向前行进。当他这样前行时,在每一次抬脚的动作中,地界和水界这两界较为微弱、分量较少,其余两界较为强猛、分量较多;在移出、移过的阶段也是如此。在脚放下时,火界和风界这两界较为微弱、分量较少,其余两界较为强猛、分量较多;在置下、踏下的阶段也是如此。这其中,抬起时生起的色法与非色法,不会到达移出的阶段;同样地,移出时生起的,不会到达移过的阶段;移过时生起的,不会到达放下的阶段;放下时生起的,不会到达置下的阶段;置下时生起的,不会到达踏下的阶段。它们就在各自生起的当下,一环接一环、一关节接一关节、一段接一段地,便在那里坏灭了。显示巴利原文
Abhikkamādīsu pana asammuyhanaṃ asammohasampajaññaṃ, taṃ evaṃ veditabbaṃ – idha bhikkhu abhikkamanto vā paṭikkamanto vā yathā andhabālaputhujjanā abhikkamādīsu – ‘‘attā abhikkamati, attanā abhikkamo nibbattito’’ti vā, ‘‘ahaṃ abhikkamāmi, mayā abhikkamo nibbattito’’ti vā sammuyhanti, tathā asammuyhanto ‘‘abhikkamāmī’’ti citte uppajjamāne teneva cittena saddhiṃ cittasamuṭṭhānā vāyodhātu viññattiṃ janayamānā uppajjati. Iti cittakiriyavāyodhātuvipphāravasena ayaṃ kāyasammato aṭṭhisaṅghāto abhikkamati. Tassevaṃ abhikkamato ekekapāduddharaṇe pathavīdhātu āpodhātūti dve dhātuyo omattā honti mandā, itarā dve adhimattā honti balavatiyo; tathā atiharaṇavītiharaṇesu. Vossajjane tejodhātu vāyodhātūti dve dhātuyo omattā honti mandā, itarā dve adhimattā balavatiyo, tathā sannikkhepanasannirujjhanesu. Tattha uddharaṇe pavattā rūpārūpadhammā atiharaṇaṃ na pāpuṇanti, tathā atiharaṇe pavattā vītiharaṇaṃ, vītiharaṇe pavattā vossajjanaṃ, vossajjane pavattā sannikkhepanaṃ, sannikkhepane pavattā sannirujjhanaṃ na pāpuṇanti. Tattha tattheva pabbaṃ pabbaṃ sandhi sandhi odhi odhi hutvā tattakapāle pakkhittatilāni viya paṭapaṭāyantā bhijjanti. Tattha ko eko abhikkamati, kassa vā ekassa abhikkamanaṃ? Paramatthato hi dhātūnaṃyeva gamanaṃ, dhātūnaṃ ṭhānaṃ, dhātūnaṃ nisajjanaṃ, dhātūnaṃ sayanaṃ. Tasmiṃ tasmiṃ koṭṭhāse saddhiṃ rūpena.
Aññaṃ uppajjate cittaṃ, aññaṃ cittaṃ nirujjhati; Avīcimanusambandho, nadīsotova vattatīti.
如此,于前行等动作中不迷乱,即名为「无痴正知」。显示巴利原文
Evaṃ abhikkamādīsu asammuyhanaṃ asammohasampajaññaṃ nāmāti.
至此,“于前行、返回时成为正知而行者”这一句的意义已得确定。显示巴利原文
Niṭṭhito abhikkante paṭikkante sampajānakārī hotīti padassa attho.
于“观看”与“观察”中,“观看”(ālokita)是指向前方看,“观察”(vilokita)是指向隅方看。此外,向下看、向上看与向后看,则分别称为“下视”(olokita)、“上视”(ullokita)和“回顾”(apalokita),但此处并未采用。依场合的适宜性,这里只选取了此二种;而借由这两种方式,实则也已经含摄了一切观看的形态。显示巴利原文
Ālokite vilokiteti ettha pana ālokitaṃ nāma purato pekkhaṇaṃ. Vilokitaṃ nāma anudisāpekkhaṇaṃ. Aññānipi heṭṭhā upari pacchato pekkhaṇavasena olokitaullokitāpalokitāni nāma honti, tāni idha na gahitāni. Sāruppavasena pana imāneva dve gahitāni, iminā vā mukhena sabbānipi tāni gahitānevāti.
其中,当“我将看”的心生起时,不随心的冲动便去观看,而是把握其意义,这便是“有益正知”。应以尊者难陀——“身证者”——为例而了知。这正如世尊所说:“比丘们,如果难陀需要向东方看,难陀便以全心作意之后向东方看:‘当我这样向东方看时,贪、忧等恶不善法将不流入。’如此,他在那种情况下便成为正知者。比丘们,如果难陀需要向西方看……乃至……向北方看……向南方看……向上方看……向下方看……向隅方观察,难陀便以全心作意之后向隅方观察:‘当我这样向隅方观察时,贪、忧等恶不善法将不流入。’如此,他在那种情况下便成为正知者。”显示巴利原文
Tattha ‘‘ālokessāmī’’ti citte uppanne cittavaseneva anoloketvā atthapariggaṇhanaṃ sātthakasampajaññaṃ, taṃ āyasmantaṃ nandaṃ kāyasakkhiṃ katvā veditabbaṃ. Vuttañhetaṃ bhagavatā – ‘‘sace, bhikkhave, nandassa puratthimā disā āloketabbā hoti, sabbaṃ cetasā samannāharitvā nando puratthimaṃ disaṃ āloketi – ‘evaṃ me puratthimaṃ disaṃ ālokayato na abhijjhādomanassā pāpakā akusalā dhammā anvāssavissantī’ti. Itiha tattha sampajāno hoti (a. ni. 8.9). Sace, bhikkhave, nandassa pacchimā disā…pe… uttarā disā…pe… dakkhiṇā disā…pe… uddhaṃ…pe… adho…pe… anudisā anuviloketabbā hoti, sabbaṃ cetasā samannāharitvā nando anudisaṃ anuviloketi – ‘evaṃ me anudisaṃ anuvilokayato na abhijjhādomanassā pāpakā akusalā dhammā anvāssavissantī’ti. Itiha tattha sampajāno hotī’’ti.
此外,于此亦应了知:正如前文所述,由见塔庙等缘而有‘有益’与‘适当’的意义;同样地,对于业处的不忘失,即是‘行境正知’。因此,在这里,以蕴、界、处为业处者,应唯依自己的业处而行;以遍等为业处者,则应以业处为首要来作观察。于此身中,并不存在所谓‘看者’或‘观察者’之我;然而,当‘我要看’的心念生起时,与彼心俱生的心生风界,便引发身表而生起。就这样,由心的活动与风界的推动,下眼睑下沉,上眼睑上抬,并没有任何人用机关把它拉开。接着,眼识执取所见而生起——如此了知,于此便称为‘不迷惑正知’。而且,于此还可通过根本遍知、外来性及暂时性来了知不迷惑正知。首先,依据根本遍知:显示巴利原文
Api ca idhāpi pubbe vuttacetiyadassanādivaseneva sātthakatā ca sappāyatā ca veditabbā, kammaṭṭhānassa pana avijahanameva gocarasampajaññaṃ. Tasmā ettha khandhadhātuāyatanakammaṭṭhānikehi attano kammaṭṭhānavaseneva, kasiṇādikammaṭṭhānikehi vā pana kammaṭṭhānasīseneva ālokanaṃ vilokanaṃ kātabbaṃ. Abbhantare attā nāma āloketā vā viloketā vā natthi, ‘ālokessāmī’ti pana citte uppajjamāne teneva cittena saddhiṃ cittasamuṭṭhānā vāyodhātu viññattiṃ janayamānā uppajjati. Iti cittakiriyavāyodhātuvipphāravasena heṭṭhimaṃ akkhidalaṃ adho sīdati, uparimaṃ uddhaṃ laṅgheti. Koci yantakena vivaranto nāma natthi. Tato cakkhuviññāṇaṃ dassanakiccaṃ sādhentaṃ uppajjatīti evaṃ pajānanaṃ panettha asammohasampajaññaṃ nāma. Api ca mūlapariññā āgantukatāva kālikabhāvavasena pettha asammohasampajaññaṃ veditabbaṃ. Mūlapariññāvasena tāva –
有分与转向,以及看与领受;
推度与确定,速行为第七。
显示巴利原文 Bhavaṅgāvajjanañceva, dassanaṃ sampaṭicchanaṃ; Santīraṇaṃ voṭṭhabbanaṃ, javanaṃ bhavati sattamaṃ.
其中,有分执行着再生有的支分功能而持续运转;在转向那有分之后,唯作意界执行转向作用;它灭去后,眼识执行看的作用;它灭去后,异熟意界执行领受作用;它灭去后,异熟意识界执行推度作用;它灭去后,唯作意识界执行确定作用;它灭去后,速行心便生起七次。在这七次速行当中,第一速行时,并不会因贪染、嗔害和迷乱而生起所谓‘这是女人,这是男人’的观看与观察。第二速行也是如此……乃至第七速行也是如此。然而,当它们犹如战场上的战士,因强弱之势而溃败倒下时,那时才会依于贪染等而生起‘这是女人,这是男人’的观看与观察。如此,在此首先依根本遍知,应了知‘不迷惑正知’。显示巴利原文
Tattha bhavaṅgaṃ upapattibhavassa aṅgakiccaṃ sādhayamānaṃ pavattati, taṃ āvaṭṭetvā kiriyamanodhātu āvajjanakiccaṃ sādhayamānā, taṃnirodhā cakkhuviññāṇaṃ dassanakiccaṃ sādhayamānaṃ, taṃnirodhā vipākamanodhātu sampaṭicchanakiccaṃ sādhayamānā, taṃnirodhā vipākamanoviññāṇadhātu santīraṇakiccaṃ sādhayamānā, taṃnirodhā kiriyamanoviññāṇadhātu voṭṭhabbanakiccaṃ sādhayamānā , taṃnirodhā sattakkhattuṃ javanaṃ javati. Tattha paṭhamajavanepi – ‘‘ayaṃ itthī, ayaṃ puriso’’ti rajjanadussanamuyhanavasena ālokitavilokitaṃ nāma na hoti. Dutiyajavanepi…pe… sattamajavanepi. Etesu pana yuddhamaṇḍale yodhesu viya heṭṭhupariyavasena bhijjitvā patitesu – ‘‘ayaṃ itthī, ayaṃ puriso’’ti rajjanādivasena ālokitavilokitaṃ hoti. Evaṃ tāvettha mūlapariññāvasena asammohasampajaññaṃ veditabbaṃ.
当色出现在眼门时,从有分心震动之后,转向等心为成就各自的作用而生起,它们灭去后,最后速行心生起。相对于先前生起的转向等心,眼门犹如它们的‘家’,而速行心则犹如一位外来的访客。正如一个进入别人家乞讨物品的访客,在屋主们都保持沉默时,他发号施令是不合适的;同样,在作为转向等心之‘家’的眼门中,当转向等心无有染着、无有嗔恚、无有迷乱时,速行心若起染着、嗔恚、迷乱,亦不适当。应当如此,以‘外来性’了知‘不迷惑正知’。显示巴利原文
Cakkhudvāre pana rūpe āpāthamāgate bhavaṅgacalanato uddhaṃ sakakiccanipphādanavasena āvajjanādīsu uppajjitvā niruddhesu avasāne javanaṃ uppajjati, taṃ pubbe uppannānaṃ āvajjanādīnaṃ gehabhūte cakkhudvāre āgantukapuriso viya hoti. Tassa yathā paragehe kiñci yācituṃ paviṭṭhassa āgantukapurisassa gehassāmikesu tuṇhīmāsinesu āṇākaraṇaṃ na yuttaṃ, evaṃ āvajjanādīnaṃ gehabhūte cakkhudvāre āvajjanādīsupi arajjantesu adussantesu amuyhantesu ca rajjanadussanamuyhanaṃ ayuttanti evaṃ āgantukabhāvavasena asammohasampajaññaṃ veditabbaṃ.
在眼门里,以确定心为终点的那些心生起后,即与相应诸法一同就在那里各自坏灭,彼此互不相见,因此是短暂、暂时的。就像在一间屋子里,所有人都死了,剩下一个即刻就要死的人,此时那个人沉迷于歌舞等欢愉,是不合适的;同样,在一个门中,当相应的转向等心都在那里灭去之后,对于剩下那个即刻将死的速行心而言,以染着、嗔恚、迷乱的方式耽著享乐,亦不适当。应当如此,以‘暂时性’了知‘不迷惑正知’。显示巴利原文
Yāni panetāni cakkhudvāre voṭṭhabbanapariyosānāni cittāni uppajjanti, tāni saddhiṃ sampayuttadhammehi tattha tattheva bhijjanti, aññamaññaṃ na passantīti, ittarāni tāvakālikāni honti. Tattha yathā ekasmiṃ ghare sabbesu mānusakesu matesu avasesassa ekassa taṅkhaṇaññeva maraṇadhammassa na yuttā naccagītādīsu abhirati nāma. Evameva ekadvāre sasampayuttesu āvajjanādīsu tattha tattheva matesu avasesassa taṅkhaṇeyeva maraṇadhammassa javanassāpi rajjanadussanamuyhanavasena abhirati nāma na yuttāti. Evaṃ tāvakālikabhāvavasena asammohasampajaññaṃ veditabbaṃ.
再者,也可从观察蕴、处、界、缘的角度来了解此(不迷惑正知)。其中,眼与色为色蕴,‘看’为识蕴,与之相应的受为受蕴,想为想蕴,触等为行蕴。如此,这五蕴和合时,看与观便显现出来。那么,其中谁单独在‘看’?谁单独在‘观’?显示巴利原文
Api ca khandhāyatanadhātupaccayapaccavekkhaṇavasena petaṃ veditabbaṃ. Ettha hi cakkhu ceva rūpā ca rūpakkhandho, dassanaṃ viññāṇakkhandho, taṃsampayuttā vedanā vedanākkhandho, saññā saññākkhandho, phassādikā saṅkhārakkhandho. Evametesaṃ pañcannaṃ khandhānaṃ samavāye ālokanavilokanaṃ paññāyati. Tattha ko eko āloketi, ko viloketi?
同样地,眼即眼处,色即色处,‘看’即意处,受等相应法即法处。如此,这四处和合时,看与观便显现出来。那么,其中谁单独在‘看’?谁单独在‘观’?显示巴利原文
Tathā cakkhu cakkhāyatanaṃ, rūpaṃ rūpāyatanaṃ, dassanaṃ manāyatanaṃ, vedanādayo sampayuttadhammā dhammāyatanaṃ. Evametesaṃ catunnaṃ āyatanānaṃ samavāye ālokanavilokanaṃ paññāyati. Tattha ko eko āloketi, ko viloketi?
同样地,眼即眼界,色即色界,‘看’即眼识界,与之相应的受等法即法界。如此,这四界和合时,看与观便显现出来。那么,其中谁单独在‘看’?谁单独在‘观’?显示巴利原文
Tathā cakkhu cakkhudhātu, rūpaṃ rūpadhātu, dassanaṃ cakkhuviññāṇadhātu, taṃsampayuttā vedanādayo dhammā dhammadhātu. Evametāsaṃ catunnaṃ dhātūnaṃ samavāye ālokanavilokanaṃ paññāyati. Tattha ko eko āloketi, ko viloketi?
同样地,眼为依止缘,色为所缘缘,转向为无间缘、等无间缘、依止缘、无有缘、离去缘,光为亲依止缘,受等为俱生缘。当这些缘和合时,便显现出看与观。这其中,谁是单独的看者?谁又是观者呢?应当通过如此观察蕴、处、界、缘,来理解此处的无痴正知。显示巴利原文
Tathā cakkhu nissayapaccayo, rūpā ārammaṇapaccayo, āvajjanaṃ anantarasamanantarūpanissayanatthivigatapaccayo , āloko upanissayapaccayo, vedanādayo sahajātapaccayo. Evametesaṃ paccayānaṃ samavāye ālokanavilokanaṃ paññāyati. Tattha ko eko āloketi, ko viloketīti? Evamettha khandhāyatanadhātupaccayapaccavekkhaṇavasenapi asammohasampajaññaṃ veditabbaṃ.
关于“弯曲与伸直”:这是指肢节的屈伸。在此,并非单凭心意便作出弯曲与伸直,而是先把握手脚屈伸的因缘,分辨何为义、何为非义,再把握住义,这便是利益正知。这其中,若有人过久地弯曲或伸直手脚,便会时时生起感受,心无法得定,所修业处退失,不能证得殊胜。反之,若能适时屈伸,那些感受便不会生起,心得一境性,业处增长,得证殊胜。应当由此了知觉知义与非义。显示巴利原文
Samiñjite pasāriteti pabbānaṃ samiñjanapasāraṇe. Tattha cittavaseneva samiñjanapasāraṇaṃ akatvā hatthapādānaṃ samiñjanapasāraṇapaccayā atthānatthaṃ pariggaṇhitvā atthapariggaṇhanaṃ sātthakasampajaññaṃ. Tattha hatthapāde aticiraṃ samiñjetvā vā pasāretvā vā ṭhitassa khaṇe khaṇe vedanā uppajjati, cittaṃ ekaggataṃ na labhati, kammaṭṭhānaṃ paripatati, visesaṃ nādhigacchati. Kāle samiñjentassa kāle pasārentassa pana tā vedanā nuppajjanti, cittaṃ ekaggaṃ hoti, kammaṭṭhānaṃ phātiṃ gacchati, visesamadhigacchatīti , evaṃ atthānatthapariggaṇhanaṃ veditabbaṃ.
不过,即使在有益的情况下,也应进一步把握适合与不适合,只选取适合的,这便是适合正知。此处的方法如下——显示巴利原文
Atthe pana satipi sappāyāsappāyaṃ pariggaṇhitvā sappāyapariggaṇhanaṃ sappāyasampajaññaṃ. Tatrāyaṃ nayo –
据说,在大塔庙的广场上,一些年轻比丘正在背诵经典,一些年轻比丘尼则在背后听法。其中一位年轻比丘伸手时,发生了身体接触,正因为这一因缘而还俗了。另一位比丘伸脚时,不小心伸进了火中,撞到骨头,脚被烧伤。又有一位把脚伸到了蚁冢上,被毒蛇咬伤。还有一位伸脚时触到了挂袈裟的竹竿,被珠宝蛇咬了。因此,应避免在这类不适当的地方伸展,要在适宜之处伸展。这便是此处的适宜正知。显示巴利原文
Mahācetiyaṅgaṇe kira daharabhikkhū sajjhāyaṃ gaṇhanti, tesaṃ piṭṭhipassesu daharabhikkhuniyo dhammaṃ suṇanti. Tatreko daharo hatthaṃ pasārento kāyasaṃsaggaṃ patvā teneva kāraṇena gihī jāto. Aparo bhikkhu pādaṃ pasārento aggimhi pasāresi, aṭṭhimāhacca pādo jhāyi. Aparo vammike pasāresi, so āsīvisena ḍaṭṭho. Aparo cīvarakuṭidaṇḍake pasāresi, taṃ maṇisappo ḍaṃsi. Tasmā evarūpe asappāye apasāretvā sappāye pasāretabbaṃ. Idamettha sappāyasampajaññaṃ.
关于行境正知,可以用大长老的故事来说明:相传,大长老坐在日间住处,与弟子们交谈时,突然弯屈了手,然后又放回原位,再缓缓弯屈。弟子们问他:“尊者,为什么您突然弯屈手,然后又放回原位,再缓缓弯屈呢?”大长老回答:“诸贤友,从我一开始着手作意业处以来,从未舍离业处而弯屈过手。可是刚才与你们交谈时,我舍离了业处弯屈了手,所以我才放回原位,再带着业处缓缓弯屈。”弟子们赞叹道:“萨度,尊者!比丘正应如此而行。”因此,于此也应了知:不舍离业处本身,即是行境正知。显示巴利原文
Gocarasampajaññaṃ pana mahātheravatthunā dīpetabbaṃ – mahāthero kira divāṭhāne nisinno antevāsikehi saddhiṃ kathayamāno sahasā hatthaṃ samiñjetvā puna yathāṭhāne ṭhapetvā saṇikaṃ samiñjesi. Taṃ antevāsikā pucchiṃsu – ‘‘kasmā, bhante, sahasā hatthaṃ samiñjitvā puna yathāṭhāne ṭhapetvā saṇikaṃ samiñjiyitthā’’ti? Yato paṭṭhāyāhaṃ, āvuso, kammaṭṭhānaṃ manasikātuṃ āraddho, na me kammaṭṭhānaṃ muñcitvā hattho samiñjitapubbo, idāni pana me tumhehi saddhiṃ kathayamānena kammaṭṭhānaṃ muñcitvā samiñjito. Tasmā puna yathāṭhāne ṭhapetvā samiñjesinti. Sādhu , bhante, bhikkhunā nāma evarūpena bhavitabbanti. Evametthāpi kammaṭṭhānāvijahanameva gocarasampajaññanti veditabbaṃ.
内在并没有一个所谓“我”在弯曲或伸展。弯曲与伸展的生起,只是如前所述的心生风界之激荡,犹如牵动丝线使机关木人的手脚活动一般。能如此了知,便是此处的不迷乱正知。显示巴利原文
Abbhantare attā nāma koci samiñjento vā pasārento vā natthi, vuttappakāracittakiriyavāyodhātuvipphārena pana suttākaḍḍhanavasena dāruyantassa hatthapādalacalanaṃ viya samiñjanapasāraṇaṃ hotīti evaṃ parijānanaṃ panettha asammohasampajaññanti veditabbaṃ.
“持僧伽帝、钵与衣”:在此,“持”是指通过穿着与披覆僧伽帝和衣,以及用钵接受乞食等而受用。其中,先就持僧伽帝和衣而言:穿着或披覆着前往乞食时,能获得食物、能抵御寒冷等,以这些方式,世尊所开示的目的本身即是“义”。依此,应知为“有义正知”。显示巴利原文
Saṅghāṭipattacīvaradhāraṇeti ettha saṅghāṭicīvarānaṃ nivāsanapārupanavasena pattassa bhikkhāpaṭiggahaṇādivasena paribhogo dhāraṇaṃ nāma. Tattha saṅghāṭicīvaradhāraṇe tāva nivāsetvā vā pārupitvā vā piṇḍāya carato āmisalābho sītassa paṭighātāyātiādinā nayena bhagavatā vuttappakāroyeva ca attho attho nāma. Tassa vasena sātthakasampajaññaṃ veditabbaṃ.
然而,对天生怕热及身体虚弱者,细薄的衣为合适;对怕冷者,粗厚且双层的衣为合适。相反的则不合适。对任何人而言,破旧的衣都不合适,因为缝补等事会对其构成障碍。同样,绢绸、天竺绸等令人贪著的衣也不合适,因为这样的衣对独住林中的比丘而言,会成为住处的障碍,乃至生命的障碍。更确切地说,凡由看相、占卜等邪命手段获得,且在使用时令不善法增长、善法衰退的衣,即不合适。相反的方为合适。依此,这里便是“适合正知”。仅在不舍弃业处的前提下,应知此为“行境正知”。显示巴利原文
Uṇhapakatikassa pana dubbalassa ca cīvaraṃ sukhumaṃ sappāyaṃ, sītālukassa ghanaṃ dupaṭṭaṃ. Viparītaṃ asappāyaṃ. Yassa kassaci jiṇṇaṃ asappāyameva, aggaḷādidānena hissa taṃ palibodhakaraṃ hoti. Tathā paṭṭuṇṇadukūlādibhedaṃ lobhanīyacīvaraṃ. Tādisañhi araññe ekakassa nivāsantarāyakaraṃ jīvitantarāyakarañcāpi hoti. Nippariyāyena pana yaṃ nimittakammādimicchājīvavasena uppannaṃ, yañcassa sevamānassa akusalā dhammā abhivaḍḍhanti, kusalā dhammā parihāyanti, taṃ asappāyaṃ. Viparītaṃ sappāyaṃ. Tassa vasenettha sappāyasampajaññaṃ. Kammaṭṭhānāvijahanavaseneva gocarasampajaññaṃ veditabbaṃ.
内在并无所谓的“我”在披衣,只是由如前所述的心所造作风界的推动,而有披衣的作用。其中,衣是无心,身体亦是无心。衣不知“我覆盖了身体”,身不知“我被衣覆盖”。仅仅是界在覆盖界的聚集,犹如以布或碎布覆盖布捆的形状一般。因此,不应因得精美的衣而生喜悦,也不应因得粗劣的衣而生忧恼。如此省察,即是“不迷乱正知”。显示巴利原文
Abbhantare attā nāma koci cīvaraṃ pārupento natthi, vuttappakārena cittakiriyavāyodhātuvipphāreneva pana cīvarapārupanaṃ hoti. Tattha cīvarampi acetanaṃ, kāyopi acetano. Cīvaraṃ na jānāti – ‘‘mayā kāyo pārupito’’ti. Kāyopi na jānāti – ‘‘ahaṃ cīvarena pārupito’’ti. Dhātuyova dhātusamūhaṃ paṭicchādenti paṭapilotikāyapotthakarūpapaṭicchādane viya. Tasmā neva sundaraṃ cīvaraṃ labhitvā somanassaṃ kātabbaṃ, na asundaraṃ labhitvā domanassaṃ.
对于蚁冢、塔庙、树木等,有人以花鬘、香、烟、布等作恭敬供养,有人以粪、尿、泥、棍棒、刀杖击打等作不恭敬的行为,然而那些蚁冢、树木等并不会因此而生起欢喜或忧恼。同样地,不应因得到精美的衣而心生欢喜,也不应因得到粗劣的衣而心生忧恼。通过这样生起的省察,在这里应知为“不迷乱正知”。显示巴利原文
Nāgavammikacetiyarukkhādīsu hi keci mālāgandhadhūmavatthādīhi sakkāraṃ karonti, keci gūthamuttakaddamadaṇḍasatthappahārādīhi asakkāraṃ. Na tehi nāgavammikarukkhādayo somanassaṃ vā domanassaṃ vā karonti. Evameva neva sundaraṃ cīvaraṃ labhitvā somanassaṃ kātabbaṃ , na asundaraṃ labhitvā domanassanti, evaṃ pavattapaṭisaṅkhānavasenettha asammohasampajaññaṃ veditabbaṃ.
在持钵时,也不应急忙取钵,而应这样思惟:“我持此钵乞食,将会得到食物。”如此,依取钵这一因缘所应得的利益,应知为“有义正知”。显示巴利原文
Pattadhāraṇepi pattaṃ sahasāva aggahetvā imaṃ gahetvā piṇḍāya caramāno bhikkhaṃ labhissāmīti, evaṃ pattaggahaṇapaccayā paṭilabhitabbaṃ atthavasena sātthakasampajaññaṃ veditabbaṃ.
然而,对于身体瘦弱的人,沉重的钵不合适;任何人的钵若有四五个凸结、难以清洗,这样的钵也不合适。洗不干净的钵也不应使用,因为光是清洗它就会成为障碍。光泽如宝石般的钵,则容易引生贪著,正如在衣的部分所说,是不合适的。如果钵是通过看相、占卜等邪命手段获得,并且使用它时会导致不善法增长、善法衰退,那么这种钵绝对不合适。与此相反的钵,才是合适的。依此,这里即有“适合正知”。并且,只要不舍离业处,即是“行境正知”。显示巴利原文
Kisadubbalasarīrassa pana garupatto asappāyo, yassa kassaci catupañcagaṇṭhikāhato dubbisodhanīyo asappāyova. Duddhotapattopi na vaṭṭati, taṃ dhovantasseva cassa palibodho hoti. Maṇivaṇṇapatto pana lobhanīyo, cīvare vuttanayeneva asappāyo, nimittakammādivasena laddho pana yañcassa sevamānassa akusalā dhammā abhivaḍḍhanti, kusalā dhammā parihāyanti, ayaṃ ekantaasappāyova. Viparīto sappāyo. Tassa vasenettha sappāyasampajaññaṃ. Kammaṭṭhānāvijahanavaseneva ca gocarasampajaññaṃ veditabbaṃ.
内在并没有一个所谓的“我”在拿钵;只是如前所述,由心所造作风界的推动,才产生了“拿钵”的行为。其中,钵无有心识,手也无有心识。钵不知道“我被手抓住了”,手也不知道“我们抓住了钵”。只是诸界在执取诸界的聚集,犹如用火钳夹取烧热的钵。通过如此生起的省察,应知这就是“不迷乱正知”。显示巴利原文
Abbhantare attā nāma koci pattaṃ gaṇhanto natthi, vuttappakārena cittakiriyavāyodhātuvipphāravaseneva pattaggahaṇaṃ nāma hoti. Tattha pattopi acetano, hatthāpi acetanā. Patto na jānāti – ‘‘ahaṃ hatthehi gahito’’ti. Hatthāpi na jānanti – ‘‘amhehi patto gahito’’ti. Dhātuyova dhātusamūhaṃ gaṇhanti, saṇḍāsena aggivaṇṇapattaggahaṇe viyāti. Evaṃ pavattapaṭisaṅkhānavasenettha asammohasampajaññaṃ veditabbaṃ.
再者,譬如有人见到那些躺在救济院中、手脚被砍断、伤口流着脓血、生满蛆虫、被绿头苍蝇围绕的无依无靠之人,有慈悲心的人便施与他们仅能遮住伤口的破布,以及用头盖骨等容器盛装的药物。这些破布,有的细软,有的粗糙;盛药的容器,有的形状好,有的形状坏。他们对此既不喜悦,也不忧虑,因为对他们来说,只要用破布盖住伤口、用头盖骨接取药物便已足够。同样地,若一位比丘视衣如覆疮的破布,视钵如药钵,视钵中所得的食物如头骨中的药,那么应知,他在持用僧伽梨、钵及衣时,便是以“不迷乱正知”而行的最上正知行者。显示巴利原文
Api ca yathā chinnahatthapāde vaṇamukhehi paggharitapubbalohitakimikule nīlamakkhikasamparikiṇṇe anāthasālāyaṃ nipanne anāthamanusse disvā, ye dayālukā purisā, te tesaṃ vaṇamattacoḷakāni ceva kapālādīhi ca bhesajjāni upanāmenti. Tattha coḷakānipi kesañci saṇhāni, kesañci thūlāni pāpuṇanti. Bhesajjakapālakānipi kesañci susaṇṭhānāni, kesañci dussaṇṭhānāni pāpuṇanti, na te tattha sumanā vā dummanā vā honti . Vaṇapaṭicchādanamatteneva hi coḷakena, bhesajjapaṭiggahaṇamatteneva ca kapālakena tesaṃ attho. Evameva yo bhikkhu vaṇacoḷakaṃ viya cīvaraṃ, bhesajjakapālakaṃ viya ca pattaṃ, kapāle bhesajjamiva ca patte laddhaṃ bhikkhaṃ sallakkheti, ayaṃ saṅghāṭipattacīvaradhāraṇe asammohasampajaññena uttamasampajānakārīti veditabbo.
在“吃等”之中:“吃”指食用团食;“饮”指饮用粥等;“嚼”指咀嚼粉饼等硬食;“尝”指品尝蜜、糖浆等。其中,“非为嬉戏”等——以此方式所说的八种目的,即是“义”。依于此义,当知此即“有义正知”。显示巴利原文
Asitādīsu asiteti piṇḍapātabhojane. Pīteti yāguādipāne. Khāyiteti piṭṭhakhajjādikhādane. Sāyiteti madhuphāṇitādisāyane. Tattha neva davāyātiādinā nayena vutto aṭṭhavidhopi attho attho nāma. Tasseva vasena sātthakasampajaññaṃ veditabbaṃ.
然而,就粗、细、苦、甜等味道而言,若某种食物令某人不适,则该食物对他即为不适合。又,凡依看相、占卜等邪命方式所得之食,以及食用时令不善法增长、善法衰退者,绝对是全然不适合的;反之,则是适合的。由此,这里即名为‘适合正知’。唯不舍弃业处,即应知为‘行境正知’。显示巴利原文
Lūkhapaṇītatittamadhurarasādīsu pana yena bhojanena yassa phāsu na hoti, taṃ tassa asappāyaṃ. Yaṃ pana nimittakammādivasena paṭiladdhaṃ, yañcassa bhuñjato akusalā dhammā abhivaḍḍhanti, kusalā dhammā parihāyanti, taṃ ekantaasappāyameva, viparītaṃ sappāyaṃ. Tassa vasenettha sappāyasampajaññaṃ. Kammaṭṭhānāvijahanavaseneva ca gocarasampajaññaṃ veditabbaṃ.
身中并无一个名为‘我’的进食者。唯由所述之心所造风界推动,而有取钵与接钵;唯由心所造风界推动,而有手入钵中;唯由心所造风界推动,而有捏团、举团、张口等动作,并非有谁用钥匙或器械撑开颌骨。唯由心所造风界推动,而有将食团放入口中,上齿为杵、下齿为臼、舌如手的运作。如是,舌尖的稀薄唾液与舌根的浓厚唾液润湿食物。此食物在下齿臼中,被如手之舌翻搅,为唾液水所润,又为如杵之上齿所碎;并未有人用汤匙或勺将它送进体内,唯是风界令其进入。进入之后,并未有人铺草席以承托,唯依风界之力而安住。安住期间,并未有人砌灶生火而煮,唯由火界令熟。成熟之后,并未有人以棍棒或竿子将其推出,唯是风界将其排出。因此,风界起推入、推出、持住、翻动、粉碎、令干、排出之用。地界起持住、翻动、粉碎、令干之用。水界起滋润与保持湿润之用。火界令进入体内的食糜完全成熟。空界为通道。识界则依于如理作意,在……显示巴利原文
Abbhantare attā nāma koci bhuñjako natthi, vuttappakāracittakiriyavāyodhātuvipphāreneva pattappaṭiggahaṇaṃ nāma hoti. Cittakiriyavāyodhātuvipphāreneva hatthassa patte otāraṇaṃ nāma hoti. Cittakiriyavāyodhātuvipphāreneva ālopakaraṇaṃ ālopauddhāraṇaṃ mukhavivaraṇañca hoti, na koci kuñcikāya yantakena vā hanukaṭṭhīni vivarati. Cittakiriyavāyodhātuvipphāreneva ālopassa mukhe ṭhapanaṃ, uparidantānaṃ musalakiccasādhanaṃ, heṭṭhimadantānaṃ udukkhalakiccasādhanaṃ, jivhāya hatthakiccasādhanañca hoti. Iti tattha aggajivhāya tanukakheḷo mūlajivhāya bahalakheḷo makkheti. Taṃ heṭṭhādantaudukkhale jivhāhatthaparivattakaṃ kheḷodakena temitaṃ uparidantamusalasañcuṇṇitaṃ koci kaṭacchunā vā dabbiyā vā antopavesento nāma natthi, vāyodhātuyāva pavisati. Paviṭṭhaṃ paviṭṭhaṃ koci palālasanthāraṃ katvā dhārento nāma natthi, vāyodhātuvaseneva tiṭṭhati. Ṭhitaṃ ṭhitaṃ koci uddhanaṃ katvā aggiṃ jāletvā pacanto nāma natthi, tejodhātuyāva paccati. Pakkaṃ pakkaṃ koci daṇḍakena vā yaṭṭhiyā vā bahi nīhārako nāma natthi, vāyodhātuyeva nīharati. Iti vāyodhātu paṭiharati ca, vītiharati ca, dhāreti ca, parivatteti ca, sañcuṇṇeti ca, visoseti ca, nīharati ca. Pathavīdhātu dhāreti ca, parivatteti ca, sañcuṇṇeti ca, visoseti ca. Āpodhātu sineheti ca, allattañca anupāleti. Tejodhātu antopaviṭṭhaṃ paripāceti. Ākāsadhātu añjaso hoti. Viññāṇadhātu tattha tattha sammāpayogamanvāya ābhujatīti. Evaṃ pavattapaṭisaṅkhānavasenettha asammohasampajaññaṃ veditabbaṃ.
再者,从行走、遍求、受用、来源、贮藏、未熟、已熟、果报、流泄、涂润这十种不净相而作观察,于此亦应知为‘不迷乱明了’。若要广说,则可从《清净道论》解说‘食厌逆想’之处求取。显示巴利原文
Api ca gamanato pariyesanato paribhogato āsayato nidhānato aparipakkato paripakkato phalato nissandato sammakkhanatoti, evaṃ dasavidhapaṭikūlabhāvapaccavekkhaṇato pettha asammohasampajaññaṃ veditabbaṃ. Vitthārakathā panettha visuddhimagge āhārapaṭikūlasaññāniddesato gahetabbā.
“大小便事”指大便与小便利的行为。此处,若应排便之时而不排便,便会全身出汗、两眼昏花,心不专注,更会引发种种疾病。而排便之人则无此诸患,这便是此处的意义。依此了知,即应知为“有益明了”。显示巴利原文
Uccārapassāvakammeti uccārassa ca passāvassa ca karaṇe. Tattha pattakāle uccārapassāvaṃ akarontassa sakalasarīrato sedā muccanti, akkhīni bhamanti, cittaṃ na ekaggaṃ hoti, aññe ca rogā uppajjanti. Karontassa pana sabbaṃ taṃ na hotīti ayamettha attho. Tassa vasena sātthakasampajaññaṃ veditabbaṃ.
若在不适当之处大小便,则犯戒,恶名增长,乃至危及生命;若在适当之处行之,则全无此诸患。这便是此处的“适宜”,依此应知为“适宜明了”。而“行境明了”,同样应理解为唯不离开所修业处。显示巴利原文
Aṭṭhāne uccārapassāvaṃ karontassa pana āpatti hoti, ayaso vaḍḍhati, jīvitantarāyo hoti, patirūpe ṭhāne karontassa sabbaṃ taṃ na hotīti idamettha sappāyaṃ tassa vasena sappāyasampajaññaṃ. Kammaṭṭhānāvijahanavaseneva ca gocarasampajaññaṃ veditabbaṃ.
并无内在的“我”在行大小便事,仅由心所造风界的推动,方有大小便的行为。譬如成熟的痈疮破裂,脓血非自愿地流出;又如盛满水的容器,水非自愿地溢出。同样,积集于直肠与膀胱中的大小便,为风势所逼,即便非自愿也会排出。然而,如此排出的粪便,既非那位比丘自身所有,亦不属他人,它只是身体的排泄物罢了。譬如有人将水罐中的陈水倒掉,那水既非他所有,也不属于别人,只是进行清理而已。通过如此审察排泄的过程,于此应当了知为“不迷乱明了”。显示巴利原文
Abbhantare attā nāma uccārapassāvakammaṃ karonto natthi, cittakiriyavāyodhātuvipphāreneva pana uccārapassāvakammaṃ hoti . Yathā vā pana pakke gaṇḍe gaṇḍabhedena pubbalohitaṃ akāmatāya nikkhamati. Yathā ca atibharitā udakabhājanā udakaṃ akāmatāya nikkhamati. Evaṃ pakkāsayamuttavatthīsu sannicitā uccārapassāvā vāyuvegasamuppīḷitā akāmatāyapi nikkhamanti. So panāyaṃ evaṃ nikkhamanto uccārapassāvo neva tassa bhikkhuno attano hoti, na parassa, kevalaṃ sarīranissandova hoti. Yathā kiṃ? Yathā udakatumbato purāṇudakaṃ chaḍḍentassa neva taṃ attano hoti, na paresaṃ; kevalaṃ paṭijagganamattameva hoti; evaṃ pavattapaṭisaṅkhānavasenettha asammohasampajaññaṃ veditabbaṃ.
所谓“行等”之中,“行”指行走;“住”指站立;“坐”指就座;“卧”指躺卧;“醒”指清醒;“说”指言说;“默然”指不语。在“比丘行走时了知‘我行走’,站立时了知‘我站立’,坐下时了知‘我坐下’,躺卧时了知‘我躺卧’”这段经文中,所明示的是长时威仪。在“前进、后退、前瞻、旁视、弯曲、伸展”这段经文中,所明示的是中等威仪。而此处所说的“行、住、坐、卧、醒”,则是指细分威仪。因此,在这所有威仪之中,也都应当依照前说的方法,保持明觉,即“明了而作”。显示巴利原文
Gatādīsu gateti gamane. Ṭhiteti ṭhāne. Nisinneti nisajjāya. Sutteti sayane. Jāgariteti jāgaraṇe. Bhāsiteti kathane. Tuṇhībhāveti akathane. ‘‘Gacchanto vā gacchāmīti pajānāti, ṭhito vā ṭhitomhīti pajānāti, nisinno vā nisinnomhīti pajānāti, sayāno vā sayānomhīti pajānātī’’ti imasmiñhi sutte addhānairiyāpathā kathitā. ‘‘Abhikkante paṭikkante ālokite vilokite samiñjite pasārite’’ti imasmiṃ majjhimā. ‘‘Gate ṭhite nisinne sutte jāgarite’’ti idha pana khuddakacuṇṇiyairiyāpathā kathitā. Tasmā tesupi vuttanayeneva sampajānakāritā veditabbā.
然而,三藏摩诃湿婆长老这样说:若有人长时间行走或经行之后,随后站立不动,并如是审察:“于经行时生起的所有名色法,恰恰在此时此处灭尽。”此人即名“于行时明了而作者”。显示巴利原文
Tipiṭakamahāsivatthero panāha – yo ciraṃ gantvā vā caṅkamitvā vā aparabhāge ṭhito iti paṭisañcikkhati – ‘‘caṅkamanakāle pavattā rūpārūpadhammā ettheva niruddhā’’ti . Ayaṃ gate sampajānakārī nāma.
若有人读诵、解答问题,或作意业处,长时间站立之后,随后坐下,并如是省察:“于站立时生起的名色法,即在此处灭尽。”此人即名“于站立时明了而作者”。显示巴利原文
Yo sajjhāyaṃ vā karonto, pañhaṃ vā vissajjento, kammaṭṭhānaṃ vā manasikaronto ciraṃ ṭhatvā aparabhāge nisinno iti paṭisañcikkhati – ‘‘ṭhitakāle pavattā rūpārūpadhammā ettheva niruddhā’’ti. Ayaṃ ṭhite sampajānakārī nāma.
若有人因读诵等事而久坐,过后起身,如此省察:‘坐时生起的名色法,即于此处灭尽。’此人名为‘于坐时具正知者’。显示巴利原文
Yo sajjhāyādikaraṇavaseneva ciraṃ nisīditvā aparabhāge uṭṭhāya iti paṭisañcikkhati – ‘‘nisinnakāle pavattā rūpārūpadhammā ettheva niruddhā’’ti. Ayaṃ nisinne sampajānakārī nāma.
若有人躺卧时,或复诵经文,或作意业处,随后入眠,过后醒来,如此省察:‘卧时生起的名色法,即于此处灭尽。’此人名为‘于眠时与寤时具正知者’。因为唯作心之不转起称为睡眠,其转起称为觉醒。显示巴利原文
Yo pana nipannako sajjhāyaṃ vā karonto kammaṭṭhānaṃ vā manasikaronto niddaṃ okkamitvā aparabhāge uṭṭhāya iti paṭisañcikkhati – ‘‘sayanakāle pavattā rūpārūpadhammā ettheva niruddhā’’ti. Ayaṃ sutte jāgarite ca sampajānakārī nāma. Kiriyamayacittānañhi appavattanaṃ soppaṃ nāma, pavattanaṃ jāgaritaṃ nāma.
然而,若有人说话时,具念正知而说:‘所谓声音,乃依唇、依齿、舌、上腭,并依心之如理功用而生起。’或长时间诵经后,或说法后,或修行业处后,或解答问题后,过后默然时,如此省察:‘语时生起的名色法,即于此处灭尽。’此人名为‘于语时具正知者’。显示巴利原文
Yo pana bhāsamāno – ‘‘ayaṃ saddo nāma oṭṭhe ca paṭicca, dante ca jivhañca tāluñca paṭicca, cittassa ca tadanurūpaṃ payogaṃ paṭicca jāyatī’’ti sato sampajānova bhāsati. Ciraṃ vā pana kālaṃ sajjhāyaṃ vā katvā, dhammaṃ vā kathetvā, kammaṭṭhānaṃ vā pavattetvā, pañhaṃ vā vissajjetvā, aparabhāge tuṇhībhūto iti paṭisañcikkhati – ‘‘bhāsitakāle uppannā rūpārūpadhammā ettheva niruddhā’’ti. Ayaṃ bhāsite sampajānakārī nāma.
若有人于沉默时,长久作意于法或业处,而后如此省察:‘在沉默时转起的色法与非色法,即于此处灭尽。’因为有所造色转起时,才称为‘说’;无所造色转起时,则称为‘沉默’。此人便称为‘于沉默时具正知者’。显示巴利原文
Yo tuṇhībhūto ciraṃ dhammaṃ vā kammaṭṭhānaṃ vā manasikatvā aparabhāge iti paṭisañcikkhati – ‘‘tuṇhībhūtakāle pavattā rūpārūpadhammā ettheva niruddhā’’ti. Upādārūpappavattiyañhi sati bhāsati nāma, asati tuṇhī bhavati nāmāti. Ayaṃ tuṇhībhāve sampajānakārī nāmāti.
而此即大西瓦长老所说的‘不痴差别’,正是《大念处经》的意趣所在。然而,在《沙门果》这里,四种正知全部可得。因此,应依所述方式了知:此处依四种正知而有‘正知行者’的状态。而‘正知行者’一词,在一切处皆应理解为与念相应之正知的意义。因为‘具足念与正知’正是对它的广释。在《分别论》中,已如此分别这些词句:‘具念正知而行前,具念正知而退后。’如此,‘大王,如是’,依与念相应之正知而行前等转起者,即称为具足念与正知,这是它的含义。显示巴利原文
Tayidaṃ mahāsivattherena vuttaṃ asammohadhuraṃ mahāsatipaṭṭhānasutte adhippetaṃ. Imasmiṃ pana sāmaññaphale sabbampi catubbidhaṃ sampajaññaṃ labbhati. Tasmā vuttanayeneva cettha catunnaṃ sampajaññānaṃ vasena sampajānakāritā veditabbā. Sampajānakārīti ca sabbapadesu satisampayuttasseva sampajaññassa vasena attho veditabbo. Satisampajaññena samannāgatoti etassa hi padassa ayaṃ vitthāro. Vibhaṅgappakaraṇe pana – ‘‘sato sampajāno abhikkamati, sato sampajāno paṭikkamatī’’ti evaṃ etāni padāni vibhattāneva. Evaṃ, kho mahārājāti evaṃ satisampayuttassa sampajaññassa vasena abhikkamādīni pavattento satisampajaññena samannāgato nāma hotīti attho.
215 大王,此处‘比丘是知足者’,这‘知足者’是指具备对随所得资具的知足。而这种知足有十二种,即:对于衣,有随得知足、随力知足、随宜知足三种;同样,对于团食等也是如此。这是它的分别说明:显示巴利原文
215.Idha, mahārāja, bhikkhu santuṭṭho hotīti ettha santuṭṭhoti itarītarapaccayasantosena samannāgato. So panesa santoso dvādasavidho hoti, seyyathidaṃ – cīvare yathālābhasantoso, yathābalasantoso, yathāsāruppasantosoti tividho. Evaṃ piṇḍapātādīsu. Tassāyaṃ pabhedavaṇṇanā –
于此,一位比丘获得袈裟,无论精致或不精致,他便以此袈裟安住,不希求余者,即使得到余者亦不取用。是名于袈裟的‘随得之知足’。若他天生体质羸弱,或为疾病衰老所困,披沉重袈裟时感疲惫,他便与志趣相投的比丘交换,以轻便袈裟安住,依然知足。是名于袈裟的‘随力之知足’。复有一种比丘,为殊胜资具获得者。他得钵、衣等殊胜资具,或一件贵重,或众多时,便作是念:‘此可奉与长老、久出家者,此与多闻者,此与病者,此与少得者。’如是施已,自取他们之旧袈裟,或于弃物堆等处拾取破布,缝为僧伽梨而披,亦仍知足。是名于袈裟的‘随宜之知足’。显示巴利原文
Idha bhikkhu cīvaraṃ labhati, sundaraṃ vā asundaraṃ vā. So teneva yāpeti, aññaṃ na pattheti, labhantopi na gaṇhati. Ayamassa cīvare yathālābhasantoso. Atha pana pakatidubbalo vā hoti, ābādhajarābhibhūto vā, garucīvaraṃ pārupanto kilamati. So sabhāgena bhikkhunā saddhiṃ taṃ parivattetvā lahukena yāpentopi santuṭṭhova hoti. Ayamassa cīvare yathābalasantoso. Aparo paṇītapaccayalābhī hoti. So pattacīvarādīnaṃ aññataraṃ mahagghapattacīvaraṃ bahūni vā pana pattacīvarāni labhitvā idaṃ therānaṃ cirapabbajitānaṃ, idaṃ bahussutānaṃ anurūpaṃ, idaṃ gilānānaṃ, idaṃ appalābhīnaṃ hotūti datvā tesaṃ purāṇacīvaraṃ vā gahetvā saṅkārakūṭādito vā nantakāni uccinitvā tehi saṅghāṭiṃ katvā dhārentopi santuṭṭhova hoti. Ayamassa cīvare yathāsāruppasantoso.
于此,一位比丘获得团食,无论粗糙或殊胜,他便以此团食安住,不希求余者,即使得到余者亦不取用。是名于团食的‘随得之知足’。若有人得团食与其体质相克,或使病情增重,食已身感不适,彼便以此团食施与志趣相投的比丘,从对方手中取合适之食而食,如法行沙门法,而亦知足。是名于团食的‘随力之知足’。复有一种比丘,得众多殊胜团食,遂如袈裟时一般,将此施与长老、久出家者、多闻者、病者、少得者,而后取用他们剩余,或再行乞食,杂而食之,依然知足。是名于团食的‘随宜之知足’。显示巴利原文
Idha pana bhikkhu piṇḍapātaṃ labhati lūkhaṃ vā paṇītaṃ vā, so teneva yāpeti, aññaṃ na pattheti, labhantopi na gaṇhati. Ayamassa piṇḍapāte yathālābhasantoso. Yo pana attano pakativiruddhaṃ vā byādhiviruddhaṃ vā piṇḍapātaṃ labhati, yenassa paribhuttena aphāsu hoti. So sabhāgassa bhikkhuno taṃ datvā tassa hatthato sappāyabhojanaṃ bhuñjitvā samaṇadhammaṃ karontopi santuṭṭhova hoti. Ayamassa piṇḍapāte yathābalasantoso. Aparo bahuṃ paṇītaṃ piṇḍapātaṃ labhati. So taṃ cīvaraṃ viya theracirapabbajitabahussutaappalābhīgilānānaṃ datvā tesaṃ vā sesakaṃ piṇḍāya vā caritvā missakāhāraṃ bhuñjantopi santuṭṭhova hoti. Ayamassa piṇḍapāte yathāsāruppasantoso.
于此,一位比丘获得坐卧具,不论悦意或不悦意,彼于彼处不生喜悦,亦不生忧恼;纵唯草敷,亦随所得而满足。是名于坐卧具的‘随得之知足’。若有人得坐卧具与其体质相克,或使病情增重,居彼处时身心不适,彼便将此施与志趣相投的比丘,而后住于对方所舍之合适坐卧具中,依然知足。是名于坐卧具的‘随力之知足’。显示巴利原文
Idha pana bhikkhu senāsanaṃ labhati, manāpaṃ vā amanāpaṃ vā, so tena neva somanassaṃ, na domanassaṃ uppādeti; antamaso tiṇasanthārakenapi yathāladdheneva tussati. Ayamassa senāsane yathālābhasantoso. Yo pana attano pakativiruddhaṃ vā byādhiviruddhaṃ vā senāsanaṃ labhati, yatthassa vasato aphāsu hoti, so taṃ sabhāgassa bhikkhuno datvā tassa santake sappāyasenāsane vasantopi santuṭṭhova hoti. Ayamassa senāsane yathābalasantoso.
另有一种大福德比丘,得到许多优良的坐卧具,如山洞、凉亭、尖顶殿堂等。他如同对待袈裟那样,将它们施与长老、久出家者、多闻者、少得者及病者,然后自己在任何地方居住,随遇而安,亦能知足。这称为他对于坐卧具的‘随宜之知足’。又有一位比丘这样思惟:‘所谓最上等的坐卧具,乃是放逸之处。坐在那里,容易陷于惛沉睡眠;被睡眠征服后,醒来之际,欲念便会显现。’即使获得那样的坐卧具,他也不接受。他拒绝之后,在露天、树下等处居住,依然知足。这同样是他对于坐卧具的‘随宜之知足’。显示巴利原文
Aparo mahāpuñño leṇamaṇḍapakūṭāgārādīni bahūni paṇītasenāsanāni labhati. So tāni cīvaraṃ viya theracirapabbajitabahussutaappalābhīgilānānaṃ datvā yattha katthaci vasantopi santuṭṭhova hoti. Ayamassa senāsane yathāsāruppasantoso. Yopi – ‘‘uttamasenāsanaṃ nāma pamādaṭṭhānaṃ, tattha nisinnassa thinamiddhaṃ okkamati, niddābhibhūtassa puna paṭibujjhato kāmavitakkā pātubhavantī’’ti paṭisañcikkhitvā tādisaṃ senāsanaṃ pattampi na sampaṭicchati. So taṃ paṭikkhipitvā abbhokāsarukkhamūlādīsu vasantopi santuṭṭhova hoti. Ayampissa senāsane yathāsāruppasantoso.
在此,比丘获得医药,或粗或精,他于所得即生满足,不希求其他,纵有可得亦不取用。这称为他对于病缘的‘随得之知足’。然而,若有需油者却得到了糖浆,他便将糖浆施与志趣相投的比丘,再从对方手中取油,或以其他方式寻得油脂而制药,也依然是知足的。这称为他对于病缘的‘随力之知足’。显示巴利原文
Idha pana bhikkhu bhesajjaṃ labhati, lūkhaṃ vā paṇītaṃ vā, so yaṃ labhati, teneva tussati, aññaṃ na pattheti, labhantopi na gaṇhati. Ayamassa gilānapaccaye yathālābhasantoso. Yo pana telena atthiko phāṇitaṃ labhati. So taṃ sabhāgassa bhikkhuno datvā tassa hatthato telaṃ gahetvā aññadeva vā pariyesitvā bhesajjaṃ karontopi santuṭṭhova hoti. Ayamassa gilānapaccaye yathābalasantoso.
又有一位大福德者,获得许多油、蜂蜜、糖浆等殊胜药物。他如同对待袈裟那样,将它们施与长老、久出家者、多闻者、少得者及患病者,然后依靠他们所带回的任何药物维持生计,亦能知足。然而,若有人将一个容器盛放牛尿诃子,另一容器盛放四种甘美之药,并对他说:‘尊者,请随意取用您所喜者!’若他的病用此二者皆可治愈,此时他会思惟:‘牛尿诃子为佛陀等圣者所赞叹。’于是舍弃四种甘美之药,唯以牛尿诃子制成药剂,成为最上等的知足者。这称为他对于病缘的‘随宜之知足’。显示巴利原文
Aparo mahāpuñño bahuṃ telamadhuphāṇitādipaṇītabhesajjaṃ labhati. So taṃ cīvaraṃ viya theracirapabbajitabahussutaappalābhīgilānānaṃ datvā tesaṃ ābhatena yena kenaci yāpentopi santuṭṭhova hoti. Yo pana ekasmiṃ bhājane muttaharīṭakaṃ ṭhapetvā ekasmiṃ catumadhuraṃ – ‘‘gaṇhāhi, bhante, yadicchasī’’ti vuccamāno sacassa tesu aññatarenapi rogo vūpasammati, atha muttaharīṭakaṃ nāma buddhādīhi vaṇṇitanti catumadhuraṃ paṭikkhipitvā muttaharīṭakeneva bhesajjaṃ karonto paramasantuṭṭhova hoti. Ayamassa gilānapaccaye yathāsāruppasantoso.
而以这十二种方式成就种种资具知足的比丘,便有八种资具是合宜的。即:三衣、钵、裁齿木用小刀、针一枚、腰带、滤水囊。对此,也有这样的说法:显示巴利原文
Iminā pana dvādasavidhena itarītarapaccayasantosena samannāgatassa bhikkhuno aṭṭha parikkhārā vaṭṭanti. Tīṇi cīvarāni, patto, dantakaṭṭhacchedanavāsi, ekā sūci, kāyabandhanaṃ parissāvananti. Vuttampi cetaṃ –
"三衣与钵,小刀针及带,"
"连同滤水囊,此八物,乃精进修行比丘所有。"
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Ticīvarañca patto ca, vāsi sūci ca bandhanaṃ; Parissāvanena aṭṭhete, yuttayogassa bhikkhuno’’ti.
这些物品皆为护身之物,也是护腹之物。怎么说呢?以三衣为例:穿着下衣、披着上衣行走时,它保护身体、滋养身体,故为护身之物。用衣角滤水饮用,以及取用水果等可食物时,它保护腹部、滋养腹部,故为护腹之物。显示巴利原文
Te sabbe kāyaparihārikāpi honti kucchiparihārikāpi. Kathaṃ? Ticīvaraṃ tāva nivāsetvā ca pārupitvā ca vicaraṇakāle kāyaṃ pariharati, posetīti kāyaparihārikaṃ hoti. Cīvarakaṇṇena udakaṃ parissāvetvā pivanakāle khāditabbaphalāphalagahaṇakāle ca kucchiṃ pariharati; posetīti kucchiparihārikaṃ hoti.
钵也是如此:用它取水沐浴、涂抹住所地面等时,是护身之物。用它盛取食物进食时,是护腹之物。显示巴利原文
Pattopi tena udakaṃ uddharitvā nhānakāle kuṭiparibhaṇḍakaraṇakāle ca kāyaparihāriko hoti. Āhāraṃ gahetvā bhuñjanakāle kucchiparihāriko.
小刀也是如此:砍取齿木时,以及制作床椅的脚柱、衣架、小屋木柱等时,它是护身之物;砍断甘蔗、剖开椰子等外壳时,它是护腹之物。显示巴利原文
Vāsipi tāya dantakaṭṭhacchedanakāle mañcapīṭhānaṃ aṅgapādacīvarakuṭidaṇḍakasajjanakāle ca kāyaparihārikā hoti. Ucchuchedananāḷikerāditacchanakāle kucchiparihārikā.
针也同样:缝制袈裟时,为护身之物;扎取糕饼或果实而食时,为护腹之物。显示巴利原文
Sūcipi cīvarasibbanakāle kāyaparihārikā hoti. Pūvaṃ vā phalaṃ vā vijjhitvā khādanakāle kucchiparihārikā.
腰带也同样:系于腰间行走时,为护身之物;捆扎甘蔗等物携取时,为护腹之物。显示巴利原文
Kāyabandhanaṃ bandhitvā vicaraṇakāle kāyaparihārikaṃ. Ucchuādīni bandhitvā gahaṇakāle kucchiparihārikaṃ.
滤水器亦然:以之滤水而沐浴、清理住处周围时,为护身之物;以之滤取饮用水,或以之取芝麻、米、谷芽等而食时,为护腹之物。此便是八资具者所持资具的限量。对于九资具者,进入卧处时,开许有铺地布或钥匙。十资具者,开许有坐具或皮片。十一资具者,开许有手杖或油筒。十二资具者,开许有伞或凉鞋。其中,唯独八资具者可称知足;然而,却不可说其余人为不知足、多欲、负担重之人。因为他们同样是少欲、知足、易于护持、生活轻便的。然而,世尊并非为那些人宣说此经,而是专为八资具者所说。他将小刀与针放入滤水器,置于钵中,把钵挂在肩上,将三衣系于身上,便随心所欲、轻松地离去。他无需返回取任何物件。如此,为了显示这位比丘的生活极为轻便,世尊才说:‘他满足于护身之衣……’等等。此处,‘护身的’意指仅仅足以保护身体;‘护腹的’意指仅仅足以保护腹部。‘即持而去’是指他将全部仅有的八资具,悉数系在身上便离去。他不会生起‘这是我的寺院、这是我的区域、这是我的侍者’之类系缚或牵挂。他犹如离弦之箭,又显示巴利原文
Parissāvanaṃ tena udakaṃ parissāvetvā nhānakāle, senāsanaparibhaṇḍakaraṇakāle ca kāyaparihārikaṃ. Pānīyaṃ parissāvanakāle, teneva tilataṇḍulaputhukādīni gahetvā khādanakāle ca kucchiparihāriyaṃ. Ayaṃ tāva aṭṭhaparikkhārikassa parikkhāramattā. Navaparikkhārikassa pana seyyaṃ pavisantassa tatraṭṭhakaṃ paccattharaṇaṃ vā kuñcikā vā vaṭṭati. Dasaparikkhārikassa nisīdanaṃ vā cammakhaṇḍaṃ vā vaṭṭati. Ekādasaparikkhārikassa pana kattarayaṭṭhi vā telanāḷikā vā vaṭṭati. Dvādasaparikkhārikassa chattaṃ vā upāhanaṃ vā vaṭṭati. Etesu ca aṭṭhaparikkhārikova santuṭṭho, itare asantuṭṭhā mahicchā mahābhārāti na vattabbā. Etepi hi appicchāva santuṭṭhāva subharāva sallahukavuttinova. Bhagavā pana na yimaṃ suttaṃ tesaṃ vasena kathesi, aṭṭhaparikkhārikassa vasena kathesi. So hi khuddakavāsiñca sūciñca parissāvane pakkhipitvā pattassa anto ṭhapetvā pattaṃ aṃsakūṭe laggetvā ticīvaraṃ kāyapaṭibaddhaṃ katvā yenicchakaṃ sukhaṃ pakkamati. Paṭinivattetvā gahetabbaṃ nāmassa na hoti. Iti imassa bhikkhuno sallahukavuttitaṃ dassento bhagavā – ‘‘santuṭṭho hoti kāyaparihārikena cīvarenā’’tiādimāha. Tattha kāyaparihārikenāti kāyapariharaṇamattakena. Kucchiparihārikenāti kucchipariharaṇamattakena. Samādāyeva pakkamatīti aṭṭhaparikkhāramattakaṃ sabbaṃ gahetvāva kāyapaṭibaddhaṃ katvāva gacchati. ‘‘Mama vihāro pariveṇaṃ upaṭṭhāko’’ti āsaṅgo vā bandho vā na hoti. So jiyā mutto saro viya, yūthā apakkanto madahatthī viya ca icchiticchitaṃ senāsanaṃ vanasaṇḍaṃ rukkhamūlaṃ vanapabbhāraṃ paribhuñjanto ekova tiṭṭhati, ekova nisīdati. Sabbiriyāpathesu ekova adutiyo.
行向四方,无所滞碍,
于一切所得皆能知足,
忍受诸危难,心无所畏,
应如犀牛角者,独自游行。
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Cātuddiso appaṭigho ca hoti, Santussamāno itarītarena; Parissayānaṃ sahitā achambhī, Eko care khaggavisāṇakappo’’ti. (su. ni. 42);
他便达到了如上所述的‘犀牛角者’之状态。显示巴利原文
Evaṃ vaṇṇitaṃ khaggavisāṇakappataṃ āpajjati.
现在,为以譬喻说明此义,便说“犹如……”等。此处,“有翼的鸟”(pakkhī sakuṇo)即长有翅膀的鸟。“飞”(ḍeti)即飞向空中。这里的要义是:鸟知道某处有树结了成熟的果实,便从各处飞来,以爪、翅膀、喙等啄击、摇动果实而食。它们没有“这是今天的份,那是明天的份”这样的想法。待到果实食尽,它们既不会为树设下守护,也不会在树上留下羽毛、爪或喙。而是对这棵树毫无挂念,随心所欲,各自振翅飞往想去的地方。同样地,这位比丘无所执著,无有牵挂,想去哪里就去哪里。因此说“即持而去”(samādāyeva pakkamati),意为带着自己的物品便径直离去。显示巴利原文
Idāni tamatthaṃ upamāya sādhento – ‘‘seyyathāpī’’tiādimāha. Tattha pakkhī sakuṇoti pakkhayutto sakuṇo. Ḍetīti uppatati. Ayaṃ panettha saṅkhepattho – sakuṇā nāma ‘‘asukasmiṃ padese rukkho paripakkaphalo’’ti ñatvā nānādisāhi āgantvā nakhapattatuṇḍādīhi tassa phalāni vijjhantā vidhunantā khādanti. ‘Idaṃ ajjatanāya, idaṃ svātanāya bhavissatī’ti tesaṃ na hoti. Phale pana khīṇe neva rukkhassa ārakkhaṃ ṭhapenti, na tattha pattaṃ vā nakhaṃ vā tuṇḍaṃ vā ṭhapenti. Atha kho tasmiṃ rukkhe anapekkho hutvā, yo yaṃ disābhāgaṃ icchati, so tena sapattabhārova uppatitvā gacchati. Evameva ayaṃ bhikkhu nissaṅgo nirapekkho yena kāmaṃ pakkamati. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘samādāyeva pakkamatī’’ti.
论盖的断除显示巴利原文
Nīvaraṇappahānakathā
216 以“他以这些……”等语,是要说明什么呢?说明住于阿兰若的资具具足。若缺乏这四种资具,他的阿兰若住便不能成就。他便不得不与畜生或林中游荡者交谈、相处。住于阿兰若的天神们会发出恐怖的声音,说道:“像这样的恶比丘,住阿兰若有何用?”并用手拍打自己的头,作出想要逃走的样子。恶名便会传开:“某比丘入森林后,做了如此这般的恶行。”然而,若具备这四种资具,他的阿兰若住便能成就。他反观自己的戒行,不睹任何黑点或污痕,便生起喜悦。他再观察这喜悦也终将消散、坏灭,便证入圣者的境界。住于阿兰若的天神心生欢喜,对他称扬赞叹。他的声望犹如滴入水中的油滴一般,向四周扩散开来。显示巴利原文
216.Soiminā cātiādinā kiṃ dasseti? Araññavāsassa paccayasampattiṃ dasseti. Yassa hi ime cattāro paccayā natthi, tassa araññavāso na ijjhati. Tiracchānagatehi vā vanacarakehi vā saddhiṃ vattabbataṃ āpajjati. Araññe adhivatthā devatā – ‘‘kiṃ evarūpassa pāpabhikkhuno araññavāsenā’’ti bheravasaddaṃ sāventi, hatthehi sīsaṃ paharitvā palāyanākāraṃ karonti. ‘‘Asuko bhikkhu araññaṃ pavisitvā idañcidañca pāpakammaṃ akāsī’’ti ayaso pattharati. Yassa panete cattāro paccayā atthi, tassa araññavāso ijjhati. So hi attano sīlaṃ paccavekkhanto kiñci kāḷakaṃ vā tilakaṃ vā apassanto pītiṃ uppādetvā taṃ khayavayato sammasanto ariyabhūmiṃ okkamati. Araññe adhivatthā devatā attamanā vaṇṇaṃ bhaṇanti. Itissa udake pakkhittatelabindu viya yaso vitthāriko hoti.
在这里,“远离”(vivitta)是指空寂、少声、无喧闹。正是基于此义,《分别论》中说:“‘远离’:即使坐卧具在近处,只要那里不被在家众与出家众所充满,即可称为远离。”而“坐卧具”(senāsana)一词,源于在其上躺卧(seti)与坐(āsati),故为床、椅等的同义词。因此接着说:“‘坐卧具’:床是坐卧具,椅也是,褥也是,枕也是,精舍也是,半覆屋也是,殿堂也是,楼阁也是,台榭也是,石窟也是,依处也是,堂也是,茅舍也是,竹林丛也是,树下也是,帐幕也是坐卧具;乃至比丘们返回、停留的任何地方,这一切都叫作坐卧具。”显示巴利原文
Tattha vivittanti suññaṃ, appasaddaṃ, appanigghosanti attho. Etadeva hi sandhāya vibhaṅge – ‘‘vivittanti santike cepi senāsanaṃ hoti, tañca anākiṇṇaṃ gahaṭṭhehi pabbajitehi. Tena taṃ vivitta’’nti vuttaṃ. Seti ceva āsati ca etthāti senāsanaṃ mañcapīṭhādīnametaṃ adhivacanaṃ. Tenāha – ‘‘senāsananti mañcopi senāsanaṃ , pīṭhampi, bhisipi, bimbohanampi, vihāropi, aḍḍhayogopi, pāsādopi, hammiyampi, guhāpi, aṭṭopi, māḷopi leṇampi, veḷugumbopi, rukkhamūlampi, maṇḍapopi, senāsanaṃ, yattha vā pana bhikkhū paṭikkamanti, sabbametaṃ senāsana’’nti (vibha. 527).
再者,“精舍、半覆屋、殿堂、楼阁、石窟”这些,称为「住处的坐卧具」;“床、坐椅、床垫、枕头”这些,称为「床椅的坐卧具」;“毛毯、皮革片、草席、叶席”这些,称为「铺设物的坐卧具」;“或是比丘们返回的任何地方”,这称为「场所的坐卧具」。如是,坐卧具有此四种,这一切都统摄于“坐卧具”一名之中。显示巴利原文
Api ca – ‘‘vihāro aḍḍhayogo pāsādo hammiyaṃ guhā’’ti idaṃ vihārasenāsanaṃ nāma. ‘‘Mañco pīṭhaṃ bhisi bimbohana’’nti idaṃ mañcapīṭhasenāsanaṃ nāma. ‘‘Cimilikā cammakhaṇḍo tiṇasanthāro paṇṇasanthāro’’ti idaṃ santhatasenāsanaṃ nāma. ‘‘Yattha vā pana bhikkhū paṭikkamantī’’ti idaṃ okāsasenāsanaṃ nāmāti. Evaṃ catubbidhaṃ senāsanaṃ hoti, taṃ sabbaṃ senāsanaggahaṇena saṅgahitameva.
此处,为开示适合那如鸟一般、不执一方的比丘的坐卧具,世尊说“阿兰若、树下”等。其中,“阿兰若”:指走出村落、越过界桩之外的所有区域。这是随顺比丘尼的住处而说。而《分别》中所言“最后者,即五百弓距离的阿兰若住处”,方合于此比丘。其相状已于《清净道论》的“头陀支解说”中说明。
“树下”:指任何树荫浓密、幽静之处。
“山”:指岩地。在那里,于池边处理完用水诸事,坐在清凉树荫下,放眼四方,凉风吹拂时,内心便得专一。
“峡谷”:所谓“kaṃ”即水。指被水切割穿凿的山间地带,也称河湾或河曲。那里有银板般的沙地,头顶有密林如同宝石华盖,流淌着如宝石柱般清澈的水。进入这样的峡谷,饮水令身清凉,堆起沙堆,铺开粪扫衣,坐下修习沙门法时,心便得专一。
“岩窟”:指两山之间,或就在一座山中,有若隧道般的大洞穴。其相状于《清净道论》中被指为带有冢墓的样貌。
“林丛”:指越过村界后,人不耕作、不播种、众所不赴之处。因显示巴利原文
Idha panassa sakuṇasadisassa cātuddisassa bhikkhuno anucchavikasenāsanaṃ dassento araññaṃ rukkhamūlantiādimāha. Tattha araññanti nikkhamitvā bahi indakhīlā sabbametaṃ araññanti. Idaṃ bhikkhunīnaṃ vasena āgataṃ. ‘‘Āraññakaṃ nāma senāsanaṃ pañcadhanusatikaṃ pacchima’’nti (pārā. 654) idaṃ pana imassa bhikkhuno anurūpaṃ. Tassa lakkhaṇaṃ visuddhimagge dhutaṅganiddese vuttaṃ. Rukkhamūlanti yaṃ kiñci sandacchāyaṃ vivittarukkhamūlaṃ. Pabbatanti selaṃ. Tattha hi udakasoṇḍīsu udakakiccaṃ katvā sītāya rukkhacchāyāya nisinnassa nānādisāsu khāyamānāsu sītena vātena bījiyamānassa cittaṃ ekaggaṃ hoti. Kandaranti kaṃ vuccati udakaṃ, tena dāritaṃ, udakena bhinnaṃ pabbatapadesaṃ. Yaṃ nadītumbantipi, nadīkuñjantipi vadanti. Tattha hi rajatapaṭṭasadisā vālikā hoti, matthake maṇivitānaṃ viya vanagahaṇaṃ, maṇikhandhasadisaṃ udakaṃ sandati. Evarūpaṃ kandaraṃ oruyha pānīyaṃ pivitvā gattāni sītāni katvā vālikaṃ ussāpetvā paṃsukūlacīvaraṃ paññapetvā nisinnassa samaṇadhammaṃ karoto cittaṃ ekaggaṃ hoti. Giriguhanti dvinnaṃ pabbatānaṃ antare, ekasmiṃyeva vā umaggasadisaṃ mahāvivaraṃ susānalakkhaṇaṃ visuddhimagge vuttaṃ. Vanapatthanti gāmantaṃ atikkamitvā manussānaṃ anupacāraṭṭhānaṃ, yattha na kasanti na vapanti, tenevāha – ‘‘vanapatthanti dūrānametaṃ senāsanānaṃ adhivacana’’ntiādi. Abbhokāsanti acchannaṃ. Ākaṅkhamāno panettha cīvarakuṭiṃ katvā vasati. Palālapuñjanti palālarāsi. Mahāpalālapuñjato hi palālaṃ nikkaḍḍhitvā pabbhāraleṇasadise ālaye karonti, gacchagumbhādīnampi upari palālaṃ pakkhipitvā heṭṭhā nisinnā samaṇadhammaṃ karonti. Taṃ sandhāyetaṃ vuttaṃ.
“午后”:即食后。“乞食而归”:指从寻求团食之处返回。“结跏趺座”:是将双腿周匝交叠盘结的坐法。“结跏趺”:即盘结。“端正其身”:指将上半身竖直,令十八节脊椎骨节节相扣、笔直相接。如此而坐时,皮、肉、筋、腱便不向前弯屈;若它们弯屈,那种因弯屈而时时生起的苦受便不生起。当这些苦受不生起时,心即得专一,所修业处便不退失,而能增长、发展、增广。“安立念于面前”:指将念安立于业处之前,或安立于口鼻附近。因此《分别》中说:“此念已安立、善安立,于鼻端或口相,故说‘面前安立念’。”另有异解:“pari”为摄持之义,“mukha”为导引之义,“sati”为安立之义,由此而为“parimukhaṃ sati”。当依《无碍解道》所说理解此中义趣。此处略而言之,即“能作摄持导引之念”。显示巴利原文
Pacchābhattanti bhattassa pacchato. Piṇḍapātapaṭikkantoti piṇḍapātapariyesanato paṭikkanto. Pallaṅkanti samantato ūrubaddhāsanaṃ. Ābhujitvāti bandhitvā. Ujuṃ kāyaṃ paṇidhāyāti uparimaṃ sarīraṃ ujuṃ ṭhapetvā aṭṭhārasa piṭṭhikaṇṭakaṭṭhike koṭiyā koṭiṃ paṭipādetvā. Evañhi nisinnassa cammamaṃsanhārūni na paṇamanti. Athassa yā tesaṃ paṇamanapaccayā khaṇe khaṇe vedanā uppajjeyyuṃ, tā nuppajjanti. Tāsu anuppajjamānāsu cittaṃ ekaggaṃ hoti, kammaṭṭhānaṃ na paripatati, vuḍḍhiṃ phātiṃ vepullaṃ upagacchati. Parimukhaṃ satiṃ upaṭṭhapetvāti kammaṭṭhānābhimukhaṃ satiṃ ṭhapayitvā. Mukhasamīpe vā katvāti attho. Teneva vibhaṅge vuttaṃ – ‘‘ayaṃ sati upaṭṭhitā hoti sūpaṭṭhitā nāsikagge vā mukhanimitte vā, tena vuccati parimukhaṃ satiṃ upaṭṭhapetvā’’ti (vibha. 537). Athavā parīti pariggahaṭṭho. Mukhanti niyyānaṭṭho. Satīti upaṭṭhānaṭṭho. Tena vuccati – ‘‘parimukhaṃ sati’’nti. Evaṃ paṭisambhidāyaṃ vuttanayenapettha attho daṭṭhabbo. Tatrāyaṃ saṅkhepo – ‘‘pariggahitaniyyānasatiṃ katvā’’ti.
217 “于世断贪染”:此中,“世”以坏灭、崩坏之义,指五取蕴。故此句义为:于五取蕴,舍断染着,镇伏爱欲。“已离贪染”:以镇伏而断除故,说为“已离贪染”,此非如眼识本来即无贪染之义。“令心由贪染净化”:即令心从贪染中解脱出来;既令解脱,又于解脱后不再执取。于“舍离嗔恨之害”等句,理亦同此。“嗔恨”:令心染污失性,如醪醴等失其本味,是为嗔恨。“害”:因心之变异而恼怒,或行恼怒、伤害、毁坏他人,是为害。此二皆为忿怒异名。“昏沉”:为心之病。“睡眠”:为心所法之病。昏沉与睡眠合称“昏眠”。“具光明想”:纵至夜分,亦如日间所见,于光明能认知之想,无有障碍,极为清净。“具念与正知”:即具足念与智慧。此二乃为助成光明想而说。“掉举与追悔”合在一起,称为“掉悔”。“已度疑”:指已超越、越过疑惑而安住。“不踌躇”:即不再起“此为何?彼为何?”之念。显示巴利原文
217.Abhijjhaṃ loketi ettha lujjanapalujjanaṭṭhena pañcupādānakkhandhā loko, tasmā pañcasu upādānakkhandhesu rāgaṃ pahāya kāmacchandaṃ vikkhambhetvāti ayametthattho. Vigatābhijjhenāti vikkhambhanavasena pahīnattā vigatābhijjhena, na cakkhuviññāṇasadisenāti attho. Abhijjhāya cittaṃ parisodhetīti abhijjhāto cittaṃ parimoceti. Yathā taṃ sā muñcati ceva, muñcitvā ca na puna gaṇhati, evaṃ karotīti attho. Byāpādapadosaṃ pahāyātiādīsupi eseva nayo. Byāpajjati iminā cittaṃ pūtikummāsādayo viya purimapakatiṃ vijahatīti byāpādo. Vikārāpattiyā padussati, paraṃ vā padūseti vināsetīti padoso. Ubhayametaṃ kodhassevādhivacanaṃ . Thinaṃ cittagelaññaṃ. Middhaṃ cetasikagelaññaṃ, thinañca middhañca thinamiddhaṃ. Ālokasaññīti rattimpi divādiṭṭhālokasañjānanasamatthāya vigatanīvaraṇāya parisuddhāya saññāya samannāgato. Sato sampajānoti satiyā ca ñāṇena ca samannāgato. Idaṃ ubhayaṃ ālokasaññāya upakārattā vuttaṃ. Uddhaccañca kukkuccañca uddhaccakukkuccaṃ. Tiṇṇavicikicchoti vicikicchaṃ taritvā atikkamitvā ṭhito. ‘‘Kathamidaṃ kathamida’’nti evaṃ nappavattatīti akathaṃkathī. Kusalesu dhammesūti anavajjesu dhammesu. ‘‘Ime nu kho kusalā kathamime kusalā’’ti evaṃ na vicikicchati. Na kaṅkhatīti attho. Ayamettha saṅkhepo. Imesu pana nīvaraṇesu vacanatthalakkhaṇādibhedato yaṃ vattabbaṃ siyā, taṃ sabbaṃ visuddhimagge vuttaṃ.
218 其中所说的“大王,正如一个欠债的人”这一譬喻中,“借债”是指借取有息的钱财。“令债终了”指彻底了结债务,乃至不剩一枚铜板,完全还清的意思。“以此为因”即指无债之因。因为他心想“我已无债”,便会生起殊胜的欢喜,获得喜悦。所以经中说“他会得到欢喜,获得喜悦”。显示巴利原文
218. Yā panāyaṃ seyyathāpi mahārājāti upamā vuttā. Tattha iṇaṃ ādāyāti vaḍḍhiyā dhanaṃ gahetvā. Byantiṃ kareyyāti vigatantaṃ kareyya , yathā tesaṃ kākaṇikamattopi pariyanto nāma nāvasissati, evaṃ kareyya; sabbaso paṭiniyyāteyyāti attho. Tato nidānanti āṇaṇyanidānaṃ. So hi ‘‘aṇaṇomhī’’ti āvajjanto balavapāmojjaṃ labhati, somanassaṃ adhigacchati, tena vuttaṃ – ‘‘labhetha pāmojjaṃ, adhigaccheyya somanassa’’nti.
219 “疾病”:因产生不适的受,犹如以锯割断四威仪一般侵害身体,故称疾病。具此病者即是“病者”,他为该病所生的苦痛所折磨。“重病”即极其严重的病。“不喜”:因被重病所困而对食物不生喜爱。“仅些许体力”:指仅有极少体力,身体几乎无气力。“以此为因”指健康之因。当他心想“我健康了”时,那两种欢喜与喜悦便生起。所以经中说“他会得到欢喜,获得喜悦”。显示巴利原文
219. Visabhāgavedanuppattiyā kakaceneva catuiriyāpathaṃ chindanto ābādhatīti ābādho, svāssa atthīti ābādhiko. Taṃ samuṭṭhānena dukkhena dukkhito. Adhimattagilānoti bāḷhagilāno. Nacchādeyyāti adhimattabyādhiparetatāya na rucceyya. Balamattāti balameva, balañcassa kāye na bhaveyyāti attho. Tatonidānanti ārogyanidānaṃ. Tassa hi – ‘‘arogomhī’’ti āvajjayato tadubhayaṃ hoti. Tena vuttaṃ – ‘‘labhetha pāmojjaṃ, adhigaccheyya somanassa’’nti.
220 “且他没有任何财产的损失”:意思是连一枚铜板的财产损失也不会有。“以此为因”指从牢狱解脱之因。其余各处,皆应依照前述方法类推配释。显示巴利原文
220.Na cassa kiñci bhogānaṃ vayoti kākaṇikamattampi bhogānaṃ vayo na bhaveyya. Tatonidānanti bandhanāmokkhanidānaṃ. Sesaṃ vuttanayeneva sabbapadesu yojetabbaṃ.
221-222 不自在:于己无自主权,不能随己意作任何事。属他:受他人支配,唯依他人意乐而行。不能随欲而行:虽对某处心生向往,有前往之欲,却无法成行。奴隶状态:即奴隶的身份。自由人:即属于自己所有之人。以此为因:指获得自由之因。旷野长途道路:即旷野中的长途道路,指无水的漫长旅途。以此为因:指到达安稳目的地之因。显示巴利原文
221-222.Anattādhīnoti na attani adhīno, attano ruciyā kiñci kātuṃ na labhati. Parādhīnoti paresu adhīno parasseva ruciyā vattati. Na yena kāmaṃ gamoti yena disābhāgenassa gantukāmatā hoti, icchā uppajjati gamanāya, tena gantuṃ na labhati. Dāsabyāti dāsabhāvā. Bhujissoti attano santako. Tatonidānanti bhujissanidānaṃ. Kantāraddhānamagganti kantāraṃ addhānamaggaṃ, nirudakaṃ dīghamagganti attho. Tatonidānanti khemantabhūminidānaṃ.
223 世尊于“这些五盖未断”句中,乃将未断的欲贪盖视同债务,其余诸盖视同疾病等,而为开示。这里面的相似性为:犹如有人借取他人之财挥霍一空,债主们向其讨债、辱骂、捆缚、杀害时,他全然无力反抗,一切唯有忍受——其忍受之根源即在于那笔债。同样,若有人对某事物生起欲贪,以与渴爱相应的方式执取,当因此遭到辱骂、捆缚、杀害时,也会忍受一切,因为其忍耐之源即是那份欲贪,正如那些为家主所杀的女人一般。是故,欲贪应视为如债务。显示巴利原文
223.Ime pañca nīvaraṇe appahīneti ettha bhagavā appahīnakāmacchandanīvaraṇaṃ iṇasadisaṃ, sesāni rogādisadisāni katvā dasseti. Tatrāyaṃ sadisatā. Yo hi paresaṃ iṇaṃ gahetvā vināseti, so tehi iṇaṃ dehīti vuccamānopi pharusaṃ vuccamānopi bajjhamānopi vadhīyamānopi kiñci paṭibāhituṃ na sakkoti, sabbaṃ titikkhati. Titikkhākāraṇaṃ hissa taṃ iṇaṃ hoti. Evameva yo yamhi kāmacchandena rajjati, taṇhāsahagatena taṃ vatthuṃ gaṇhati, so tena pharusaṃ vuccamānopi bajjhamānopi vadhīyamānopi sabbaṃ titikkhati, titikkhākāraṇaṃ hissa so kāmacchando hoti, gharasāmikehi vadhīyamānānaṃ itthīnaṃ viyāti, evaṃ iṇaṃ viya kāmacchando daṭṭhabbo.
又如患胆病者,即使给以蜜、糖等物,由于胆病之故,亦尝不出其美味,唯吐出而喊:“苦啊,苦啊。”同样,心怀嗔恚者,即使利益己身的亲教师、轨范师略加教导,亦不接受,反出言道:“你们太打扰我了”等,随即舍戒离去。犹如胆病患者因病不尝蜜糖等味,此嗔恚者亦因忿怒之病,不尝禅定乐等法味。因此,嗔恚应视为如同疾病。显示巴利原文
Yathā pana pittarogāturo madhusakkarādīsupi dinnesu pittarogāturatāya tesaṃ rasaṃ na vindati, ‘‘tittakaṃ tittaka’’nti uggiratiyeva. Evameva byāpannacitto hitakāmehi ācariyupajjhāyehi appamattakampi ovadiyamāno ovādaṃ na gaṇhati. ‘‘Ati viya me tumhe upaddavethā’’tiādīni vatvā vibbhamati. Pittarogāturatāya so puriso madhusakkarādīnaṃ viya kodhāturatāya jhānasukhādibhedaṃ sāsanarasaṃ na vindatīti. Evaṃ rogo viya byāpādo daṭṭhabbo.
如同在庆贺星宿佳节之日,一个被关在牢狱里的人,看不见星宿庆典的开端、中间与终结。第二天他获释之后,纵然听到他人赞叹:‘啊,昨日的星宿节真是怡悦!’‘啊,那舞蹈!’‘啊,那歌唱!’他也不会应声。是什么缘故?因为他未曾亲身领受此星宿节。同样地,一个被昏沉睡眠所制伏的比丘,即使正有一场义理丰富、善巧展现的法谈在进行,他既不知其始,亦不知其中,也不见其终。待到法谈结束,听闻他人称赞:‘啊,这场法谈!’‘啊,那法义!’‘啊,那譬喻!’他也仍然默然不应。是什么缘故?因为昏沉睡眠之力使他全程未得领纳法谈的滋味。因此,应视昏沉睡眠如同牢狱一般。显示巴利原文
Yathā pana nakkhattadivase bandhanāgāre baddho puriso nakkhattassa neva ādiṃ na majjhaṃ na pariyosānaṃ passati. So dutiyadivase mutto aho hiyyo nakkhattaṃ manāpaṃ, aho naccaṃ, aho gītantiādīni sutvāpi paṭivacanaṃ na deti. Kiṃ kāraṇā? Nakkhattassa ananubhūtattā. Evameva thinamiddhābhibhūto bhikkhu vicittanayepi dhammassavane pavattamāne neva tassa ādiṃ na majjhaṃ na pariyosānaṃ jānāti. Sopi uṭṭhite dhammassavane aho dhammassavanaṃ, aho kāraṇaṃ, aho upamāti dhammassavanassa vaṇṇaṃ bhaṇamānānaṃ sutvāpi paṭivacanaṃ na deti. Kiṃ kāraṇā? Thinamiddhavasena dhammakathāya ananubhūtattā. Evaṃ bandhanāgāraṃ viya thinamiddhaṃ daṭṭhabbaṃ.
又如一个奴隶,纵然正在欢度星宿庆典,若是主人喝令:‘有件急事,快去那里。若不去,我便砍断你的手足,割掉你的耳鼻!’他便必须立即前往,根本无暇去领受星宿庆典的始、中、终。是什么缘故?因为他受人辖制。同样地,一个于律不善巧的比丘,纵使为求远离而住于林野,只要对任何一事——乃至于可食的肉生起‘此不可食’的念头,他便不得不放下远离,为清净戒律而前往亲近持律者,终不得享受远离之乐。是什么缘故?因为他被掉举悔恨所制伏。因此,应视掉举悔恨如同奴仆一般。显示巴利原文
Yathā pana nakkhattaṃ kīḷantopi dāso – ‘‘idaṃ nāma accāyikaṃ karaṇīyaṃ atthi, sīghaṃ tattha gacchāhi. No ce gacchasi, hatthapādaṃ vā te chindāmi kaṇṇanāsaṃ vā’’ti vutto sīghaṃ gacchatiyeva . Nakkhattassa ādimajjhapariyosānaṃ anubhavituṃ na labhati, kasmā? Parādhīnatāya, evameva vinaye apakataññunā vivekatthāya araññaṃ paviṭṭhenāpi kismiñcideva antamaso kappiyamaṃsepi akappiyamaṃsasaññāya uppannāya vivekaṃ pahāya sīlavisodhanatthaṃ vinayadharassa santikaṃ gantabbaṃ hoti, vivekasukhaṃ anubhavituṃ na labhati, kasmā? Uddhaccakukkuccābhibhūtatāyāti. Evaṃ dāsabyaṃ viya uddhaccakukkuccaṃ daṭṭhabbaṃ.
犹如一人行在旷野荒漠的长途之上,看见人们遭盗贼劫掠、殴击的现场,再听到棍杖声响、鸟雀鸣叫,心中便猜疑:‘盗贼来了!’于是总在恐惧惊疑之中前行,走走又停停,甚至折返退步,退行之路竟比前进之路还要多。他历经巨大的困苦与艰难,或许可到达安稳之地,又或许不能。同样地,于八事生起疑惑之人,以‘这是佛陀吗?这不是佛陀吧?’这样的方式辗转疑思,便无法以决然之信而执取;无法执取,也就无法证得道与果。正如在旷野荒漠的路上,翻来覆去地寻思‘有贼,无贼’,令心不得朗澈、生起惶恐,障碍了抵达安稳之所;疑惑也是如此,以‘这是佛陀吗?不是佛陀吗?’等方式反复寻思,令心不得朗澈、生起惶恐,障碍了到达圣位。因此,应视疑惑如同旷野荒漠之路一般。显示巴利原文
Yathā pana kantāraddhānamaggappaṭipanno puriso corehi manussānaṃ viluttokāsaṃ pahatokāsañca disvā daṇḍakasaddenapi sakuṇasaddenapi ‘‘corā āgatā’’ti ussaṅkitaparisaṅkitova hoti, gacchatipi tiṭṭhatipi nivattatipi, gataṭṭhānato agataṭṭhānameva bahutaraṃ hoti. So kicchena kasirena khemantabhūmiṃ pāpuṇāti vā na vā pāpuṇāti. Evameva yassa aṭṭhasu ṭhānesu vicikicchā uppannā hoti, so – ‘‘buddho nu kho, no nu kho buddho’’tiādinā nayena vicikicchanto adhimuccitvā saddhāya gaṇhituṃ na sakkoti. Asakkonto maggaṃ vā phalaṃ vā na pāpuṇātīti. Yathā kantāraddhānamagge – ‘‘corā atthi natthī’’ti punappunaṃ āsappanaparisappanaṃ apariyogāhanaṃ chambhitattaṃ cittassa uppādento khemantapattiyā antarāyaṃ karoti, evaṃ vicikicchāpi – ‘‘buddho nu kho, na buddho’’tiādinā nayena punappunaṃ āsappanaparisappanaṃ apariyogāhanaṃ chambhitattaṃ cittassa uppādayamānā ariyabhūmippattiyā antarāyaṃ karotīti kantāraddhānamaggo viya vicikicchā daṭṭhabbā.
224 此处,‘大王,犹如无债’这一段中,世尊将已断除贪欲盖的人譬喻为无债之人,将其余盖的断除譬喻为无病等,以此加以说明。其中的相似之处如下:好比有人借钱经营事业,后来获得成功。他心想:‘这笔债务真是障碍的根源。’于是他将本息一并还清,并撕毁了借据。从此以后,再也不会有人派使者来,也不会有人送来催债的信。纵使见到债主,若他愿意,便从座而起;若不愿,便不起座。为什么?因为与那些人已毫无牵连、互不相干。同样地,比丘思惟:‘这个贪欲真是障碍的根源。’于是修习六种法,断除了贪欲盖。这六种法我们将在《大念处》中解释。这样的一位已断除贪欲的比丘,如同还清债务的人见到债主时不再恐惧、惊惶,他在外在的所缘上既不贪着,也不被系缚,即使见到天界的妙色,烦恼也不会现行。因此,世尊说断除贪欲犹如无债。显示巴利原文
224. Idāni – ‘‘seyyathāpi, mahārāja, āṇaṇya’’nti ettha bhagavā pahīnakāmacchandanīvaraṇaṃ āṇaṇyasadisaṃ, sesāni ārogyādisadisāni katvā dasseti. Tatrāyaṃ sadisatā, yathā hi puriso iṇaṃ ādāya kammante payojetvā samiddhataṃ patto – ‘‘idaṃ iṇaṃ nāma palibodhamūla’’nti cintetvā savaḍḍhikaṃ iṇaṃ niyyātetvā paṇṇaṃ phālāpeyya. Athassa tato paṭṭhāya neva koci dūtaṃ peseti, na paṇṇaṃ. So iṇasāmike disvāpi sace icchati, āsanā uṭṭhahati, no ce na uṭṭhahati, kasmā? Tehi saddhiṃ nillepatāya alaggatāya. Evameva bhikkhu – ‘‘ayaṃ kāmacchando nāma palibodhamūla’’nti cintetvā cha dhamme bhāvetvā kāmacchandanīvaraṇaṃ pajahati. Te pana cha dhamme mahāsatipaṭṭhāne vaṇṇayissāma. Tassevaṃ pahīnakāmacchandassa yathā iṇamuttassa purisassa iṇassāmike disvā neva bhayaṃ na chambhitattaṃ hoti. Evameva paravatthumhi neva saṅgo na baddho hoti. Dibbānipi rūpāni passato kileso na samudācarati. Tasmā bhagavā āṇaṇyamiva kāmacchandappahānaṃ āha.
正如那个患了胆病的人,通过药物治疗平息了该病,从此便能品尝蜂蜜、糖等美味。同样地,比丘了知:‘这个嗔恚确实有大过患。’修习六种法,断除了嗔恚盖。关于一切盖的六种法,我们都将在《大念处》中解释。不止于此,为断除昏沉睡眠等盖所应修习的法,也都会在那里说明。这样断除了嗔恚的人,正如摆脱了胆病的人满心欢喜地享用蜂蜜、糖等美味,同样地,他以头顶戴接受戒律等诸学处,满心欢喜地修学。因此,世尊说断除嗔恚犹如健康。显示巴利原文
Yathā pana so pittarogāturo puriso bhesajjakiriyāya taṃ rogaṃ vūpasametvā tato paṭṭhāya madhusakkarādīnaṃ rasaṃ vindati. Evameva bhikkhu ‘‘ayaṃ byāpādo nāma mahā anatthakaro’’ti cha dhamme bhāvetvā byāpādanīvaraṇaṃ pajahati. Sabbanīvaraṇesu cha dhamme mahāsatipaṭṭhāneyeva vaṇṇayissāma. Na kevalañca teyeva, yepi thinamiddhādīnaṃ pahānāya bhāvetabbā, tepi sabbe tattheva vaṇṇayissāma. So evaṃ pahīnabyāpādo yathā pittarogavimutto puriso madhusakkarādīnaṃ rasaṃ sampiyāyamāno paṭisevati, evameva ācārapaṇṇattiādīni sikkhāpadāni sirasā sampaṭicchitvā sampiyāyamāno sikkhati. Tasmā bhagavā ārogyamiva byāpādappahānaṃ āha.
正如那个在星宿日被关进牢房的人,到了下一次星宿日时,他思惟:‘从前我因为放逸的过失被束缚,因此没能度过星宿节。如今我一定要保持不放逸。’于是他安住于不放逸,不让那些怨敌有机可乘,这样度过星宿节之后,发出感叹:‘啊,星宿节!啊,星宿节!’同样地,比丘了知:‘这个昏沉睡眠确实有大过患。’修习六种法,断除了昏沉睡眠盖。这样断除了昏沉睡眠的人,正如从牢狱中被放出的人在七天之中都能遍享星宿节的开端、过程和结尾,同样地,他经历法星宿的开端、过程和结尾,依无碍解而证得阿罗汉果。因此,世尊说断除昏沉睡眠犹如脱离牢狱。显示巴利原文
Yathā so nakkhattadivase bandhanāgāraṃ pavesito puriso aparasmiṃ nakkhattadivase – ‘‘pubbepi ahaṃ pamādadosena baddho, tena nakkhattaṃ nānubhaviṃ. Idāni appamatto bhavissāmī’’ti yathāssa paccatthikā okāsaṃ na labhanti, evaṃ appamatto hutvā nakkhattaṃ anubhavitvā – ‘aho nakkhattaṃ, aho nakkhatta’nti udānaṃ udānesi, evameva bhikkhu – ‘‘idaṃ thinamiddhaṃ nāma mahāanatthakara’’nti cha dhamme bhāvetvā thinamiddhanīvaraṇaṃ pajahati, so evaṃ pahīnathinamiddho yathā bandhanā mutto puriso sattāhampi nakkhattassa ādimajjhapariyosānaṃ anubhavati, evameva dhammanakkhattassa ādimajjhapariyosānaṃ anubhavanto saha paṭisambhidāhi arahattaṃ pāpuṇāti. Tasmā bhagavā bandhanā mokkhamiva thinamiddhappahānaṃ āha.
正如一个奴隶,依靠某位朋友,将钱财付予主人,使自己得以赎身,从此之后,他想做什么,便可以去做。同样地,比丘了知:“这掉举与追悔确实有大过患。”修习六法,便断除了掉举与追悔。如此断除掉举与追悔的人,犹如重获自由之人,欲行何事,无人能以强力拦阻;同样地,他随顺安乐,走上出离之道,掉举与追悔再也无法强行将他从中拉回。因此,世尊说断除掉举与追悔犹如自由之人。显示巴利原文
Yathā pana dāso kiñcideva mittaṃ upanissāya sāmikānaṃ dhanaṃ datvā attānaṃ bhujissaṃ katvā tato paṭṭhāya yaṃ icchati, taṃ karoti. Evameva bhikkhu – ‘‘idaṃ uddhaccakukkuccaṃ nāma mahā anatthakara’’nti cha dhamme bhāvetvā uddhaccakukkuccaṃ pajahati. So evaṃ pahīnauddhaccakukkucco yathā bhujisso puriso yaṃ icchati, taṃ karoti, na taṃ koci balakkārena tato nivatteti , evameva yathā sukhaṃ nekkhammapaṭipadaṃ paṭipajjati, na taṃ uddhaccakukkuccaṃ balakkārena tato nivatteti. Tasmā bhagavā bhujissaṃ viya uddhaccakukkuccappahānaṃ āha.
正如一位大力士,手握利剑,全副武装,带领随从,走进旷野。盗贼们远远望见他,便纷纷逃散。他安全地越过那片旷野,到达安稳之地,心中欢喜满足。同样地,比丘了知:“这疑确实有大过患。”修习六法,便断除了疑。如此断除疑的人,正如那位大力士,全副武装,带领随从,无所畏惧,视盗贼如草芥,平安地走出旷野,抵达安稳之地;同样地,这位比丘越过了恶行的旷野,抵达了最为殊胜的安稳之地——不死的涅槃。因此,世尊说断除疑犹如安稳之地。显示巴利原文
Yathā balavā puriso hatthasāraṃ gahetvā sajjāvudho saparivāro kantāraṃ paṭipajjeyya, taṃ corā dūratova disvā palāyeyyuṃ. So sotthinā taṃ kantāraṃ nittharitvā khemantaṃ patto haṭṭhatuṭṭho assa. Evameva bhikkhu ‘‘ayaṃ vicikicchā nāma mahā anatthakārikā’’ti cha dhamme bhāvetvā vicikicchaṃ pajahati . So evaṃ pahīnavicikiccho yathā balavā puriso sajjāvudho saparivāro nibbhayo core tiṇaṃ viya agaṇetvā sotthinā nikkhamitvā khemantabhūmiṃ pāpuṇāti, evameva bhikkhu duccaritakantāraṃ nittharitvā paramaṃ khemantabhūmiṃ amataṃ mahānibbānaṃ pāpuṇāti. Tasmā bhagavā khemantabhūmiṃ viya vicikicchāpahānaṃ āha.
225 “欢悦生起”:指满意之相生起。“喜悦者喜生起”:指满意之人,其全身生起了能引发悸动的喜。“心喜者身轻安”:指与喜相应之人,其名身轻安,远离了躁动。“感受乐”:指他感受身体的乐与内心的乐。“心得定”:指依此出离之乐而得喜悦的人,他的心依止于近行定或安止定而得等持。显示巴利原文
225.Pāmojjaṃ jāyatīti tuṭṭhākāro jāyati. Pamuditassa pīti jāyatīti tuṭṭhassa sakalasarīraṃ khobhayamānā pīti jāyati. Pītimanassa kāyo passambhatīti pītisampayuttacittassa puggalassa nāmakāyo passambhati, vigatadaratho hoti. Sukhaṃ vedetīti kāyikampi cetasikampi sukhaṃ vedayati. Cittaṃ samādhiyatīti iminā nekkhammasukhena sukhitassa upacāravasenapi appanāvasenapi cittaṃ samādhiyati.
初禅论显示巴利原文
Paṭhamajjhānakathā
226 然而,关于“他远离诸欲……乃至……具足初禅而住”等文,应当了知:这是为了在依近行定而等持的心上,显示更为殊胜的境界;而在依安止定而等持的心上,则是为了显示该定自身的差别而说。“此身”:即此业所生之身。“令遍满”:意为滋润、濡润,令喜乐遍行于全身各处。“令周遍流”:指从四周遍流。“令充满”:如同风将皮囊吹满一般地充满。“令遍触”:指从一切方面触到。“全身一切处”:指这位比丘的全身,凡有诸执受相续存在的部分,乃至紧贴皮肤、肌肉、血液的任何微细之处,也无有一处不被初禅的喜乐所触及。显示巴利原文
226.So vivicceva kāmehi…pe… paṭhamaṃ jhānaṃ upasampajja viharatītiādi pana upacārasamādhinā samāhite citte uparivisesadassanatthaṃ appanāsamādhinā samāhite citte tassa samādhino pabhedadassanatthaṃ vuttanti veditabbaṃ. Imameva kāyanti imaṃ karajakāyaṃ. Abhisandetīti temeti sneheti, sabbattha pavattapītisukhaṃ karoti. Parisandetīti samantato sandeti. Paripūretīti vāyunā bhastaṃ viya pūreti. Parippharatīti samantato phusati. Sabbāvato kāyassāti assa bhikkhuno sabbakoṭṭhāsavato kāyassa kiñci upādinnakasantatipavattiṭṭhāne chavimaṃsalohitānugataṃ aṇumattampi ṭhānaṃ paṭhamajjhānasukhena aphuṭaṃ nāma na hoti.
227 “聪明”:指善巧、有能力制作、调合与揉合沐浴粉的人。“在铜盆中”:指在任何金属所制的器皿中。因为陶器并不坚固,揉合时会碎裂,所以这里不用它来作比喻。“一再洒水后”:即一次次地洒水。“揉合”:指用左手托住铜盆,以右手取适量之水,洒一次水便揉压一次,反复揉成一个粉团。“为润所随”:指被水之润性所随逐。“为润所遍摄”:指被水之润性完全摄持。“内外”:内部与外部,每一处都被水之润性所触及。“不滴漏”:指不会滴下点滴之水,既可用两根或三根手指将其拿起,也可将其捏出皱褶。显示巴利原文
227.Dakkhoti cheko paṭibalo nhānīyacuṇṇāni kātuñceva payojetuñca sannetuñca. Kaṃsathāleti yena kenaci lohena katabhājane. Mattikabhājanaṃ pana thiraṃ na hoti. Sannentassa bhijjati. Tasmā taṃ na dasseti. Paripphosakaṃparipphosakanti siñcitvā siñcitvā. Sanneyyāti vāmahatthena kaṃsathālaṃ gahetvā dakkhiṇahatthena pamāṇayuttaṃ udakaṃ siñcitvā siñcitvā parimaddanto piṇḍaṃ kareyya. Snehānugatāti udakasinehena anugatā. Snehaparetāti udakasinehena pariggahitā. Santarabāhirāti saddhiṃ antopadesena ceva bahipadesena ca sabbatthakameva udakasinehena phuṭāti attho. Na ca paggharaṇīti na ca bindu bindu udakaṃ paggharati, sakkā hoti hatthenapi dvīhipi tīhipi aṅgulīhi gahetuṃ ovaṭṭikāyapi kātunti attho.
第二禅那论显示巴利原文
Dutiyajjhānakathā
228-229 在第二禅那乐的譬喻中,“涌泉之水”:指向上涌出的水,并非从下方涌出后再流下的水,而是就在内部涌出的水,这是它的意思。“入口”:指水流进入的通道。“云”:即雨云。“适时”:指适时降雨,意思是每半月或每十天一次。“降雨”:即降下雨水。“若不能注入”:指如果不能流入,也就是天不降雨。“清凉的水流涌出”:清凉的水流涌出后,便充满整个湖泊,它是自己涌出的。因为从下方涌出的水,一再涌出而又破裂,会搅动水面;从四方流入的水,会因为枯叶、杂草、木棍等搅动水面;而降下的雨水,则会因水柱落下激起的水泡搅动水面。唯有那种如同安稳止息后,又如神通变化所生一般涌出的水,才会遍满一切,而不存在“此处遍满而彼处不遍满”的差别,绝无任何一个角落是它所不触及的。在此,湖泊比喻业所生身,水比喻第二禅那的乐,其余解释同前一种方式所说。显示巴利原文
228-229. Dutiyajjhānasukhūpamāyaṃ ubbhidodakoti ubbhinnaudako, na heṭṭhā ubbhijjitvā uggacchanakaudako. Antoyeva pana ubbhijjanakaudakoti attho. Āyamukhanti āgamanamaggo. Devoti megho. Kālena kālanti kāle kāle, anvaddhamāsaṃ vā anudasāhaṃ vāti attho. Dhāranti vuṭṭhiṃ. Na anuppaveccheyyāti na ca paveseyya, na vasseyyāti attho. Sītā vāridhārā ubbhijjitvāti sītaṃ dhāraṃ uggantvā rahadaṃ pūrayamānaṃ ubbhijjitvā. Heṭṭhā uggacchanaudakañhi uggantvā uggantvā bhijjantaṃ udakaṃ khobheti, catūhi disāhi pavisanaudakaṃ purāṇapaṇṇatiṇakaṭṭhadaṇḍakādīhi udakaṃ khobheti, vuṭṭhiudakaṃ dhārānipātapubbuḷakehi udakaṃ khobheti. Sannisinnameva pana hutvā iddhinimmitamiva uppajjamānaṃ udakaṃ imaṃ padesaṃ pharati, imaṃ padesaṃ na pharatīti natthi, tena aphuṭokāso nāma na hotīti. Tattha rahado viya karajakāyo. Udakaṃ viya dutiyajjhānasukhaṃ. Sesaṃ purimanayeneva veditabbaṃ.
关于第三禅那显示巴利原文
Tatiyajjhānakathā
230-231 在第三禅那乐喻中,「有青莲之处」即是有青莲的池塘。其余二词(红莲池、白莲池)也应同理理解。于此,白、红、蓝中任何一种莲花皆可统称为青莲。花瓣不足百者为白睡莲,百瓣者为莲花。又或不依花瓣而定:白者为莲花,红者为白睡莲,这是此处的分别方式。「不超出水面的」:指不高于水面而生长。「内部沉没而生长」:指就在水面下沉没生长,含增长之义。其余内容当如前文所说之法理解。显示巴利原文
230-231. Tatiyajjhānasukhūpamāyaṃ uppalāni ettha santīti uppalinī. Sesapadadvayepi eseva nayo. Ettha ca setarattanīlesu yaṃ kiñci uppalaṃ uppalameva. Ūnakasatapattaṃ puṇḍarīkaṃ, satapattaṃ padumaṃ. Pattaniyamaṃ vā vināpi setaṃ padumaṃ, rattaṃ puṇḍarīkanti ayamettha vinicchayo. Udakānuggatānīti udakato na uggatāni. Anto nimuggaposīnīti udakatalassa anto nimuggāniyeva hutvā posīni, vaḍḍhīnīti attho. Sesaṃ purimanayeneva veditabbaṃ.
关于第四禅那显示巴利原文
Catutthajjhānakathā
232-233 在第四禅那乐喻中,「清净的心、极清净的心」:应知,无烦恼故为清净,光耀故为极清净。「以白色的衣」:这是为说明体温的遍满。因为衣若有垢,体温的遍满便不明显;在当时洗净而清净的衣上,体温的遍满则强而有力。于此譬喻中,衣如业生之身,体温的遍满如第四禅那之乐。因而,犹如沐浴洁净之人以清净布覆首而坐,身热遍满整布,无一处不被触及;如是,比丘的业生之身亦无一处不被第四禅那乐所遍满。当以此理了解此处之义。至于四种禅那的逐句释义及修习方法,在《清净道论》中已述,此处便不详谈。显示巴利原文
232-233. Catutthajjhānasukhūpamāyaṃ parisuddhena cetasā pariyodātenāti ettha nirupakkilesaṭṭhena parisuddhaṃ, pabhassaraṭṭhena pariyodātanti veditabbaṃ. Odātena vatthenāti idaṃ utupharaṇatthaṃ vuttaṃ. Kiliṭṭhavatthena hi utupharaṇaṃ na hoti, taṅkhaṇadhotaparisuddhena utupharaṇaṃ balavaṃ hoti. Imissāya hi upamāya vatthaṃ viya karajakāyo, utupharaṇaṃ viya catutthajjhānasukhaṃ. Tasmā yathā sunhātassa purisassa parisuddhaṃ vatthaṃ sasīsaṃ pārupitvā nisinnassa sarīrato utu sabbameva vatthaṃ pharati. Na koci vatthassa aphuṭokāso hoti. Evaṃ catutthajjhānasukhena bhikkhuno karajakāyassa na koci okāso aphuṭo hotīti. Evamettha attho daṭṭhabbo. Imesaṃ pana catunnaṃ jhānānaṃ anupadavaṇṇanā ca bhāvanānayo ca visuddhimagge vuttoti idha na vitthārito.
至此,不应认为这位比丘只获得了色界禅那,而未获得无色界禅那。若未于八等至中以十四种方式修至自在,便无法证得更高的神通。圣典中仅提及色界禅那,无色界禅那需另行引出解说。显示巴利原文
Ettāvatā cesa rūpajjhānalābhīyeva, na arūpajjhānalābhīti na veditabbo. Na hi aṭṭhasu samāpattīsu cuddasahākārehi ciṇṇavasībhāvaṃ vinā upari abhiññādhigamo hoti. Pāḷiyaṃ pana rūpajjhānāniyeva āgatāni. Arūpajjhānāni āharitvā kathetabbāni.
关于观智显示巴利原文
Vipassanāñāṇakathā
234 「如此,心已得定……乃至……安住不动」:这句经文表明,该比丘已以十四种行相于八等至中修习自在。其余义理,当依《清净道论》所述而了知。「为如实知见而倾心」:此处「如实知见」通指道智、果智、一切智、省察智及观智。于《大义释》中:‘贤友,是否为了如实知见清净而于世尊的教导下修习梵行?’此中「如实知见」即是道智。于《中部》中:‘我证得了此种超越常人的、圣的如实知见殊胜,并安住于安乐’,此中「如实知见」即是果智。于《大品》中:‘世尊亦生起如实知见:阿罗罗·迦罗摩命终已七日’,此中「如实知见」即是一切智。于《大品》中:‘我生起了智与见:我之解脱不动摇,此为最后生’,此中「如实知见」即是省察智。而于此「为如实知见而倾心」的经句中,「如实知见」则指观智。显示巴利原文
234.So evaṃ samāhite citte…pe… āneñjappatteti so cuddasahākārehi aṭṭhasu samāpattīsu ciṇṇavasībhāvo bhikkhūti dasseti . Sesamettha visuddhimagge vuttanayena veditabbaṃ. Ñāṇadassanāya cittaṃ abhinīharatīti ettha ñāṇadassananti maggañāṇampi, vuccati phalañāṇampi, sabbaññutaññāṇampi, paccavekkhaṇañāṇampi, vipassanāñāṇampi. ‘‘Kiṃ nu kho, āvuso, ñāṇadassanavisuddhatthaṃ bhagavati brahmacariyaṃ vussatī’’ti (mahāni. 1.257) ettha hi maggañāṇaṃ ñāṇadassananti vuttaṃ. ‘‘Ayamañño uttarimanussadhammo alamariyañāṇadassanaviseso adhigato phāsuvihāro’’ti (ma. ni. 1.328) ettha phalañāṇaṃ. ‘‘Bhagavatopi kho ñāṇadassanaṃ udapādi sattāhakālaṅkato āḷāro kālāmo’’ti (mahāva. 10) ettha sabbaññutaññāṇaṃ. ‘‘Ñāṇañca pana me dassanaṃ udapādi akuppā me vimutti, ayamantimā jātī’’ti (mahāva. 16) ettha paccavekkhaṇañāṇaṃ idha pana ñāṇadassanāya cittanti idaṃ vipassanāñāṇaṃ ñāṇadassananti vuttanti.
「倾心」:即为了引生观智,令心倾向于彼、俯就于彼、朝向于彼。「色身」等词之义,前已述及。「依靠米饭和豆羹而增广者」:即依靠米饭和豆羹滋养而成长。「无常、涂抹、揉捏、破坏、散坏之法」:其中,「无常法」是说有生之后归于无有;「涂抹法」是为了消除恶臭与不适,而用薄薄的油膏加以涂抹;「揉捏法」是为了去除肢节间的不调和,而以轻柔的按摩加以揉捏;或者,在幼年时将婴儿置于膝上,为使他在胎中所成的不端正的肢体各部变得端正,通过拉伸、按压等方式予以揉捏。虽经如此养护,它依然是「破坏、散坏之法」——会破裂、会离散,这即是它的自性。于此,「此色身为四大所造」等六句,是就‘集’的方面而说;无常句以及最后二句,是就‘灭’的方面而说。「于此处依止、于此处系著」:即依止、系著于这四大所造之身。显示巴利原文
Abhinīharatīti vipassanāñāṇassa nibbattanatthāya tanninnaṃ tappoṇaṃ tappabbhāraṃ karoti. Rūpīti ādīnamattho vuttoyeva. Odanakummāsūpacayoti odanena ceva kummāsena ca upacito vaḍḍhito. Aniccucchādanaparimaddanabhedanaviddhaṃsanadhammoti hutvā abhāvaṭṭhena aniccadhammo. Duggandhavighātatthāya tanuvilepanena ucchādanadhammo. Aṅgapaccaṅgābādhavinodanatthāya khuddakasambāhanena parimaddanadhammo. Daharakāle vā ūrūsu sayāpetvā gabbhāvāsena dussaṇṭhitānaṃ tesaṃ tesaṃ aṅgānaṃ saṇṭhānasampādanatthaṃ añchanapīḷanādivasena parimaddanadhammo. Evaṃ pariharitopi bhedanaviddhaṃsanadhammo bhijjati ceva vikirati ca, evaṃ sabhāvoti attho. Tattha rūpī cātumahābhūtikotiādīsu chahi padehi samudayo kathito. Aniccapadena saddhiṃ pacchimehi dvīhi atthaṅgamo. Ettha sitaṃ ettha paṭibaddhanti ettha cātumahābhūtike kāye nissitañca paṭibaddhañca.
235 「清净」即美丽。「有光泽」指由极清净的矿源所产生。「善磨治」指已善加磨治,去除了石子与砂砾。「透明」指肤理薄。「极明净」指极为明净。「具足一切特点」指具足洗净、钻孔等一切特征。「青等」是显示色泽的圆满。因为那样的宝石一经穿线,线便清晰可见。所谓「正是如此」:此处当知为譬喻与法义的配合。在此,以宝石譬喻此业生之身;以穿线之绳譬喻观智;以具眼之人譬喻证得观智的比丘。犹如那人将宝石取在手中观察:‘这是宝石’,于此时宝石变得明显;同样,当观智变得明显之时,正是那位端坐并转向内观的行者,其四大所造之身变得明显之时。犹如在那里,由‘绳已穿’之说,绳变得明显之时;同样,当那位端坐并转向内观的行者,其时那些所缘——或以触为第五的诸法,或一切心、心所法,或唯是观智——变得明显之时。显示巴利原文
235.Subhoti sundaro. Jātimāti parisuddhākarasamuṭṭhito. Suparikammakatoti suṭṭhu kataparikammo apanītapāsāṇasakkharo. Acchoti tanucchavi. Vippasannoti suṭṭhu pasanno. Sabbākārasampannoti dhovanavedhanādīhi sabbehi ākārehi sampanno. Nīlantiādīhi vaṇṇasampattiṃ dasseti. Tādisañhi āvutaṃ pākaṭaṃ hoti. Evameva khoti ettha evaṃ upamāsaṃsandanaṃ veditabbaṃ. Maṇi viya hi karajakāyo. Āvutasuttaṃ viya vipassanāñāṇaṃ. Cakkhumā puriso viya vipassanālābhī bhikkhu, hatthe karitvā paccavekkhato ayaṃ kho maṇīti maṇino āvibhūtakālo viya vipassanāñāṇaṃ, abhinīharitvā nisinnassa bhikkhuno cātumahābhūtikakāyassa āvibhūtakālo, tatridaṃ suttaṃ āvutanti suttassāvibhūtakālo viya vipassanāñāṇaṃ, abhinīharitvā nisinnassa bhikkhuno tadārammaṇānaṃ phassapañcamakānaṃ vā sabbacittacetasikānaṃ vā vipassanāñāṇasseva vā āvibhūtakāloti.
此观智紧接于道智之前而生起。虽然如此,由于在开始讲述神通的部分时,其间并未穿插其他内容,故于此显示。又因对于尚未以无常等相进行思惟者,当他以天耳界听闻可怖之声,以宿命随念回忆可怖之蕴,或以天眼看见可怖之色相时,便会生起恐惧与惊慌;而已以无常等相作过思惟者则不会如此。因此,为了给得神通者提供去除恐惧之因,便在此显示了这种观智。再者,由于此观智之乐能导至道果之乐,它本身就是一种独立、现见的沙门果,故应知,也因此于开端处即予以说明。显示巴利原文
Idañca vipassanāñāṇaṃ maggañāṇānantaraṃ. Evaṃ santepi yasmā abhiññāvāre āraddhe etassa antarāvāro natthi tasmā idheva dassitaṃ. Yasmā ca aniccādivasena akatasammasanassa dibbāya sotadhātuyā bheravaṃ saddaṃ suṇato, pubbenivāsānussatiyā bherave khandhe anussarato, dibbena cakkhunā bheravampi rūpaṃ passato bhayasantāso uppajjati, na aniccādivasena katasammasanassa tasmā abhiññaṃ pattassa bhayavinodanahetusampādanatthampi idaṃ idheva dassitaṃ. Api ca yasmā vipassanāsukhaṃ nāmetaṃ maggaphalasukhasampādakaṃ pāṭiyekkaṃ sandiṭṭhikaṃ sāmaññaphalaṃ tasmāpi āditova idaṃ idha dassitanti veditabbaṃ.
「意所成神变智论」显示巴利原文
Manomayiddhiñāṇakathā
236-237 “意所成”指由心意所化生。“具足众节及细身分”指具备所有粗大肢节与细小的身分。“诸根无损”指在形态上诸根无有缺失。若神通者所化之色身,神通者自身为白色,其所化身亦为白色;若神通者未穿耳洞,所化身亦无耳洞。就这样,所化身在一切特征上都与他完全相同。以从文阇草中取出鞘、从鞘中取出剑、从蛇蜕中取出蛇这三个譬喻,也旨在显示二者体性相似。文阇草中的鞘与它相似,剑与鞘相似;人们为圆形的鞘配圆形的剑,为扁平的鞘配扁平的剑。“蛇蜕”(karaṇḍa)是指蛇皮的名称,并非藤筐,因为蛇皮与蛇本身相似。虽然这里比喻为“好像有人从蛇蜕中抽出蛇”,看似以手抽取,但应知这里是指以心意将其抽出。因为,所谓“蛇”者,当它处在同类之中,或依附于木缝、树缝时,凭借一种称为“舍皮精进”的力量,犹如对旧皮心生嫌恶而啃噬自己的身体——以此四种原因,它会自行舍弃旧皮,绝非任何其他人所能将其抽出。所以应知,这里说“抽出”,是针对以心意抽离而说的。因此,文阇草等所喻指的相似者,即是这位比丘自身。显示巴利原文
236-237.Manomayanti manena nibbattitaṃ. Sabbaṅgapaccaṅginti sabbehi aṅgehi ca paccaṅgehi ca samannāgataṃ. Ahīnindriyanti saṇṭhānavasena avikalindriyaṃ. Iddhimatā nimmitarūpañhi sace iddhimā odāto tampi odātaṃ. Sace aviddhakaṇṇo tampi aviddhakaṇṇanti evaṃ sabbākārehi tena sadisameva hoti. Muñjamhā īsikantiādi upamāttayampi hi sadisabhāvadassanatthameva vuttaṃ. Muñjasadisā eva hi tassa anto īsikā hoti. Kosisadisoyeva asi, vaṭṭāya kosiyā vaṭṭaṃ asimeva pakkhipanti, patthaṭāya patthaṭaṃ . Karaṇḍāti idampi ahikañcukassa nāmaṃ, na vilīvakaraṇḍakassa. Ahikañcuko hi ahinā sadisova hoti. Tattha kiñcāpi ‘‘puriso ahiṃ karaṇḍā uddhareyyā’’ti hatthena uddharamāno viya dassito, atha kho cittenevassa uddharaṇaṃ veditabbaṃ. Ayañhi ahi nāma sajātiyaṃ ṭhito, kaṭṭhantaraṃ vā rukkhantaraṃ vā nissāya, tacato sarīraṃ nikkaḍḍhanappayogasaṅkhātena thāmena, sarīraṃ khādayamānaṃ viya purāṇatacaṃ jigucchantoti imehi catūhi kāraṇehi sayameva kañcukaṃ pajahati, na sakkā tato aññena uddharituṃ, tasmā cittena uddharaṇaṃ sandhāya idaṃ vuttanti veditabbaṃ. Iti muñjādisadisaṃ imassa bhikkhuno sarīraṃ, īsikādisadisaṃ nimmitarūpanti. Idamettha opammasaṃsandanaṃ. Nimmānavidhānaṃ panettha parato ca iddhividhādipañcaabhiññākathā sabbākārena visuddhimagge vitthāritāti tattha vuttanayeneva veditabbā. Upamāmattameva hi idha adhikaṃ.
「神变智等论」显示巴利原文
Iddhividhañāṇādikathā
238-239 在这里,应将获得神变智的比丘视为一位灵巧的陶工等;将神变智本身视为经过善加调理的泥团等;将此比丘所施展的种种神通变化,则视为随心所欲地制造出各种器皿的形变等。显示巴利原文
238-239. Tattha chekakumbhakārādayo viya iddhividhañāṇalābhī bhikkhu daṭṭhabbo. Suparikammakatamattikādayo viya iddhividhañāṇaṃ daṭṭhabbaṃ. Icchiticchitabhājanavikatiādikaraṇaṃ viya tassa bhikkhuno vikubbanaṃ daṭṭhabbaṃ.
240-241 在天耳界的譬喻中,因旷野长途有危险、有怖畏,在那里,常怀疑虑与恐惧者便无法清楚判断‘这是腰鼓声’‘这是小鼓声’。因此,为了显示安稳的道路,不提旷野,而说‘行于长途者’。当有人沿着安稳无惧的道路,将布卷放在头顶缓缓而行时,便能轻松地对上述种种声音作出判断。正如此人借着听闻而使种种声音清晰分明时,修行者对诸天和人的种种远近之声也清晰分明,这应当了知。显示巴利原文
240-241. Dibbasotadhātuupamāyaṃ yasmā kantāraddhānamaggo sāsaṅko hoti sappaṭibhayo. Tattha ussaṅkitaparisaṅkitena ‘ayaṃ bherisaddo’, ‘ayaṃ mudiṅgasaddo’ti na sakkā vavatthapetuṃ, tasmā kantāraggahaṇaṃ akatvā khemamaggaṃ dassento addhānamaggappaṭipannoti āha. Appaṭibhayañhi khemamaggaṃ sīse sāṭakaṃ katvā saṇikaṃ paṭipanno vuttappakāre sadde sukhaṃ vavatthapeti. Tassa savanena tesaṃ tesaṃ saddānaṃ āvibhūtakālo viya yogino dūrasantikabhedānaṃ dibbānañceva mānussakānañca saddānaṃ āvibhūtakālo veditabbo.
242-243 在他心智的譬喻中,‘年少者’指年轻。‘青年’指正值青春。‘性好装饰者’指虽是青年,却不懒惰,衣服身体也不垢秽,而是性好装饰,一天沐浴两三次,穿着洁净的衣服,喜好打扮。‘有污点’指黑痣、胎记、面疱、雀斑等某种瑕疵。在那里,正如那位青年审视面容时,脸上的污点便清楚显现;同样地,为得他心智而专注静坐观察的比丘,也清晰了知他人的十六种心,这应当明白。显示巴利原文
242-243. Cetopariyañāṇūpamāyaṃ daharoti taruṇo. Yuvāti yobbannena samannāgato. Maṇḍanakajātikoti yuvāpi samāno na ālasiyo na kiliṭṭhavatthasarīro, atha kho maṇḍanapakatiko, divasassa dve tayo vāre nhāyitvā suddhavatthaparidahanaalaṅkārakaraṇasīloti attho. Sakaṇikanti kāḷatilakavaṅgamukhadūsipīḷakādīnaṃ aññatarena sadosaṃ. Tattha yathā tassa mukhanimittaṃ paccavekkhato mukhe doso pākaṭo hoti, evaṃ cetopariyañāṇāya cittaṃ abhinīharitvā nisinnassa bhikkhuno paresaṃ soḷasavidhaṃ cittaṃ pākaṭaṃ hotīti veditabbaṃ.
244-245 在宿住智的譬喻中,为说明‘当日所作之事变得明显’,只取当天到过的三个村庄。这里,应把获得宿住智的人视为犹如到达三个村庄的人,把三有视为犹如三个村庄,将比丘把心导向宿住智而坐后,于三有中所作之事变得明显的情形,视为犹如那个人在三个村庄里当天所作之事显现一般。显示巴利原文
244-245. Pubbenivāsañāṇūpamāyaṃ taṃ divasaṃ katakiriyā pākaṭā hotīti taṃ divasaṃ gatagāmattayameva gahitaṃ. Tattha gāmattayagatapuriso viya pubbenivāsañāṇalābhī daṭṭhabbo, tayo gāmā viya tayo bhavā daṭṭhabbā, tassa purisassa tīsu gāmesu taṃ divasaṃ katakiriyāya āvibhāvo viya pubbenivāsāya cittaṃ abhinīharitvā nisinnassa bhikkhuno tīsu bhavesu katakiriyāya pākaṭabhāvo daṭṭhabbo.
246-247 在天眼智的譬喻中,“在街道上往来行走”是指不断地来回行走。也有读作“在街道上行走”的,其义相同。于此,应将此比丘的业生身,视如城中央十字路口的宫殿;将证得天眼后安住于此的比丘,视如立于宫殿之上的明眼之人;将入母胎而结生者,视如进入房屋之人;将从母胎出离者,视如从房屋走出之人;将不断来来往往的有情,视如在车道上沿街来回行走之人;将在三有中四处投生的有情,视如坐于前面空地处、中央十字路口之人;当那位比丘倾心于天眼智而坐,三有中投生的有情变得清晰显现之时,应视如立于宫殿顶上的人望见那些人显现之时。这只是为了便于开示而作的譬喻。然而无色界并非天眼智的所缘范围。显示巴利原文
246-247. Dibbacakkhūpamāyaṃ vīthiṃ sañcaranteti aparāparaṃ sañcarante. Vīthiṃ carantetipi pāṭho. Ayamevattho. Tattha nagaramajjhe siṅghāṭakamhi pāsādo viya imassa bhikkhuno karajakāyo daṭṭhabbo, pāsāde ṭhito cakkhumā puriso viya ayameva dibbacakkhuṃ patvā ṭhito bhikkhu, gehaṃ pavisantā viya paṭisandhivasena mātukucchiyaṃ pavisantā, gehā nikkhamantā viya mātukucchito nikkhamantā, rathikāya vīthiṃ sañcarantā viya aparāparaṃ sañcaraṇakasattā, purato abbhokāsaṭṭhāne majjhe siṅghāṭake nisinnā viya tīsu bhavesu tattha tattha nibbattasattā, pāsādatale ṭhitapurisassa tesaṃ manussānaṃ āvibhūtakālo viya dibbacakkhuñāṇāya cittaṃ abhinīharitvā nisinnassa bhikkhuno tīsu bhavesu nibbattasattānaṃ āvibhūtakālo daṭṭhabbo. Idañca desanāsukhatthameva vuttaṃ. Āruppe pana dibbacakkhussa gocaro natthīti.
漏尽智论显示巴利原文
Āsavakkhayañāṇakathā
248 “他这样在等持的心”这一句,于此应知是指作为观基础的第四禅心。“为了漏尽智”,意指为了令漏尽智生起。在这里,“漏尽”一词,可指道、果、涅槃,亦可指坏灭。因为在“于尽有智,于无生有智”这句中,道被称为漏尽;在“以漏尽故为沙门”这句中,果被称为漏尽。显示巴利原文
248.So evaṃ samāhite citteti idha vipassanāpādakaṃ catutthajjhānacittaṃ veditabbaṃ. Āsavānaṃ khayañāṇāyāti āsavānaṃ khayañāṇanibbattanatthāya. Ettha ca āsavānaṃ khayo nāma maggopi phalampi nibbānampi bhaṅgopi vuccati. ‘‘Khaye ñāṇaṃ, anuppāde ñāṇa’’nti ettha hi maggo āsavānaṃ khayoti vutto. ‘‘Āsavānaṃ khayā samaṇo hotī’’ti (ma. ni. 1.438) ettha phalaṃ.
“常观他人之过失者,恒怀讥嫌之想者;”
他的诸漏增长,他远离漏尽。」在此,「漏尽」是指涅槃。
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Paravajjānupassissa, niccaṃ ujjhānasaññino; Āsavā tassa vaḍḍhanti, ārā so āsavakkhayā’’ti. (dha. pa. 253);
此处所说为涅槃。在「诸漏的灭尽、衰灭、破坏、无常、消失」这一表述中,则是指坏灭。然而,这里却是就涅槃而言。阿拉汉道也同样适用。显示巴利原文
Ettha nibbānaṃ. ‘‘Āsavānaṃ khayo vayo bhedo aniccatā antaradhāna’’nti ettha bhaṅgo. Idha pana nibbānaṃ adhippetaṃ. Arahattamaggopi vaṭṭatiyeva.
「将心导向」的意思是:使观心朝向彼处、倾向彼处、倾注于彼处。关于「他如实了知『这是苦』」等句,意为:他藉由通达自相,如实了知整个苦谛——「苦只有这么多,不会更多」。而产生此苦的爱欲,即是「这是苦集」。那苦与集二者在某处止息、不再转起的涅槃,即是「这是苦灭」。能证得彼涅槃的圣道,即是「这是导向苦灭之道」。他同样藉由通达自相,如实了知这些。显示巴利原文
Cittaṃabhinīharatīti vipassanā cittaṃ tanninnaṃ tappoṇaṃ tappabbhāraṃ karoti. So idaṃ dukkhantiādīsu ‘‘ettakaṃ dukkhaṃ, na ito bhiyyo’’ti sabbampi dukkhasaccaṃ sarasalakkhaṇapaṭivedhena yathābhūtaṃ pajānātīti attho. Tassa ca dukkhassa nibbattikaṃ taṇhaṃ ‘‘ayaṃ dukkhasamudayo’’ti. Tadubhayampi yaṃ ṭhānaṃ patvā nirujjhati, taṃ tesaṃ appavattiṃ nibbānaṃ ‘‘ayaṃ dukkhanirodho’’ti; tassa ca sampāpakaṃ ariyamaggaṃ ‘‘ayaṃ dukkhanirodhagāminī paṭipadā’’ti sarasalakkhaṇapaṭivedhena yathābhūtaṃ pajānātīti attho.
如此,以自性开示诸谛之后,再依烦恼,以别义显示,故宣说“这些漏”等语。“他如此知,如此见者”,即当这位比丘如此知、如此见时,世尊便开显了与观同达究竟之道。“从欲漏”指从欲漏中。“解脱”以此语显示道的刹那。“已解脱”以此语显示果的刹那。“‘已解脱’之智生起”则显示省察智。“生已尽”等语句,是说明此漏尽者的阶位。以此智故,漏尽者于省察时,了知“生已尽”等。显示巴利原文
Evaṃ sarūpato saccāni dassetvā puna kilesavasena pariyāyato dassento ‘‘ime āsavā’’tiādimāha. Tassa evaṃ jānato evaṃ passatoti tassa bhikkhuno evaṃ jānantassa evaṃ passantassa, saha vipassanāya koṭippattaṃ maggaṃ kathesi. Kāmāsavāti kāmāsavato. Vimuccatīti iminā maggakkhaṇaṃ dasseti. Vimuttasminti iminā phalakkhaṇaṃ. Vimuttamiti ñāṇaṃ hotīti iminā paccavekkhaṇañāṇaṃ. Khīṇā jātītiādīhi tassa bhūmiṃ. Tena hi ñāṇena khīṇāsavo paccavekkhanto khīṇā jātītiādīni pajānāti.
然而,他哪一种“生”已尽?又如何了知?非过去生已尽,过去已灭尽故;非未来生,未来无精进作用故;非现在生,现在正存在故。然而,由于未修习圣道,那种会在四生、五蕴诸有中现起的生——以四生、五蕴差别为相的生,因圣道已修习,在未来成为必定不生的法,故说为“尽”。对于所断的烦恼,他以道修习省察而了知:“烦恼既无,虽尚有业,未来亦不再结生。”他如此了知。显示巴利原文
Katamā panassa jāti khīṇā? Kathañca naṃ pajānātīti? Na tāvassa atītā jāti khīṇā, pubbeva khīṇattā. Na anāgatā, anāgate vāyāmābhāvato. Na paccuppannā, vijjamānattā. Yā pana maggassa abhāvitattā uppajjeyya ekacatupañcavokārabhavesu ekacatupañcakkhandhappabhedā jāti, sā maggassa bhāvitattā āyatiṃ anuppādadhammataṃ āpajjanena khīṇā. Taṃ so maggabhāvanāya pahīnakilese paccavekkhitvā ‘‘kilesābhāve vijjamānampi kammaṃ āyatiṃ appaṭisandhikaṃva hotī’’ti jānanto pajānāti.
“已住”:指已住、已遍住。“梵行”:指道梵行。善凡夫与七种有学,可称住于梵行;而阿拉汉是已住者,故他在省察自身梵行之住时,了知“梵行已住”。“应作已作”:对于四圣谛,由四种道以遍知、断、作证、修习的方式,应作的十六种事已经成就。各各道所应断的烦恼已断,即苦之根本已彻底断除。善凡夫等仍在造作彼业,而阿拉汉是已作应作者,故他在省察自身所应作时,了知“应作已作”。“不再有来生”:此时,他了知“为了‘再有’的如此状态——即此十六种业的状态或烦恼灭尽的状态——我无复有道修习之业须作。”或者,“来生”指以此状态、以这些方式;在现存诸蕴的相续之后,我无有剩余的蕴相续。而已遍知的五蕴存续,正如断根的树;它们在最后心灭尽时,便如无执取的火焰般熄灭,入于不可言说之境。显示巴利原文
Vusitanti vutthaṃ parivutthaṃ. Brahmacariyanti maggabrahmacariyaṃ. Puthujjanakalyāṇakena hi saddhiṃ satta sekkhā brahmacariyavāsaṃ vasanti nāma, khīṇāsavo vutthavāso, tasmā so attano brahmacariyavāsaṃ paccavekkhanto vusitaṃ brahmacariyanti pajānāti. Kataṃkaraṇīyanti catūsu saccesu catūhi maggehi pariññāpahānasacchikiriyābhāvanāvasena soḷasavidhaṃ kiccaṃ niṭṭhāpitaṃ. Tena tena maggena pahātabbakilesā pahīnā, dukkhamūlaṃ samucchinnanti attho. Puthujjanakalyāṇakādayo hi taṃ kiccaṃ karonti, khīṇāsavo katakaraṇīyo. Tasmā so attano karaṇīyaṃ paccavekkhanto kataṃ karaṇīyanti pajānāti. Nāparaṃ itthattāyāti idāni puna itthabhāvāya evaṃ soḷasakiccabhāvāya kilesakkhayabhāvāya vā kattabbaṃ maggabhāvanākiccaṃ me natthīti pajānāti. Atha vā itthattāyāti itthabhāvato imasmā evaṃ pakārā. Idāni vattamānakhandhasantānā aparaṃ khandhasantānaṃ mayhaṃ natthi. Ime pana pañcakkhandhā pariññātā tiṭṭhanti chinnamūlakā rukkhā viya, te carimakacittanirodhena anupādāno viya jātavedo nibbāyissanti apaṇṇattikabhāvañca gamissantīti pajānāti.
249 “山略”(Pabbatasaṅkhepa)指山顶。“不浊”(Anāvila)即无泥。“贝螺”(sippisambuka)即贝类和螺类。“砂石瓦砾”(sakkharakathala)即砂石和碎瓦。“鱼群”(macchagumba)即鱼的群体。“或住或游”(Tiṭṭhantampi carantampi):在此,砂石瓦砾唯住,其余(贝螺与鱼)则既有游也有住。然而,如同牛群中有一部分走动时,即便其余站着或卧着,也会以“这些牛在走动”而被称为走动;同样地,以唯住的砂石瓦砾,其余二者也被称为住;以游动的其余二者,砂石瓦砾也被称为游。在那里,有眼之人站在岸边观看贝螺等时,便是它们清晰显现之时;应知,比丘引导心朝向漏尽而坐时,即是四圣谛清晰显现之时。显示巴利原文
249.Pabbatasaṅkhepeti pabbatamatthake. Anāviloti nikkaddamo. Sippiyo ca sambukā ca sippisambukaṃ. Sakkharā ca kathalāni ca sakkharakathalaṃ. Macchānaṃ gumbā ghaṭāti macchagumbaṃ. Tiṭṭhantampi carantampīti ettha sakkharakathalaṃ tiṭṭhatiyeva, itarāni carantipi tiṭṭhantipi. Yathā pana antarantarā ṭhitāsupi nisinnāsupi vijjamānāsupi ‘‘etā gāvo carantī’’ti carantiyo upādāya itarāpi carantīti vuccanti. Evaṃ tiṭṭhantameva sakkharakathalaṃ upādāya itarampi dvayaṃ tiṭṭhantanti vuttaṃ. Itarañca dvayaṃ carantaṃ upādāya sakkharakathalampi carantanti vuttaṃ. Tattha cakkhumato purisassa tīre ṭhatvā passato sippikasambukādīnaṃ vibhūtakālo viya āsavānaṃ khayāya cittaṃ abhinīharitvā nisinnassa bhikkhuno catunnaṃ saccānaṃ vibhūtakālo daṭṭhabboti.
至此,已开示观智、意所成智、神变智、天耳智、他心智、宿住智、由天眼成就的未来分智与随业趣智二种、天眼智、漏尽智,共为十种智。应当了知它们的所缘差别:其中,观智以劣、胜、过去、未来、现在、内、外为七所缘。意所成智唯以应被化作的色处为所缘,故为劣、现在、外所缘。漏尽智以无量、外、不可说为所缘。其余诸智的所缘差别,在《清净道论》中已有说。世尊以阿拉汉果为究竟,而结束教说:“没有比这更高、更殊胜的沙门果,无论以任何方式。”显示巴利原文
Ettāvatā vipassanāñāṇaṃ, manomayañāṇaṃ, iddhividhañāṇaṃ, dibbasotañāṇaṃ, cetopariyañāṇaṃ, pubbenivāsañāṇaṃ, dibbacakkhuvasena nipphannaṃ anāgataṃsañāṇayathākammūpagañāṇadvayaṃ, dibbacakkhuñāṇaṃ, āsavakkhayañāṇanti dasa ñāṇāni niddiṭṭhāni honti. Tesaṃ ārammaṇavibhāgo jānitabbo – tattha vipassanāñāṇaṃ parittamahaggataatītānāgatapaccuppannaajjhattabahiddhāvasena sattavidhārammaṇaṃ. Manomayañāṇaṃ nimmitabbarūpāyatanamattameva ārammaṇaṃ karotīti parittapaccuppannabahiddhārammaṇaṃ. Āsavakkhayañāṇaṃ appamāṇabahiddhānavattabbārammaṇaṃ. Avasesānaṃ ārammaṇabhedo visuddhimagge vutto. Uttaritaraṃ vā paṇītataraṃ vāti yena kenaci pariyāyena ito seṭṭhataraṃ sāmaññaphalaṃ nāma natthīti bhagavā arahattanikūṭena desanaṃ niṭṭhāpesi.
阿阇世王表白近事男身份的谈论显示巴利原文
Ajātasattuupāsakattapaṭivedanākathā
250 王处处称扬随喜,恭敬听闻全部初、中、后法之后,心想:“长久以来,我向众多沙门、婆罗门询问这些问题,如同捣谷壳一般,不曾获得任何实质。啊!世尊具足功德,为我解答这些问题,犹如点燃千盏灯,放出大光明。我长久以来,由于不了知十力世尊的功德威力,一直被欺诳。”他由忆念佛陀功德而生起五种喜,身体为喜悦所触,为了表明自己的净信,而表明了近事男的身份。为显示此,开始说:“当这样说时,王……”等。显示巴利原文
250. Rājā tattha tattha sādhukāraṃ pavattento ādimajjhapariyosānaṃ sakkaccaṃ sutvā ‘‘ciraṃ vatamhi ime pañhe puthū samaṇabrāhmaṇe pucchanto, thuse koṭṭento viya kiñci sāraṃ nālatthaṃ, aho vata bhagavato guṇasampadā, yo me dīpasahassaṃ jālento viya mahantaṃ ālokaṃ katvā ime pañhe vissajjesi. Suciraṃ vatamhi dasabalassa guṇānubhāvaṃ ajānanto vañcito’’ti cintetvā buddhaguṇānussaraṇasambhūtāya pañcavidhāya pītiyā phuṭasarīro attano pasādaṃ āvikaronto upāsakattaṃ paṭivedesi. Taṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘evaṃ vutte rājā’’tiādi āraddhaṃ.
在此,“殊胜(abhikkanta),尊者”:此“abhikkanta”一词出现在耗尽、美妙、端严、随喜等义中。例如“尊者,夜已尽(abhikkantā),初夜分已过,比丘僧团久坐”等(增支部8.20),此处是指耗尽。又如“此人我能认可,在这四种人中,他是更殊胜(abhikkantataro)、更上妙者”等(增支部4.100),此处是指美妙。显示巴利原文
Tattha abhikkantaṃ, bhanteti ayaṃ abhikkantasaddo khayasundarābhirūpaabbhanumodanesu dissati. ‘‘Abhikkantā bhante, ratti, nikkhanto paṭhamo yāmo, ciranisinno bhikkhusaṅgho’’tiādīsu (a. ni. 8.20) hi khaye dissati. ‘‘Ayaṃ me puggalo khamati, imesaṃ catunnaṃ puggalānaṃ abhikkantataro ca paṇītataro cā’’tiādīsu (a. ni. 4.100) sundare.
‘‘Ko me vandati pādāni, iddhiyā yasasā jalaṃ; Abhikkantena vaṇṇena, sabbā obhāsayaṃ disā’’ti. (vi. va. 857);
于“美丽”等语境中,指端正、英俊。在“乔达摩尊者!殊胜(abhikkantaṃ)”等(《波罗夷》15)的用法中,是指随喜赞叹。此处同样也是随喜赞叹的意思。正因为是随喜赞叹,所以应当理解为是在说:“善哉、善哉,尊者”。显示巴利原文
Ādīsu abhirūpe. ‘‘Abhikkantaṃ bho, gotamā’’tiādīsu (pārā. 15) abbhanumodane. Idhāpi abbhanumodaneyeva. Yasmā ca abbhanumodane, tasmā ‘sādhu sādhu bhante’ti vuttaṃ hotīti veditabbo.
在恐惧、愤怒、称赞、急切、惊诧的情形下,
以及在欢笑、忧伤与欣喜之中,智者会使用重复语。
显示巴利原文 Bhaye kodhe pasaṃsāyaṃ, turite kotūhalacchare; Hāse soke pasāde ca, kare āmeḍitaṃ budhoti.
依此特征应知,此处是出于净信与赞叹而两度宣说。或者,可将“abhikkantaṃ”理解为:极为可爱、极为悦意、极为美好。显示巴利原文
Iminā ca lakkhaṇena idha pasādavasena, pasaṃsāvasena cāyaṃ dvikkhattuṃ vuttoti veditabbo. Athavā abhikkantanti abhikantaṃ atiiṭṭhaṃ atimanāpaṃ atisundaranti vuttaṃ hoti.
此处,以一个“殊胜”赞叹说法,以另一个表达自身的净信。此中意趣为:“尊者,依于世尊的说法,这是殊胜的;依于因听闻世尊说法而生起的我的净信,这也是殊胜的。”或者,这是就世尊的言教,针对种种成双之义而作的赞叹:世尊的言教是“殊胜”的,因其能断除过失;是“殊胜”的,因其能成就功德。同样地,由此而生信、生慧;义理丰沛,音韵优美;字句浅近,义趣甚深;音声悦耳,深入人心;不抬高自己,不贬低他人;以悲心而清凉,以智慧而明净;初闻即感愉悦,经反复推敲而愈显坚实;聆听时得安乐,审察时获利益。如是等,应如此综合理解。显示巴利原文
Ettha ekena abhikkantasaddena desanaṃ thometi, ekena attano pasādaṃ. Ayañhettha adhippāyo, abhikkantaṃ bhante, yadidaṃ bhagavato dhammadesanā, ‘abhikkantaṃ’ yadidaṃ bhagavato dhammadesanaṃ āgamma mama pasādoti. Bhagavatoyeva vā vacanaṃ dve dve atthe sandhāya thometi. Bhagavato vacanaṃ abhikkantaṃ dosanāsanato, abhikkantaṃ guṇādhigamanato. Tathā saddhājananato, paññājananato, sātthato, sabyañjanato, uttānapadato, gambhīratthato, kaṇṇasukhato, hadayaṅgamato, anattukkaṃsanato , aparavambhanato, karuṇāsītalato, paññāvadātato, āpātharamaṇīyato, vimaddakkhamato, suyyamānasukhato, vīmaṃsiyamānahitatoti evamādīhi yojetabbaṃ.
随后,更以四个譬喻来赞叹说法本身。其中,“nikkujjitaṃ”指被倒置的,或面部朝下的。“ukkujjeyya”指将其翻转,令面部朝上。“paṭicchannaṃ”指被草叶等所覆盖。“vivareyya”指揭开。“mūḷhassa vā”指对迷路者。“maggaṃ ācikkheyya”指牵着他的手说:“这便是道路。”“andhakāre”指由四种因素所成的黑暗,即黑半月十四日、午夜、密林及浓云。以上是字面未显的词义。接下来是带义理的连贯解释:譬如有人将倒置之物翻转过来,同样地,世尊将我这背离正法、陷于非正法之人,从非正法中提携而出;譬如有人揭开覆盖之物,同样地,自迦叶世尊的教法隐没以来,长期为邪见丛林所遮蔽的教法,由您揭开;譬如有人为迷路者指示道路,同样地,为走上邪道、步入歧途的我,开显了通达天界与解脱的道路;譬如有人在黑暗中执持油灯,同样地,为沉没于愚痴黑暗、不见佛陀等宝相的我,您手持能摧毁那遮蔽之愚痴黑暗的说法之灯。世尊正是以这些方式加以阐明。显示巴利原文
Tato parampi catūhi upamāhi desanaṃyeva thometi. Tattha nikkujjitanti adhomukhaṭhapitaṃ heṭṭhāmukhajātaṃ vā. Ukkujjeyyāti upari mukhaṃ kareyya. Paṭicchannanti tiṇapaṇṇādichāditaṃ. Vivareyyāti ugghāṭeyya. Mūḷhassa vāti disāmūḷhassa. Maggaṃ ācikkheyyāti hatthe gahetvā ‘‘esa maggo’’ti vadeyya, andhakāreti kāḷapakkhacātuddasī aḍḍharattaghanavanasaṇḍameghapaṭalehi caturaṅge tame. Ayaṃ tāva anuttānapadattho. Ayaṃ pana sādhippāyayojanā. Yathā koci nikkujjitaṃ ukkujjeyya, evaṃ saddhammavimukhaṃ asaddhamme patitaṃ maṃ asaddhammā vuṭṭhāpentana. Yathā paṭicchannaṃ vivareyya, evaṃ kassapassa bhagavato sāsanantaradhānā pabhuti micchādiṭṭhigahanapaṭicchannaṃ sāsanaṃ vivarantena, yathā mūḷhassa maggaṃ ācikkheyya, evaṃ kummaggamicchāmaggappaṭipannassa me saggamokkhamaggaṃ āvikarontena, yathā andhakāre telapajjotaṃ dhāreyya, evaṃ mohandhakāranimuggassa me buddhādiratanarūpāni apassato tappaṭicchādakamohandhakāraviddhaṃsakadesanāpajjotadhārakena mayhaṃ bhagavatā etehi pariyāyehi pakāsitattā anekapariyāyena dhammo pakāsitoti.
如此赞叹说法之后,便因这一说法对三宝生起净信心,为表达此净信而说出“esāhaṃ”等语。其中,“esāhaṃ”即“我这样”。“Bhagavantaṃ saraṇaṃ gacchāmi”的意思是:世尊是我的皈依、我的依怙,是苦难的救护者,也是利益的施予者。怀着这样的心意,我走向世尊、亲近世尊、侍奉世尊、承事世尊;也可以说,以此而了知、觉悟。因为这些词根既有“去”的意思,也有“了知”的意思,所以“gacchāmi”亦可表达“我知、我觉”。至于“Dhammañca bhikkhusaṅghañca”,其中所说的法,是指已证圣道、现证灭谛,并且正在随顺教导修行,不再堕入四恶趣,能护持修行者,故称为法;从义理上说,即指圣道与涅槃。经中也曾这样说:“诸比丘,凡是有为法,其中八支圣道被说为最上”等广说。不唯圣道与涅槃,连同圣果及教法也都属于法。这在《伞盖年轻人天宫》里也曾说过:显示巴利原文
Evaṃ desanaṃ thometvā imāya desanāya ratanattaye pasannacitto pasannākāraṃ karonto esāhantiādimāha. Tattha esāhanti eso ahaṃ . Bhagavantaṃ saraṇaṃ gacchāmīti bhagavā me saraṇaṃ, parāyanaṃ, aghassa tātā, hitassa ca vidhātāti. Iminā adhippāyena bhagavantaṃ gacchāmi bhajāmi sevāmi payirupāsāmi, evaṃ vā jānāmi bujjhāmīti. Yesañhi dhātūnaṃ gatiattho, buddhipi tesaṃ attho. Tasmā gacchāmīti imassa jānāmi bujjhāmīti ayampi attho vutto. Dhammañca bhikkhusaṅghañcāti ettha pana adhigatamagge sacchikatanirodhe yathānusiṭṭhaṃ paṭipajjamāne catūsu apāyesu apatamāne dhāretīti dhammo, so atthato ariyamaggo ceva nibbānañca. Vuttañcetaṃ – ‘‘yāvatā, bhikkhave, dhammā saṅkhatā, ariyo aṭṭhaṅgiko maggo tesaṃ aggamakkhāyatī’’ti (a. ni. 4.34) vitthāro. Na kevalañca ariyamaggo ceva nibbānañca. Api ca kho ariyaphalehi saddhiṃ pariyattidhammopi . Vuttañhetaṃ chattamāṇavakavimāne –
离贪、不动、无忧的无为之法,无所违逆;
此甘美、纯熟、善分别的法,你应以此法为皈依。」
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Rāgavirāgamanejamasokaṃ, dhammamasaṅkhatamappaṭikūlaṃ; Madhuramimaṃ paguṇaṃ suvibhattaṃ, dhammamimaṃ saraṇatthamupehī’’ti. (vi. va. 887);
在这里,‘离贪’是说圣道;‘不动无忧’是说圣果;‘无为之法’是说涅槃;‘不违逆、甘甜、熟悉、善分别’,是指由三藏善加分别安立的法蕴。所谓‘僧伽’,由正见与戒行的和合而聚集,从义理上即是八种圣补特伽罗的集合。同一座天宫中也这样说:显示巴利原文
Ettha hi rāgavirāgoti maggo kathito. Anejamasokanti phalaṃ. Dhammamasaṅkhatanti nibbānaṃ. Appaṭikūlaṃ madhuramimaṃ paguṇaṃ suvibhattanti piṭakattayena vibhattā dhammakkhandhāti. Diṭṭhisīlasaṃghātena saṃhatoti saṅgho, so atthato aṭṭha ariyapuggalasamūho. Vuttañhetaṃ tasmiññeva vimāne –
于四对清净的士夫中,所行布施被说为有大果报;
这八位见法的补特伽罗,你应当皈依这样的僧伽。”
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Yattha ca dinnamahapphalamāhu, catūsu sucīsu purīsayugesu; Aṭṭha ca puggaladhammadasā te, saṅghamimaṃ saraṇatthamupehī’’ti. (vi. va. 888);
比丘之僧伽即称为比丘僧团。至此,国王宣说了三皈依。显示巴利原文
Bhikkhūnaṃ saṅgho bhikkhusaṅgho. Ettāvatā rājā tīṇi saraṇagamanāni paṭivedesi.
皈依论显示巴利原文
Saraṇagamanakathā
现在,为了善巧了知这些皈依,应当明了这些法义:什么是皈依、什么是皈依之行、谁在皈依、皈依的类别、皈依的果报、杂染与破坏。具体而言,先从皈依的意义说起:由于‘它杀害’,故称为‘皈依’。对于已皈依的人,正是通过这种皈依之行,能杀害、摧毁怖畏、惊恐、痛苦及恶趣的杂染——这就是‘皈依’的含义,而此处唯指三宝。显示巴利原文
Idāni tesu saraṇagamanesu kosallatthaṃ saraṇaṃ, saraṇagamanaṃ, yo ca saraṇaṃ gacchati, saraṇagamanappabhedo, saraṇagamanaphalaṃ, saṅkileso, bhedoti, ayaṃ vidhi veditabbo. Seyyathidaṃ – saraṇatthato tāva hiṃsatīti saraṇaṃ. Saraṇagatānaṃ teneva saraṇagamanena bhayaṃ santāsaṃ dukkhaṃ duggatiparikilesaṃ hanati vināsetīti attho, ratanattayassevetaṃ adhivacanaṃ.
又或,佛陀能由令利益生起、令非利益止息而杀害众生之怖畏;法能由度脱生存的旷野、施予安稳而杀害怖畏;僧伽能由令微小的善因获得广大的果报而杀害怖畏。由此,依此理趣,三宝即是‘皈依’。当对三宝怀有净信与敬重,以此摧毁烦恼,并生起‘以三宝为依怙’的作意时,这种心的生起,即是‘皈依之行’。具足这种心的众生,即为皈依三宝。亦即,以上述心生起的方式,心想:‘此三宝是我之皈依,此为我之依怙’,从而投靠,这就是其义。如此,便先了解了皈依、皈依之行、谁在皈依这三项内容。显示巴利原文
Atha vā hite pavattanena ahitā ca nivattanena sattānaṃ bhayaṃ hiṃsati buddho. Bhavakantārā uttāraṇena assāsadānena ca dhammo; appakānampi kārānaṃ vipulaphalapaṭilābhakaraṇena saṅgho . Tasmā imināpi pariyāyena ratanattayaṃ saraṇaṃ. Tappasādataggarutāhi vihatakileso tapparāyaṇatākārappavatto cittuppādo saraṇagamanaṃ. Taṃ samaṅgīsatto saraṇaṃ gacchati. Vuttappakārena cittuppādena etāni me tīṇi ratanāni saraṇaṃ, etāni parāyaṇanti evaṃ upetīti attho. Evaṃ tāva saraṇaṃ, saraṇagamanaṃ, yo ca saraṇaṃ gacchati, idaṃ tayaṃ veditabbaṃ.
皈依之行有二种:出世间与世间。其中,出世间皈依行,是见谛者在证圣道的刹那,断除皈依行杂染,从所缘上说,它以涅槃为所缘;从作用上说,能成就对全部三宝的皈依。世间皈依行,则是凡夫通过镇伏皈依行杂染,从所缘上说,以忆念佛等功德而成就。从义理而言,世间皈依行即是对佛陀等生起信心,以及信心所成之正见——这在十种福业事中称为“见正直业”。此皈依行表现为四种方式:自我奉献、以彼为依怙、成为弟子、合掌。显示巴利原文
Saraṇagamanappabhede pana duvidhaṃ saraṇagamanaṃ – lokuttaraṃ lokiyañca. Tattha lokuttaraṃ diṭṭhasaccānaṃ maggakkhaṇe saraṇagamanupakkilesasamucchedena ārammaṇato nibbānārammaṇaṃ hutvā kiccato sakalepi ratanattaye ijjhati. Lokiyaṃ puthujjanānaṃ saraṇagamanupakkilesavikkhambhanena ārammaṇato buddhādiguṇārammaṇaṃ hutvā ijjhati. Taṃ atthato buddhādīsu vatthūsu saddhāpaṭilābho saddhāmūlikā ca sammādiṭṭhi dasasu puññakiriyavatthūsu diṭṭhijukammanti vuccati. Tayidaṃ catudhā vattati – attasanniyyātanena, tapparāyaṇatāya, sissabhāvūpagamanena, paṇipātenāti.
此中,“自我奉献”即如是献自身于三宝:“从今日起,我以己身奉献于佛陀,奉献于法,奉献于僧。”“以彼为依怙”即如是成为以彼为依怙之状态:“从今日起,我以佛为依怙,以法为依怙,以僧为依怙。请护念我。”“成为弟子”即如是成为弟子之状态:“从今日起,我为佛陀弟子、法弟子、僧弟子。请护念我。”“合掌”即对佛陀等作最上恭敬:“从今日起,我唯于三宝这三种对象,行问讯、起迎、合掌及和敬行为。请护念我。”于此四种方式中,成就任何一种,即已获得皈依。显示巴利原文
Tattha attasanniyyātanaṃ nāma – ‘‘ajjādiṃ katvā ahaṃ attānaṃ buddhassa niyyātemi, dhammassa, saṅghassā’’ti evaṃ buddhādīnaṃ attapariccajanaṃ. Tapparāyaṇatā nāma ‘‘ajjādiṃ katvā ‘ahaṃ buddhaparāyaṇo, dhammaparāyaṇo, saṅghaparāyaṇo’ti. Maṃ dhārethā’’ti evaṃ tapparāyaṇabhāvo. Sissabhāvūpagamanaṃ nāma – ‘‘ajjādiṃ katvā – ‘ahaṃ buddhassa antevāsiko, dhammassa, saṅghassa antevāsiko’ti maṃ dhārethā’’ti evaṃ sissabhāvūpagamo. Paṇipāto nāma – ‘‘ajjādiṃ katvā ahaṃ abhivādanapaccuṭṭhānaañjalikammasāmīcikammaṃ buddhādīnaṃyeva tiṇṇaṃ vatthūnaṃ karomī’ti maṃ dhārethā’’ti evaṃ buddhādīsu paramanipaccākāro. Imesañhi catunnaṃ ākārānaṃ aññatarampi karontena gahitaṃyeva hoti saraṇaṃ.
而且,亦可如此理解“自我奉献”:“我奉献自身于世尊,奉献于法,奉献于僧,奉献生命;我身已全然奉献,我命已全然奉献;我尽形寿皈依佛,佛为我皈依、为庇护、为救护。”又,当知“成为弟子”的皈依方式,即如大迦叶尊者的皈依:“若我得见导师,唯见世尊;若我得见善逝,唯见世尊;若我得见正自觉者,唯见世尊。”(《相应部》2.154)显示巴利原文
Api ca bhagavato attānaṃ pariccajāmi, dhammassa, saṅghassa, attānaṃ pariccajāmi, jīvitaṃ pariccajāmi, pariccattoyeva me attā, pariccattaṃyeva jīvitaṃ, jīvitapariyantikaṃ buddhaṃ saraṇaṃ gacchāmi, buddho me saraṇaṃ leṇaṃ tāṇanti ; evampi attasanniyyātanaṃ veditabbaṃ. ‘‘Satthārañca vatāhaṃ passeyyaṃ, bhagavantameva passeyyaṃ, sugatañca vatāhaṃ passeyyaṃ, bhagavantameva passeyyaṃ, sammāsambuddhañca vatāhaṃ passeyyaṃ, bhagavantameva passeyya’’nti (saṃ. ni. 2.154). Evampi mahākassapassa saraṇagamanaṃ viya sissabhāvūpagamanaṃ veditabbaṃ.
我将游行,从村到村,从城到城;
礼敬正自觉者,以及法的善法性。”(《经集》194)
显示巴利原文 ‘‘So ahaṃ vicarissāmi, gāmā gāmaṃ purā puraṃ; Namassamāno sambuddhaṃ, dhammassa ca sudhammata’’nti. (su. ni. 194);
同样,应知阿拉瓦迦等的皈依,即是‘以彼为依怙’的皈依方式。那时,梵摩婆罗门从座而起,将上衣搭于一肩,以头顶礼世尊双足,以口亲吻、以双手抚摩,并自报姓名:‘我是梵摩婆罗门,乔达摩尊者!我是梵摩婆罗门,乔达摩尊者!’(《中部》2.394)如此,即可知‘合掌’的皈依方式。显示巴利原文
Evampi āḷavakādīnaṃ saraṇagamanaṃ viya tapparāyaṇatā veditabbā. Atha kho brahmāyu brāhmaṇo uṭṭhāyāsanā ekaṃsaṃ uttarāsaṅgaṃ karitvā bhagavato pādesu sirasā nipatitvā bhagavato pādāni mukhena ca paricumbati, pāṇīhi ca parisambāhati, nāmañca sāveti – ‘‘brahmāyu ahaṃ, bho gotama brāhmaṇo, brahmāyu ahaṃ, bho gotama brāhmaṇo’’ti (ma. ni. 2.394) evampi paṇipāto daṭṭhabbo.
然而,这皈依依于亲戚、恐惧、老师、应供者而有四种。其中,唯有对应供者合掌方成皈依,余者不然。因为皈依唯以最胜者为对象而执取,亦唯以最胜者而破坏。因此,若有释迦族人或拘利族人,心想“佛陀是我们的亲戚”而礼敬,其皈依实未执取。或有人心想“沙门乔达摩受国王供养,具大威力,若不礼敬恐致不利”,出于恐惧而礼敬,如此皈依亦未执取。又或有人在菩萨时期曾从世尊修学某些内容,至佛陀时期忆念而起……显示巴利原文
So panesa ñātibhayācariyadakkhiṇeyyavasena catubbidho hoti. Tattha dakkhiṇeyyapaṇipātena saraṇagamanaṃ hoti, na itarehi. Seṭṭhavaseneva hi saraṇaṃ gaṇhāti, seṭṭhavasena ca bhijjati. Tasmā yo sākiyo vā koliyo vā – ‘‘buddho amhākaṃ ñātako’’ti vandati, aggahitameva hoti saraṇaṃ. Yo vā – ‘‘samaṇo gotamo rājapūjito mahānubhāvo avandīyamāno anatthampi kareyyā’’ti bhayena vandati, aggahitameva hoti saraṇaṃ. Yo vā bodhisattakāle bhagavato santike kiñci uggahitaṃ saramāno buddhakāle vā –
智者居家,应将财富分作四份;
一份用以受用,两份用以营生;
第四份则应存起来,以备灾患。
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Catudhā vibhaje bhoge, paṇḍito gharamāvasaṃ; Ekena bhogaṃ bhuñjeyya, dvīhi kammaṃ payojaye; Catutthañca nidhāpeyya, āpadāsu bhavissatī’’ti. (dī. ni. 3.265);
如此领受教诫之后,若仅以‘他是我的老师’之心礼敬,则并不算执取了皈依;唯有以‘他是世间最上的应供者’之心礼敬,那才真正执取了皈依。显示巴利原文
Evarūpaṃ anusāsaniṃ uggahetvā – ‘‘ācariyo me’’ti vandati, aggahitameva hoti saraṇaṃ. Yo pana – ‘‘ayaṃ loke aggadakkhiṇeyyo’’ti vandati, teneva gahitaṃ hoti saraṇaṃ.
如是以此方式执取皈依的近事男或近事女,即使对已在异学中出家的亲戚,只因‘他是我的亲戚’而礼敬,其皈依亦不会毁坏,更遑论未出家者。同样,出于怖畏而礼敬国王时也是如此,因为那位国王受国人尊崇,若不礼敬恐会招致灾祸。再者,即使对教导任何技艺的外道老师,只因‘这是我的老师’而礼敬,皈依亦不会毁坏。应当如此了知皈依的差别。显示巴利原文
Evaṃ gahitasaraṇassa ca upāsakassa vā upāsikāya vā aññatitthiyesu pabbajitampi ñātiṃ – ‘‘ñātako me aya’’nti vandato saraṇagamanaṃ na bhijjati, pageva apabbajitaṃ. Tathā rājānaṃ bhayavasena vandato. So hi raṭṭhapūjitattā avandīyamāno anatthampi kareyyāti. Tathā yaṃ kiñci sippaṃ sikkhāpakaṃ titthiyampi – ‘‘ācariyo me aya’’nti vandatopi na bhijjati, evaṃ saraṇagamanappabhedo veditabbo.
其中,出世间皈依的异熟果是四种沙门果,利益的果则是一切苦的灭尽。正如经中所说:显示巴利原文
Ettha ca lokuttarassa saraṇagamanassa cattāri sāmaññaphalāni vipākaphalaṃ, sabbadukkhakkhayo ānisaṃsaphalaṃ. Vuttañhetaṃ –
「凡是皈依佛、皈依法与皈依僧的人,
能以正慧如实彻见四圣谛:
苦、苦的集起,以及苦的超越。
依此皈依,便能解脱一切众苦。”(《法句经》192)
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Yo ca buddhañca dhammañca, saṅghañca saraṇaṃ gato; Cattāri ariyasaccāni, sammappaññāya passati. Dukkhaṃ dukkhasamuppādaṃ, dukkhassa ca atikkamaṃ; Ariyaṃ aṭṭhaṅgikaṃ maggaṃ, dukkhūpasamagāminaṃ. Etaṃ kho saraṇaṃ khemaṃ, etaṃ saraṇamuttamaṃ; Etaṃ saraṇamāgamma, sabbadukkhā pamuccatī’’ti. (dha. pa. 192);
还应了知,对于亡者,由于未执取常等相,以此方式能获得利益果报。正如经中所说:“无有是处,绝无可能——一个具足正见的人,会将任何行执为常……会将任何行执为乐……会将任何法执为我……会夺取母亲的生命……夺取父亲的生命……夺取阿罗汉的生命……以染污心使如来流血……分裂僧团……会认定其他导师。绝无此理。”然而,在世俗层面,皈依的果报正是成就善趣与成就财富。正如经中所说:显示巴利原文
Api ca niccādito anupagamanādivasena petassa ānisaṃsaphalaṃ veditabbaṃ. Vuttañhetaṃ – ‘‘aṭṭhānametaṃ anavakāso, yaṃ diṭṭhisampanno puggalo kañci saṅkhāraṃ niccato upagaccheyya…pe… kañci saṅkhāraṃ sukhato…pe… kañci dhammaṃ attato upagaccheyya…pe… mātaraṃ jīvitā voropeyya…pe… pitaraṃ…pe… arahantaṃ…pe… paduṭṭhacitto tathāgatassa lohitaṃ uppādeyya…pe…. saṅghaṃ bhindeyya…pe… aññaṃ satthāraṃ uddiseyya, netaṃ ṭhānaṃ vijjatī’’ti (a. ni. 1.290). Lokiyassa pana saraṇagamanassa bhavasampadāpi bhogasampadāpi phalameva. Vuttañhetaṃ –
凡是已皈依佛陀者,他们绝不会投生恶趣;
舍弃人身之后,他们将圆满天众之身。
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Ye keci buddhaṃ saraṇaṃ gatāse, na te gamissanti apāyabhūmiṃ; Pahāya mānusaṃ dehaṃ, devakāyaṃ paripūressantī’’ti. (saṃ. ni. 1.37);
经中又这样说:“那时,天帝释与八万天众一同来到尊者大目犍连处……天帝释站在一旁,尊者大目犍连对他说道:‘天帝释,皈依佛是善的。天帝释,正是以皈依佛为因,此中有些众生在身坏命终之后,往生善趣、天界……他们在十个方面胜过其他天神:天寿、天色、天乐、天誉、天主权,以及天的色、声、香、味、触。’”(《相应部》4.341)同样地,此法也适用于法与僧。此外,依《鞞罗摩经》等经,亦当了知皈依的果报有此差别。如此,应了知皈依的果报。显示巴利原文
Aparampi vuttaṃ – ‘‘atha kho sakko devānamindo asītiyā devatāsahassehi saddhiṃ yenāyasmā mahāmoggallāno tenupasaṅkami…pe… ekamantaṃ ṭhitaṃ kho sakkaṃ devānamindaṃ āyasmā mahāmoggallāno etadavoca – ‘‘sādhu kho, devānaminda, buddhaṃ saraṇagamanaṃ hoti. Buddhaṃ saraṇagamanahetu kho, devānaminda, evamidhekacce sattā kāyassa bhedā paraṃ maraṇā sugatiṃ saggaṃ lokaṃ upapajjanti…pe… te aññe deve dasahi ṭhānehi adhigaṇhanti – dibbena āyunā, dibbena vaṇṇena, dibbena sukhena, dibbena yasena, dibbena ādhipateyyena, dibbehi rūpehi saddehi gandhehi rasehi phoṭṭhabbehī’’ti (saṃ. ni. 4.341). Esa nayo dhamme ca saṅghe ca. Api ca velāmasuttādīnaṃ vasenāpi saraṇagamanassa phalaviseso veditabbo. Evaṃ saraṇagamanassa phalaṃ veditabbaṃ.
其中,世间的皈依在三所依处会被无知、怀疑、邪智等染污,无大光明,亦无广大力用。出世间的皈依则无有染污。世间皈依的破坏有两种:有过的与无过的。其中,有过的破坏因投靠其他导师等而发生,会产生不可爱的果报;无过的破坏发生在命终之时,因为此时不再有异熟,故无果报。然而,出世间的皈依则完全没有破坏。即使转生他世,圣弟子也不会认定其他导师。如此,应了知皈依的染污与破坏。显示巴利原文
Tattha ca lokiyasaraṇagamanaṃ tīsu vatthūsu aññāṇasaṃsayamicchāñāṇādīhi saṃkilissati, na mahājutikaṃ hoti, na mahāvipphāraṃ. Lokuttarassa natthi saṃkileso. Lokiyassa ca saraṇagamanassa duvidho bhedo – sāvajjo ca anavajjo ca. Tattha sāvajjo aññasatthārādīsu attasanniyyātanādīhi hoti, so ca aniṭṭhaphalo hoti. Anavajjo kālakiriyāya hoti, so avipākattā aphalo. Lokuttarassa pana nevatthi bhedo. Bhavantarepi hi ariyasāvako aññaṃ satthāraṃ na uddisatīti. Evaṃ saraṇagamanassa saṃkileso ca bhedo ca veditabboti.
“愿世尊忆持我为近事男”,意思是:愿世尊如此忆持我——“这是一位近事男”,也即请世尊了知。为通达近事男的种种类别,于此当知这些杂集:谁是近事男?为什么称为近事男?他的戒是什么?他的正命是什么?什么是退堕?什么是成就?显示巴利原文
Upāsakaṃ maṃ bhante bhagavā dhāretūti maṃ bhagavā ‘‘upāsako aya’’nti evaṃ dhāretu, jānātūti attho. Upāsakavidhikosallatthaṃ panettha – ko upāsako? Kasmā upāsakoti vuccati ? Kimassa sīlaṃ? Ko ājīvo? Kā vipatti? Kā sampattīti? Idaṃ pakiṇṇakaṃ veditabbaṃ.
其中,“谁是近事男”指任何已皈依的在家人。正如经中所说:“摩诃男,若人已皈依佛、已皈依法、已皈依僧,摩诃男,仅此而已,他便成为近事男。”(《相应部》5.1033)显示巴利原文
Tattha ko upāsakoti yo koci saraṇagato gahaṭṭho. Vuttañhetaṃ – ‘‘yato kho, mahānāma, buddhaṃ saraṇaṃ gato hoti, dhammaṃ saraṇaṃ gato hoti, saṅghaṃ saraṇaṃ gato hoti. Ettāvatā kho, mahānāma, upāsako hotī’’ti (saṃ. ni. 5.1033).
为什么称为近事男?因为他亲近承事三宝。即亲近承事佛陀,所以是近事男;同样地,亲近承事法、亲近承事僧伽。显示巴利原文
Kasmā upāsakoti ratanattayaṃ upāsanato. So hi buddhaṃ upāsatīti upāsako, tathā dhammaṃ saṃghaṃ.
什么是他的戒?即五种远离。如经中所说:“摩诃男,当近事男远离杀生,远离不与取,远离欲邪行,远离妄语,远离谷酒、果酒等诸酒类的放逸处,摩诃男,至此程度,近事男便是具戒者。”(《相应部》5.1033)显示巴利原文
Kimassasīlanti pañca veramaṇiyo. Yathāha – ‘‘yato kho, mahānāma, upāsako pāṇātipātā paṭivirato hoti, adinnādānā… kāmesumicchācārā… musāvādā… surāmerayamajjapamādaṭṭhānā paṭivirato hoti, ettāvatā kho, mahānāma, upāsako sīlavā hotī’’ti (saṃ. ni. 5.1033).
什么是他的正命?即舍弃五种邪命的贸易,以如法、公平的方式谋生。经中这样说:“诸比丘,有五种贸易,是近事男不应做的。哪五种?武器贸易,有情贸易,肉贸易,酒类贸易,毒贸易。诸比丘,这五种贸易,是近事男不应做的。”(《增支部》5.177)显示巴利原文
Koājīvoti pañca micchāvaṇijjā pahāya dhammena samena jīvitakappanaṃ. Vuttañhetaṃ – ‘‘pañcimā, bhikkhave, vaṇijjā upāsakena akaraṇīyā. Katamā pañca? Satthavaṇijjā, sattavaṇijjā, maṃsavaṇijjā, majjavaṇijjā, visavaṇijjā. Imā kho, bhikkhave, pañca vaṇijjā upāsakena akaraṇīyā’’ti (a. ni. 5.177).
什么是他的退堕?即他自身戒的退堕和正命的退堕,这就是他的退堕。此外,使他成为贱民、垢秽与受呵责者的那些,也是他的退堕,应当这样了知。而这些实质上就是不信等五种法。如经中所说:“诸比丘,具足五法的近事男,是近事男中的贱民、垢秽与受呵责者。哪五种?不信,恶戒,迷信吉兆,信吉兆而不信业,且向外寻求应供者并在那里先行致敬。”(《增支部》5.175)显示巴利原文
Kā vipattīti yā tasseva sīlassa ca ājīvassa ca vipatti, ayamassa vipatti. Api ca yāya esa caṇḍālo ceva hoti, malañca patikuṭṭho ca, sāpissa vipattīti veditabbā. Te ca atthato assaddhiyādayo pañca dhammā honti. Yathāha – ‘‘pañcahi, bhikkhave, dhammehi samannāgato upāsako upāsakacaṇḍālo ca hoti, upāsakamalañca, upāsakapatikuṭṭho ca. Katamehi pañcahi? Assaddho hoti, dussīlo hoti, kotūhalamaṅgaliko hoti, maṅgalaṃ pacceti, no kammaṃ, ito ca bahiddhā dakkhiṇeyyaṃ pariyesati, tattha ca pubbakāraṃ karotī’’ti (a. ni. 5.175).
什么是他的成就?也就是他的戒成就与正命成就,这即称为成就;而能令他成为宝等的信等五法,也是成就。正如经中所说:“诸比丘,具足五法的优婆塞,是优婆塞宝、是优婆塞莲花、是优婆塞白莲花。哪五种呢?有信、具戒、不迷信祥瑞、信业而不信祥瑞、不在此之外寻求应供者,而先行恭敬于此。”显示巴利原文
Kā sampattīti yā cassa sīlasampadā ceva ājīvasampadā ca, sā sampatti; ye cassa ratanabhāvādikarā saddhādayo pañca dhammā. Yathāha – ‘‘pañcahi, bhikkhave, dhammehi samannāgato upāsako upāsakaratanañca hoti, upāsakapadumañca, upāsakapuṇḍarīkañca. Katamehi pañcahi? Saddho hoti, sīlavā hoti, na kotūhalamaṅgaliko hoti, kammaṃ pacceti, no maṅgalaṃ, na ito bahiddhā dakkhiṇeyyaṃ gavesati, idha ca pubbakāraṃ karotī’’ti (a. ni. 5.175).
在“从今日起”这一表述中,“agga”一词出现于起始、末端、部分、最上等含义。如“朋友守门人,从今日起,我关闭尼干陀与尼干陀女之门”(《中部》2.70)等处,见于“起始”义。又如“即以那指尖触碰那指尖”“甘蔗尖、竹尖”(《论事》281)等处,见于“末端”义。又如“酸的部分、甜的部分、苦的部分,依精舍的部分或依僧房的部分来分配”(《小品》317)等处,见于“部分”义。又如“诸比丘,凡是无足……乃至……有足众生,如来被记为最上者”(《增支部》4.34)等处,见于“最上”义。然而在此处,应当视为“起始”义。因此,“从今日起”的意思是“以今日为起始”,应如此理解。其中“今日”即指今日本身。另有一种读作“ajjadagge”的语形,其中的“d”是连声字,意思仍是以今日为始。显示巴利原文
Ajjataggeti etthāyaṃ aggasaddo ādikoṭikoṭṭhāsaseṭṭhesu dissati. ‘‘Ajjatagge, samma dovārika, āvarāmi dvāraṃ nigaṇṭhānaṃ nigaṇṭhīna’’ntiādīsu (ma. ni. 2.70) hi ādimhi dissati. ‘‘Teneva aṅgulaggena taṃ aṅgulaggaṃ parāmaseyya . Ucchaggaṃ veḷagga’’ntiādīsu (kathā. 281) koṭiyaṃ. ‘‘Ambilaggaṃ vā madhuraggaṃ vā tittakaggaṃ vā vihāraggena vā pariveṇaggena vā bhājetu’’ntiādīsu (cūḷava. 317) koṭṭhāse. ‘‘Yāvatā, bhikkhave, sattā apadā vā…pe… tathāgato tesaṃ aggamakkhāyatī’’tiādīsu (a. ni. 4.34) seṭṭhe. Idha panāyaṃ ādimhi daṭṭhabbo. Tasmā ajjataggeti ajjataṃ ādiṃ katvāti evametthattho veditabbo. Ajjatanti ajjabhāvaṃ. Ajjadaggeti vā pāṭho, dakāro padasandhikaro. Ajja agganti attho.
“伴随生命”(pāṇupeta)意为由生命所伴随。只要我的生命还在延续,便以此生命为伴随,不以他者为师。我作为通过三种皈依而获得皈依的优婆塞、如法行事之人,愿世尊忆持我、了知我。即使有人用利剑砍断我的头,我也决不会说‘佛陀不是佛陀’、‘法不是法’、‘僧伽不是僧伽’。显示巴利原文
Pāṇupetanti pāṇehi upetaṃ. Yāva me jīvitaṃ pavattati, tāva upetaṃ anaññasatthukaṃ tīhi saraṇagamanehi saraṇaṃ gataṃ upāsakaṃ kappiyakārakaṃ maṃ bhagavā dhāretu jānātu. Ahañhi sacepi me tikhiṇena asinā sīsaṃ chindeyya, neva buddhaṃ ‘‘na buddho’’ti vā, dhammaṃ ‘‘na dhammo’’ti vā, saṅghaṃ ‘‘na saṅgho’’ti vā vadeyyanti.
就这样,他把自己奉献于皈依之后,便表白自己所犯的过失,说道:“尊者,过失压倒了我……”等等。其中,“过失”即罪过。“压倒了我”是指逾越我、制伏我而现起。“如法的法王”:此处“如法的”指依法而行的人;“法王”指唯以法成为王,不是通过弑父等非法而成王。“我剥夺了你的生命”即我夺走了你的命。“请接受”即请原谅。“为了未来的防护”是指为了在未来能够防护,为了不再造作这样的过失、罪过和失误。显示巴利原文
Evaṃ attasanniyyātanena saraṇaṃ gantvā attanā kataṃ aparādhaṃ pakāsento accayo maṃ, bhantetiādimāha. Tattha accayoti aparādho. Maṃ accagamāti maṃ atikkamma abhibhavitvā pavatto. Dhammikaṃ dhammarājānanti ettha dhammaṃ caratīti dhammiko. Dhammeneva rājā jāto, na pitughātanādinā adhammenāti dhammarājā. Jīvitā voropesinti jīvitā viyojesiṃ. Paṭiggaṇhātūti khamatu. Āyatiṃ saṃvarāyāti anāgate saṃvaratthāya. Puna evarūpassa aparādhassa dosassa khalitassa akaraṇatthāya.
251 “实哉”是一决定义的助词。“你如法而行”的意思是:你正如法之安立而行,也就是你请求了原谅。“你的那过失,我们接受”指:你的那个过失,我们予以原谅。“大王,这是圣者律中的增长”:大王,在圣者律中,在佛陀世尊的教法中,这称为增长。什么是增长?即见过失为过失,如法地补救,并于未来防护。在宣说此告白时,他以个人为对象而说:“若人见过失为过失,如法而行补救,于未来成就防护。”显示巴利原文
251.Tagghāti ekaṃse nipāto. Yathā dhammaṃ paṭikarosīti yathā dhammo ṭhito tatheva karosi, khamāpesīti vuttaṃ hoti. Taṃ te mayaṃ paṭiggaṇhāmāti taṃ tava aparādhaṃ mayaṃ khamāma. Vuḍḍhihesā, mahārāja ariyassa vinayeti esā, mahārāja, ariyassa vinaye buddhassa bhagavato sāsane vuḍḍhi nāma. Katamā? Yāyaṃ accayaṃ accayato disvā yathādhammaṃ paṭikaritvā āyatiṃ saṃvarāpajjanā, desanaṃ pana puggalādhiṭṭhānaṃ karonto – ‘‘yo accayaṃ accayato disvā yathādhammaṃ paṭikaroti, āyatiṃ saṃvaraṃ āpajjatī’’ti āha.
252 当世尊这样说时:“那么,尊者,现在我们……”其中,“那么”是表达言语意义的助词。他以“我们该走了”的语气这样说。“事务繁多”指有很多事务,“多所应作”是其同义词。“现在,你认为何时适当”意为:大王,现在你对于出发的时刻,若认为适当、若了知,那时刻你自己知道。这样说后,他右绕后离去:右绕三遍,将十指并拢、光芒闪耀的合掌放置于头顶,在视线所及处,面朝世尊后退,直到不见之处,以五体投地礼敬后离去。显示巴利原文
252.Evaṃ vutteti evaṃ bhagavatā vutte. Handa ca dāni mayaṃ bhanteti ettha handāti vacasāyatthe nipāto. So hi gamanavacasāyaṃ katvā evamāha. Bahukiccāti balavakiccā. Bahukaraṇīyāti tasseva vevacanaṃ. Yassadāni tvanti yassa idāni tvaṃ mahārāja gamanassa kālaṃ maññasi jānāsi, tassa kālaṃ tvameva jānāsīti vuttaṃ hoti. Padakkhiṇaṃ katvā pakkāmīti tikkhattuṃ padakkhiṇaṃ katvā dasanakhasamodhānasamujjalaṃ añjaliṃ sirasi patiṭṭhapetvā yāva dassanavisayaṃ bhagavato abhimukhova paṭikkamitvā dassanavijahanaṭṭhānabhūmiyaṃ pañcapatiṭṭhitena vanditvā pakkāmi.
253 “比丘们,这位王被摧毁了”(Khatāyaṃ, bhikkhave, rājā)的意思是:比丘们,这位王被摧毁了。“被毁伤了”(Upahatāyanti)的意思是:这位王被毁伤了。此处的含义是:比丘们,这位王已被摧毁、已被毁伤,立足处已破裂,他如此由自己摧毁了自己,以致无立足之处。“离尘”(Virajaṃ)指远离贪等尘染。“离垢”(Vītamalaṃ)正因为远离了贪等垢染,所以称为离垢。“法眼”(Dhammacakkhuṃ),或指对于诸法的眼,或指法所成的眼;在其他地方这是对三道的称谓,但此处仅指入流道。这里的意思是说:假如他没有杀害父亲,现在坐在这座上的他便能证得入流道,却因与恶友交往而出现了障难。尽管如此,由于他亲近如来、皈依了三宝,凭借我教法的广大威力,就如有人杀了一个男子后,仅以一把花作为惩罚便能获释一样,他将在铁釜地狱中再生,向下沉没三万年到达最底层,再向上浮起三万年到达最上层表面后,得以解脱。据说这也是世尊所说,只是未收录在经文中。显示巴利原文
253.Khatāyaṃ, bhikkhave, rājāti khato ayaṃ, bhikkhave, rājā. Upahatāyanti upahato ayaṃ. Idaṃ vuttaṃ hoti – ayaṃ, bhikkhave, rājā khato upahato bhinnapatiṭṭho jāto, tathānena attanāva attā khato, yathā attano patiṭṭhā na jātāti. Virajanti rāgarajādivirahitaṃ. Rāgamalādīnaṃyeva vigatattā vītamalaṃ. Dhammacakkhunti dhammesu vā cakkhuṃ, dhammamayaṃ vā cakkhuṃ, aññesu ṭhānesu tiṇṇaṃ maggānametaṃ adhivacanaṃ. Idha pana sotāpattimaggasseva. Idaṃ vuttaṃ hoti – sace iminā pitā ghātito nābhavissa, idāni idhevāsane nisinno sotāpattimaggaṃ patto abhavissa, pāpamittasaṃsaggena panassa antarāyo jāto. Evaṃ santepi yasmā ayaṃ tathāgataṃ upasaṅkamitvā ratanattayaṃ saraṇaṃ gato, tasmā mama sāsanamahantatāya yathā nāma koci purisassa vadhaṃ katvā pupphamuṭṭhimattena daṇḍena mucceyya, evameva lohakumbhiyaṃ nibbattitvā tiṃsavassasahassāni adho patanto heṭṭhimatalaṃ patvā tiṃsavassasahassāni uddhaṃ gacchanto punapi uparimatalaṃ pāpuṇitvā muccissatīti idampi kira bhagavatā vuttameva, pāḷiyaṃ pana na ārūḷhaṃ.
国王听闻此经后获得了什么利益呢?他获得了大利益。自从杀害父亲以来,他日夜不得安眠,而在亲近导师、听闻这甘美而富有滋养的法语开示之后,他便得以入睡。他对三宝作了大恭敬。就凡夫所具有的信心而言,无人能及这位国王。未来,他将成为名为“胜者”的独觉佛,然后般涅槃。世尊如此说。那些比丘们内心喜悦,对世尊的教导欢喜信受。显示巴利原文
Idaṃ pana suttaṃ sutvā raññā koci ānisaṃso laddhoti? Mahāānisaṃso laddho. Ayañhi pitu māritakālato paṭṭhāya neva rattiṃ na divā niddaṃ labhati, satthāraṃ pana upasaṅkamitvā imāya madhurāya ojavantiyā dhammadesanāya sutakālato paṭṭhāya niddaṃ labhi. Tiṇṇaṃ ratanānaṃ mahāsakkāraṃ akāsi. Pothujjanikāya saddhāya samannāgato nāma iminā raññā sadiso nāhosi. Anāgate pana vijitāvī nāma paccekabuddho hutvā parinibbāyissatīti . Idamavoca bhagavā. Attamanā te bhikkhū bhagavato bhāsitaṃ abhinandunti.